JP2019024782A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of displaying accurate information.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: variable winning means capable of changing to an open state; variable winning control means capable of performing a round game for changing the variable winning means to the open state for a predetermined number of times; detection means which is provided in a flow path for discharging a game medium passing through a winning area and a game medium not passing the winning area and can detect a game medium passing through the flow path; payout means for paying out the game medium; determination means capable of determining whether or not the state is an advantageous state; and information display means capable of displaying predetermined information which is calculated on the basis of the number of game medium detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state and the number of game medium paid out by the payout means in a predetermined state. Variable winning control means starts a round game on the basis of establishment of the advantageous condition. The determination means determines that the state is the advantageous state until a predetermined period elapses after the predetermined number of round games are finished and the variable winning means changes to the closed state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 102

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, information on the number of balls to be hit (number of hit balls) and the number of winning balls (
A gaming machine that displays a base value) has been proposed.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-118314

  However, there is a possibility that accurate information cannot be displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to display accurate information.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device or the like) for launching a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) to a game area (for example, the game region 10 or the like) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, first or second) The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are used for deriving and displaying a definite special symbol that will be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol that will be a big hit combination in the image display device 5, and passing a game ball in a specific area). A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.) advantageous to the player based on
Variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 or the like) that can be changed to an open state in which the game medium launched into the gaming area can win a prize;
Variable winning control means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the special figure processing shown in FIG. 87) capable of performing a round game for changing the variable winning means to the open state a predetermined number of times;
A game medium that has passed through any of the winning areas provided in the gaming area (first general winning opening 5
0A, 2nd general winning port 50B, 3rd general winning port 50C, 4th general winning port 50D, game balls won in any of the first starting winning port, second starting winning port, or large winning port) A path (for example, an opening 2A of the game board 2A as shown in FIG. 107 (A)) for discharging game media (such as a game ball taken into the out port 52) that has not passed through the winning area. The position at which the game ball discharged from the ball can be detected and the opening 170 of the ball receiving member 1700 as shown in FIG. 107 (B).
A detection means (for example, an out-ball detector 710) provided at a position where a game ball discharged from 1 can be detected) and capable of detecting a game medium passing through the flow path;
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 50A to 50D serving as general winning regions, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7)
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the player is in the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 that determines whether or not the gaming state is based on a probability change flag, a time-shortage flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) 83. For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 107) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible).
The variable winning control means is
The round game is started based on the fact that the advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, the big winning opening door is controlled from the closed state to the open state based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped),
The determination means includes
Until a predetermined period elapses after the predetermined number of round games are finished and the variable winning means is changed to the closed state (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, the big prize opening door is changed from the open state to the closed state). When the time T5 elapses until the time t5 when the time T5 elapses), it is determined that the state is advantageous (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 101, the time when the state change switching waiting time (time T5) elapses). For example, the round game flag is cleared to the off state at t5).
According to this, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The state when the predetermined period elapses (for example, the state at the timing t5) is
A special state after the predetermined number of round games have been completed (for example, a state where an ending effect is being executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 102).
According to this, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The detection means is detachable (for example, the out-sphere detector 710 is detachable by a clasp 740 as shown in FIG. 103B).
According to this, even if it does not have a detection means, it can respond. In addition, maintenance becomes easy.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to C3,
The detection means includes
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2 or the like) that forms a game area (for example, game board 2 for out ball detector 710 as shown in FIG. 107 (B)). Configured as a unit that can be placed in
According to this, maintenance becomes easy. In addition, different models can be used in common.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific period after the game medium enters the general prize area (1 minute, 2 minutes from the general prize,
Or 5 minutes) for a predetermined condition (effective start prize to the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening,
When the reach state is established, effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (prefetching notice effect), specific effect G (variation result notice effect));
A pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and the specific effect is obtained after the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to increase interest until it is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Execute a notification effect to execute a notification effect that identifiable that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area (any one of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning the general winning opening) A gaming machine further comprising means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as the notification effect for informing that the state after the game medium has entered, it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. Includes an effect that is difficult to grasp and an effect that makes it easy for the player to grasp whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, the sound effect is set to a relatively short period (for example, 0.5
(The second to about 2 seconds) is output, and as the latter effect, the character is continued on the image display device until a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) elapses immediately after the game medium enters the general winning area. There is an effect to display automatically.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B2,
The notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not it is the specific period (the specific period (character display period) varies depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of the game until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period varies depending on the form of the notification effect (the display period when the character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when the character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display when the character C appears) (The period will be 5 minutes)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by paying attention to the aspect of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to the means B4 may be as follows, for example.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) has a predetermined time period (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes). Any specific period is selected, and an effect mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed on the image display device 5) is determined based on the selected specific period, and a notification effect (character is specified for the specific period) is determined. The effect to be displayed) is executed.
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, display of the character A) is performed more than when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio. In addition, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, display of the character B) is more effective than when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio.
In addition, when the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond to one to one (if character A is fixed for 1 minute, character B is 2 minutes, character C is fixed for 3 minutes) ), Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) determines one of the predetermined effect modes. The notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) may be executed according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
The variable display means is a start condition based on a game medium entering the start winning area (
When the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the game ball has won the first start winning opening (effective start winning), and when the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the second start winning prize Based on the fulfillment of the start condition (the game is not controlled to the big hit game state and the variable display of the special figure game is not executed) after the game ball wins (effective start win) To perform variable display,
The effect executing means corresponds to a variable display game to be notified in the start winning memory display area 5H for notifying the display result of variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a 47th effect form and a 49th effect form) characterized in that a hold change effect that changes a display part from a normal mode to a special mode is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, the game medium enters the general winning area by creating an interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
A gaming machine of means B5,
Holding information corresponding to variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the existence of a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) Display information) on the display device (image display device 5).
The notice effect is for notifying the display result of variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the form of the hold information (if the start winning determination result specifying command is a command that specifies “big hit”, The display part corresponding to the command is a pending change effect in which the normal mode (for example, blue or red) is changed to the special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command for designating “out”. It is a gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine of means B6,
The effect execution means displays the object (characters A to C) on the display device so as to be able to specify that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is specified (to the general winning opening) (Any of the characters A to C appear immediately after winning)
The notice effect is an effect that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information (the display portion corresponding to the special game that is held by the displayed character performing some action) The game machine is characterized in that the production is changed from a normal mode to a special mode.
According to this, it is possible to suggest the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the advance notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied by the common object, and the game to the general winning area It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific performance.
Specifically, it is possible to recognize that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information by creating an effect in which the mode of the hold information also changes with a change in the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action). Become.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B7,
If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the specific period, the specific effect is not executed (the specific effect F and the specific effect G are not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B8,
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four from the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D),
The specific period varies depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (first general winning opening 50
When winning A or the second general winning opening 50B, the specific period can be 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes after the general winning (characters A to C can appear), but the third general winning 50C
Alternatively, the gaming machine is characterized in that, when winning at the fourth general winning opening 50D, only a period of 5 minutes can be a specific period from the general winning (only the character C can appear).
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B10-means B21 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Motion detection means capable of detecting the player's motion (operation button 30 and effect control CPU 120
)When,
A specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-continuation effect) is detected when the player's motion (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stopping operation, all symbol stopping operation) is detected by the motion detecting means after the game medium enters the general winning area. A game machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 50th effect form to the 53rd effect form) characterized by comprising effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice effect and a chance eye notice effect) .
According to this, after the game medium enters the general winning area, the specific effect is executed in response to the player's action, so that it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
A gaming machine of means B10,
It is reported in a identifiable manner that the game medium has entered the general winning area (a button icon 400 for each winning a general winning opening in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form).
In the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, which increases 0, the notice effect (“cut-in”, “pseudo-run”, “chance”) that can be executed every time a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, A gaming machine characterized by further comprising notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a notification effect (displaying characters 4000a to 4000c in accordance with the determination result).
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
A gaming machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of action (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling execution of the specific effect, the notification effect mode ("cut-in" character 4000a, "pseudo ream" The gaming machine is characterized in that the characters 4000b and 4000c) of “chance eyes” are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of operation can perform the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B13 is
A gaming machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning port 50A of the left game area 10A or (In the case of winning in the second general winning opening 50B, notification is made at a higher rate than in the case of winning in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D in the right game area 10B). It is a gaming machine.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B14 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B13,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the mode of the notification effect is different (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B is awarded). In such a case, the character “4000a” of “cut-in” and the character 4 of “pseudo-continuous”
000b can be displayed, and the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D.
In the case of winning a prize, the characters “cut-in” 4000a and the characters “chance” 400
0c can be displayed).
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B15 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B14,
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the general winning a prize was won in the normal state). Case (the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50 in the left game area 10A)
In the case of winning in B) than in the case of winning in the general winning opening in the case of the probability change state or the short time state (when winning in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D of the right game area 10B). Notification is made at a high rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B15,
The state of the notification effect varies depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, “cut-in” in the normal state).
The character 4000a and the “pseudo-ream” character 4000b can be displayed, and the “cut-in” character 4000a and the “chance eye” character 4000c can be displayed in the probability variation state or the short time state. )
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B17 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B16,
The effect execution means can execute the specific effect when the predetermined action is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, When you win more than 2 times at the prize opening, you can perform pseudo-continuous notice effect,
(When you win the general winning award three times or more, you will be able to perform a chance eye notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B18 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B17,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The execution ratio of the specific effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B). When winning, the notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when winning in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B18,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the types of specific effects that can be executed differ (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening). When winning 50B, either a cut-in notice effect or a pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed. And any chance chance notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B19,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the execution ratio of the specific effect varies (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, when a general winning opening is won in the normal state) In the case of winning in the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B in the left gaming area 10A), in the case of winning in the general winning opening in the probability changing state or in the short time state (third general in the right gaming area 10B) (When winning at the winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D), a notification is made to enable execution of a specific effect at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B21 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B20,
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, in the normal state, the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous effect). Any one of the notice effects can be executed, and in the case of the probability change state or the short time state, either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B22-means B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
The general winning area when the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or has been decided to be executed) When the game medium enters and when the variable display is not executed (the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is determined to be executed during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) The gaming machine (27th effect form to 30th effect form pachinko) characterized in that the ratio of the specific effect to be executed differs depending on when the game medium enters the general winning area during the period when the game is not performed. A gaming machine 1).
According to this, when the variable display is executed and when the variable display is not executed, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B23 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point grant effect). In the gaming machine (27th effect form, 29th effect form pachinko gaming machine 1) is there.
According to this, even when variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect), and the general winning area when the variable display is not executed This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 28th effect form and the 30th effect form), which is not executed when a game medium enters.
According to this, when variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B25 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
The general winning area when the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or has been decided to be executed) When the game medium enters and when the variable display is not executed (the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is determined to be executed during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) A different specific effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area during a period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a 31st effect form and a 32nd effect form. ).
According to this, when the variable display is being executed and the case where the variable display is not being executed are different different specific effects, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. .

The gaming machine of means B26 is
A gaming machine of means B25,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
When a game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is executed, an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B)
: Pre-reading notice effect) as the specific effect,
When a game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is not executed, an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point giving effect) is executed as the specific effect. This is a characteristic gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form).
According to this, when variable display is being executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area, and even when variable display is not being executed,
It is possible to appropriately enhance interest when a game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B27 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B22 to the means B26 (27th effect form to 32nd effect form pachinko gaming machine 1),
Depending on the state when the game medium has entered the general winning area when the variable display is executed, the ratio of the specific effect to be executed is different (for example, a special game at the time of winning a general winning opening) Whether or not the game is executed, the number of reserved memory at the time of winning the general prize opening, and the gaming state at the time of winning the general prize opening is the normal state, or the probability change state or the short time state Depending on the classification of whether or not, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to give interest to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B28 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B22 to the means B27 (the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form pachinko gaming machine 1),
When the variable display is executed, different specific effects are executed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (for example, a special game is executed when winning the general winning opening) Whether the game is in the normal state, the probability change state, or the short-time state. Depending on the category, etc., different types of specific effects are executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to give interest to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

Moreover, the form which implements invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B29-means B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 33), a winning rate at a start winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and a character wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine that executes an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to display information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information more easily visible. Means B29
The invention according to the means B39 is made in view of the above situation, and is to make it easy to visually recognize information related to the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B29 is
An entry area (a first start prize opening, a second start prize opening, first to first entry points into which game media (game balls) can enter
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having a fourth general winning opening 50A to 50D),
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening) Comprising display means (image display device 5);
The information display means displays effect information (for example, a decorative pattern and a fourth pattern) different from the entry information in an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as exemplified in FIG. 42), Is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B30 is
A gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the entry information regardless of the aspect of the effect information (as illustrated in FIG. 42, whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed and the fourth symbol is also displayed. Regardless of whether or not is variably displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening,
The number of winnings at the second start winning award is displayed in the first area α, and the displayed number of winnings can be updated according to the winning at each winning award)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, approach information can be visually recognized irrespective of the aspect of effect information.

The invention according to means B31 is
An entry area (a first start prize opening, a second start prize opening, first to first entry points into which game media (game balls) can enter
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having a fourth general winning opening 50A to 50D),
Error detection means for detecting errors (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.)
Anomaly detection sensor group 26);
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Display means (image display device 5),
The information display means sends error information (for example, an error message) for notifying the occurrence of the error to an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIGS. 42 and 43). Is displayed in a second area β) that is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B32
A gaming machine of means B31,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as illustrated in FIG. 43, regardless of whether an error message is displayed or not) The number of winnings, the number of winnings at the first start winning opening, the number of winnings at the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and are displayed according to the winnings at each winning opening. The number of winnings can be updated)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means B33 is
An entry area (a first start prize opening, a second start prize opening, first to first entry points into which game media (game balls) can enter
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having a fourth general winning opening 50A to 50D),
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening) Comprising display means (image display device 5);
The information display means displays a display result of variable display (for example, a display result of a final decoration symbol (final stop symbol) or a fourth symbol) executed based on the fact that the game medium has entered the start area, and the entry information. Is displayed in a region where the visibility of the game is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. 42, the second area β different from the first area α in which the number of winnings at each winning opening is displayed). It is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B34 is
A gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the variable display is being executed (as illustrated in FIG. 42, whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed,
Regardless of whether or not the 4th symbol is variably displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. Displayed and the number of displayed winnings can be updated according to the winnings at each winning opening)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
This makes it possible to visually recognize the entry information even when variable display is being executed.

The invention according to means B35 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B34,
Operable operation means (operation button 30);
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the entry information on the information display means in accordance with the operation of the operation means (as shown in FIG. And a presentation control CPU 120 for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it becomes possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the entry information.

The invention according to means B36 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B35,
Operation means (operation button 30) that can be operated by the player;
A total period setting means for setting the total period of the entry information in accordance with the operation of the operation means (production control CPU 120 for setting the total period based on the setting by the operation button 30 as illustrated in FIG. 46); A gaming machine characterized by further comprising:
According to this, the total period can be set according to the player's judgment.

The invention according to means B37 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B36,
Game state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a game state (a big hit game state, a probability change state, a short time state, a low base state, a high base state, etc.)
)
The information display means can display the entry information according to the gaming state (as illustrated in FIG. 45, the number of winnings in the low base state and the number of winnings in the high base state can be displayed separately. Is)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information corresponding to the gaming state.

The invention according to means B38 is
A gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means for performing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the fact that the game medium has entered the start area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B),
The gaming state control means includes a low-frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control for the second starting prize opening is not executed) and a high-frequency state (first 2) A high base state in which high opening control for the start winning a prize is being executed)
The information display means includes the entry information relating to the period controlled to the low frequency state (such as the number of general winnings in the low base state illustrated in FIG. 45) and the entry relating to the period controlled to the high frequency state. It is a gaming machine that can display information (such as the number of general winnings in the high base state illustrated in FIG. 45).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information according to the low frequency state and the entry information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means B39 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B38,
Notification is made when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as exemplified in FIG. 46, when the set number of winnings per total period does not satisfy a predetermined reference value, the fact is notified) A gaming machine further comprising a notification means (image display device 5) for displaying a message.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition.

Further, embodiments for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions relating to means B40 and means B41 shown below. Conventionally, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 32, FIG. 33)
As shown in the figure, when the player accepts the start of the game by entering a password, the winning rate at the start winning opening in the gaming machine is calculated, and the character wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning rate A gaming machine that executes an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk in the game hall) to confirm information relating to the entry of the game medium into the entry area such as the start prize opening. Means B40, means B41
The invention according to the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is intended to enable only a person other than a player (for example, a shop clerk) to confirm information.

The invention according to means B40 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having an entry area (for example, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter. A gaming machine 1),
A granting unit (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) for granting a gaming value (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the entry area;
Specific operation means (for example, a mode changeover switch 31 and a reset button) that are disabled by the player;
Cumulative value information (for example, FIG.
And a notification means (for example, the image display device 5) for notifying the payout number of each general winning opening shown in FIG.
The notifying means notifies the cumulative value information based on the operation of the specific operation means (for example, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device when the mode changeover switch 31 is operated to enter the maintenance mode). 5)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a shop clerk) can confirm the information.

The “specific operation means that cannot be operated by the player” may be any means that can be operated by, for example, a game shop clerk or a game machine inspector / inspector.

The invention according to means B41 is
A gaming machine of means B40,
Providing effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for executing effects related to games
The notification means is in an aspect according to the aspect of the effect executed by the effect executing means,
The cumulative value information is notified (for example, a character appearing during a notice effect or a reach effect performs a display or a sound output that reads out information in the winning number management table)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of gaming machine information is based on the notification mode.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions related to means B42 to means B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory in the memory is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187, the number of entered balls is uniformly counted up by one by entering the game balls into the normal winning opening. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means B42 to the means B51 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to increase the interest of games in gaming machines having a general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B42 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (specific effect D for gradually increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from the lowest 0 level to the maximum 10 levels) that changes the performance mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Executable specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120
) And
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (a division between a period in which the special symbol variable display is executed and a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed),
In the specific effect, the rate of change of the effect mode is different (the rate of executing the effect of increasing the filling region 2100a in the gauge image 2100 by one step is different).
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form).
According to this, the interest rate when the game medium enters the general winning area is increased by changing the ratio of the change in the production mode in the specific effect according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
A gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 5) has a predetermined period (effect control CPU).
120, the variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received), the variable display (
Variable display of decorative patterns)
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 34th effect form) characterized in that the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different.
According to this, according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different, so that the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B43,
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) ) And the display result of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (a jackpot symbol, an off symbol), the rate of change of the production mode in the specific effect is made different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the rate of change of the production mode in the specific production may be different (for example, it changes at a high rate when it becomes a big hit symbol, and changes at a lower rate when it becomes a loss symbol). .

The gaming machine of means B44 is
A gaming machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 5) ends the variable display based on the start condition (previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). And the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative design) is executed based on the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit gaming state) ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect (prefetching notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display as a target of the prefetching notice effect). Prior notice effect execution means (CPU 1 for effect control) executed before
20), and
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) The ratio of the change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies according to the variable display count until the variable display is executed), and the pachinko gaming machine of the 35th effect form 1).
According to this, depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed, the ratio of the change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies. The entertainment of the production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B44,
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) Effect in the specific effect depending on the variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (big hit symbol, off symbol) You may make it the ratio in which an aspect changes differ. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed within a predetermined range when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed. In the case of being within (for example, 2 times or less), the rate of change in the effect mode in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (high in the case of a big hit symbol) It may be changed at a rate, and when it becomes an outlier symbol, it may be changed at a lower rate).

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B42 to the means B44,
Reach effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When a game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state in the reach change), and after the execution of the reach effect When a game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is after the reach state in reach change),
It is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 36th effect form) characterized in that the rate of change of the effect mode in the specific effect is different.
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Different ratios can further enhance the interest of specific effects.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B42 to the means B45,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
Depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (when the game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, and the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D). The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 37th effect form) is characterized in that the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different.
According to this, the interest rate of the specific effect can be further enhanced by changing the ratio of the change of the effect mode in the specific effect according to the general winning area where the game medium has entered.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (specific effect D for gradually increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from the lowest 0 level to the maximum 10 levels) that changes the performance mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Executable specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120
) And
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (a division between a period in which the special symbol variable display is executed and a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed),
The stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production is different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is different).
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form).
According to this, depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B48 is
A gaming machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 5) has a predetermined period (effect control CPU).
120, the variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received), the variable display (
Variable display of decorative patterns)
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 39th effect form) characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different.
According to this, depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different, and thus the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48,
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) ) And the display result of the variable display (a jackpot symbol, a loss symbol) executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage of changing the presentation mode in the specific effect is different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production may be different (for example, the number of stages changes when the jackpot symbol is changed, and the number of stages changes when it becomes a loss symbol). good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
A gaming machine of means B47 or means B48,
The variable display means (image display device 5) ends the variable display based on the start condition (previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). And the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative design) is executed based on the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit gaming state) ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect (prefetching notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display as a target of the prefetching notice effect). Prior notice effect execution means (CPU 1 for effect control) executed before
20), and
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) The stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs according to the variable display frequency until the variable display is executed), and the pachinko gaming machine of the 40th production form 1).
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production varies depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice production is executed. The entertainment of the production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B49,
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) Effect in the specific effect depending on the variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (big hit symbol, off symbol) You may make it the stage in which an aspect changes differ. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed within a predetermined range when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed. In the case of within (for example, 2 times or less), the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production varies depending on the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the announcement production (for example, when it becomes a big hit symbol) It is also possible to change the number of stages, and change the number of stages to a smaller number if the pattern is out of place.

The gaming machine of means B50 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B47 to the means B49,
Reach effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When a game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state in the reach change), and after the execution of the reach effect When a game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is after the reach state in reach change),
It is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 41st effect form) characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect.
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Different stages can further enhance the interest of specific effects.

The gaming machine of means B51 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B47 to the means B50,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
Depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (when the game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, and the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D). The game machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 42nd effect form) is characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game ball is won in any of the above.
According to this, the stage in which a production | presentation aspect changes in a specific production differs according to the general winning area | region where the game medium approached, and can further enhance the interest of a specific production.

Moreover, the form which implements invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B52-means B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory in the memory is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, an effect (a count-up display) is executed every time a game ball enters the normal winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, when a game medium does not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to grasp this, but this is not considered in the prior art. The invention according to the means B52 to the means B56 is made in view of the above situation, and it is possible to grasp that the game medium does not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5)
When,
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number (
When the number of winnings in the general winning opening in 10 minutes detected to be playing is 0, or the number of winnings in the general winning opening in 30 minutes detected to be playing is less than 3 , Etc.), a specific effect E for displaying on the image display device 5 a notification image 2200 or the like including an image imitating the form of a general prize opening and the characters “no general prize”.
And a specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing ().
According to this, it is possible for the player and the game hall to grasp that the number of game media entering the general winning area is less than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53 is
A gaming machine of means B52,
Setting means for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means is permitted (an effect of determining whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on the game field setting and the player setting in the display setting table) Control CPU 120),
Clerk operation accepting means (display changeover switch 32) for accepting a setting operation by the clerk,
When the setting operation is accepted by the store clerk operation accepting unit, the setting unit performs setting to permit execution of the specific effect (the specific effect E (notifying that there is no general prize) based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32). , Notification that the number of general prizes is small)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the intention of the game hall can be reflected as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54 is
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53,
Storage means (R
A winning counter area formed in the AM 122),
The number of entries stored in the storage means is not held at the time of power interruption (the value of the winning number counter area is erased by power interruption).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control burden for maintaining the memory of the number of entries at the time of power interruption.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B52 to the means B54,
Depending on the state of the gaming machine, the rate at which the specific effect is executed is different (for example, the specific effect E is executed at a different rate between the normal state and the probability variation state or the time-short state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of specific production can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B52 to the means B55,
Different specific effects are executed according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed in a different manner depending on whether it is in the normal state or in the probability variation state or the time-short state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of specific production can be further enhanced.

Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B57-means B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 83), during the execution of a big hit game, the number of prize balls (given value) obtained by entering the game medium into the big prize opening, There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (given value) obtained when a game medium enters a normal winning opening (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intention of the game hall or the player is not reflected as to whether or not an effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means B57 to B64 is made in view of the above situation, and reflects the intention of the game hall and the player as to whether or not the presentation is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means B57 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
When a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening)
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for performing variable display of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (displays information in the winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31 and the setting of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30. Based on the setting, the object is increased every time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, the specific effect A: the change result notice effect, the specific effect B: the look-ahead Notification means (image display device 5) capable of executing a notice effect);
A gaming machine comprising: setting means (mode change switch 31, display change switch 32, and operation button 30) for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect is permitted by the specific effect executing means. .
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall or the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
A gaming machine of means B57,
It further comprises clerk operation accepting means (mode changeover switch 31 and display changeover switch 32) for accepting a setting operation by the clerk,
The setting means performs a setting for permitting execution of the specific effect when a setting operation is received by the store clerk operation receiving means (a winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode switch 31). Based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32, the object is increased for each entry of the game ball into the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, the specific effect A : Enables execution of change result notice effect, Specific effect B: Enables prefetch notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the intention of the game hall can be reflected as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B59 is
A gaming machine of means B57 or means B58,
A player operation receiving means for receiving a setting operation by the player;
When the setting operation is accepted by the player operation accepting means, the setting means performs a setting for permitting the execution of the specific effect (based on the setting by the operation button 30 during the demonstration screen display, Based on the setting by the operation button 30 in the demonstration screen display, which increases the object every time the game ball enters the game, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed. Can be executed, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the player's intention regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B60 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B59,
The specific effect informs the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period (a period controlled to the big hit gaming state) so as to be able to be specified (the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls to the big winning opening) The game machine is characterized in that the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls are displayed separately.
According to this, the playability in a predetermined period can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B61 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B60,
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form) when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a featured gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B61,
The specific effect executing means executes different specific effects according to the number of game media entering the general winning area (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form). It is.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B63 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B62,
The specific effect is an effect of notifying the number of game media entering the general winning area in an identifiable manner (increasing the object each time a game ball enters the general winning port)
When a game is not being performed on the gaming machine (the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and the start winning port specifying command, the general winning port specifying command, and the big winning port winning command are received for a predetermined period of time. An effect control CPU 12 that determines whether or not the game has ended based on the absence of the game.
0), in the specific effect, informs that it is possible to specify that the number of game media entering the general winning area is 0 (when the game end determination is made, the general display displayed on the image display device 5) Delete all objects corresponding to the number of winnings in the winning opening)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B64 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B63,
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that display information (an object corresponding to the number of winnings in a general winning opening) corresponding to the number of entering game media into the general winning area is displayed.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp the number of game media entering the general winning area.

Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B65-means B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 59), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the start memory display changes, and the start memory There has been proposed a gaming machine that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is “winning” or “out of game”. In a gaming machine having such a general winning opening, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening. The invention according to the means B65 to the means B77 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to enhance the interest of the game in a gaming machine having a general winning opening.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
When a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening)
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for performing variable display of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or short-time state) , The ratio of executing the specific effect is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher rate than the probability change or the short-time state)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a first effect form to a fourth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
When a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening)
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for performing variable display of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or short-time state) , Execute different specific effects (specify the specific effect A in the normal state, and execute the specific effect B in the probability change or short-time state)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
Game machine of means B65 or means B66 (2nd effect form-4th effect form, 10th effect form-
It is a pachinko gaming machine 1) in the twelfth production form,
In the first game state (normal state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first entry number,
In the second game state (probability change or short-time state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second entry number different from the first entry number. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
When a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening)
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for performing variable display of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after reaching the reach state of reach fluctuation) and the second period (before reaching the reach state of reach fluctuation or a period other than reach fluctuation)
When the game medium enters the general winning area at this time, the ratio of executing the specific effect is different (after the reach fluctuation state is established, than in the period other than the reach fluctuation state or before the reach fluctuation state is established). A specific production is executed at a high rate)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a thirteenth effect form to a sixteenth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
When a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening)
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for performing variable display of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after reaching the reach state of reach fluctuation) and the second period (before reaching the reach state of reach fluctuation or a period other than reach fluctuation)
When the game medium enters the general winning area at the time of, the different specific effects are executed (
After the reach state is established, the specific effect A is executed. Before the reach state is established, the specific effect B is executed. After the reach change state is established, the specific effect A is executed. Performs a specific effect B)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a 17th effect form to a 24th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B70 is
A gaming machine of means B68 or means B69 (14th effect form to 16th effect form, 22nd effect form to 24th effect form pachinko gaming machine 1),
During the first period (after the reach state of reach variation is established), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first entry number,
During the second period (period other than reach fluctuation or before reach state of reach fluctuation)
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second entry number different from the first entry number.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B70 (second effect form, sixth effect form, tenth effect form to twelfth effect form, fourteenth effect form, eighteenth effect form, and twenty-second effect form) Pachinko machine 1)
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a game medium enters each of the plurality of general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B72 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B71 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the seventeenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form),
The variable display means includes a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the big hit gaming state after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The identification information (first special figure,
Variable display of the second special figure, decorative design)
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100 for controlling to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player) )When,
Pre-start determination means for performing a pre-start determination to determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied (control to a big hit gaming state based on a big hit determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning) And a game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not to perform,
The specific effect executing means is
Based on the pre-start determination, an effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state is applied to the specific effect (specific effect B) before the start condition for the variable display to be targeted is satisfied. It is a gaming machine characterized by being executed as
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display start condition is established.

The gaming machine of means B73 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B72 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first effect form to the 24th effect form),
The variable display means includes a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the big hit gaming state after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The identification information (first special figure,
Variable display of the second special figure, decorative design)
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100 for controlling to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player) )When,
Start determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the start condition is satisfied (starting determination means for storing a big hit determination when starting variable symbol variable display) A game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state based on a random number,
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that, based on the determination at the start time, an effect of notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state (a change result notice effect) is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B73 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the third effect form and the fifteenth effect form),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution ratio of the specific effect varies depending on the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the frequency of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B75 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B74 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 11th effect form and the 23rd effect form),
The game machine is characterized in that a specific effect is executed according to the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the frequency of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B75 (4th effect form, 8th effect form, 12th effect form, 16th effect form, 20th effect form, 24th effect form pachinko gaming machine 1) Because
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of entry of game media into the plurality of general winning areas is a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the order in which the game media enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B76 (4th effect form, 8th effect form, 12th effect form, 16th effect form, 20th effect form, 24th effect form pachinko gaming machine 1) Because
There are other winning areas different from the general winning area (first starting prize opening, second starting prize opening),
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of entry of game media into the general prize area and the order of entry of game media into the other prize areas is a specific order. .
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the order of entry of the game media into the general winning area and other winning areas.

Moreover, the form which implements invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means A1-means A9 shown below. Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a windmill and a large number of game nails are provided on the surface of the game board to change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In this type of gaming machine, the passing rate of winning a prize mouth and passing gate is
Depending on the adjustment of game nails provided on the game board, etc., the payout rate of game balls may be designed by adjusting the game nails. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine what adjustments were made to the game nails and the like, it was difficult to determine whether or not the payout rate was as designed. The invention according to the means A1 to the means A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing what adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.)
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second start winning opening, a special variable winning ball device 7 serving as a large winning opening, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning opening, a general winning area, and the like. A game value (for example, a game ball, a slot machine medal, etc.) is paid out by winning a prize to the general winning openings 50A to 50D and displaying a predetermined symbol combination on the active line of the slot machine. Predetermined information (for example, combination (relation ratio), combination ratio, machine discount, etc.) relating to the game value provided on the main board (for example, the main board 11, the main board of the slot machine, etc.) that controls the game. ) Can be displayed (for example, display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.), and the door frame (for example, gaming machine frame 3, slot machine door frame, etc.) is opened. The display of the predetermined information is limited (for example, the display of the role combination (relation ratio) is stopped, depending on the occurrence of a possible error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65). ).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information when the error is canceled when the door frame is opened.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
When the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65 or the like) occurs, the restriction (for example, the display of the role combination (connection ratio) ratio, for example) is performed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
When the door frame (for example, the frame 3 for a gaming machine, the door frame of a slot machine, etc.) is opened after the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65) occurs. In addition, the restriction (for example, the display of the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio is stopped, for example) is performed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A3 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is provided on the condition that the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65, etc.) has not occurred. The predetermined information (for example, a combination (connection ratio), a combination ratio, a machine discount, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A4 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.),
A predetermined time (for example, a measurement time t measured by a measurement timer in the display restriction confirmation processing of FIG. 63, etc.) after canceling the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65). ) Elapses after the elapse of time (for example, the role combination (relation ratio), role ratio, machine discount, etc.)
Is displayed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A5 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is configured to display a plurality of the predetermined information (for example, a combination (relation ratio), a combination ratio, a machine ratio, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). It is possible to switch and display each.
According to the said structure, the increase in a member can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A6 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) uses a predetermined unit (for example, the number of prize balls) as the predetermined information (for example, a combination of consecutive (continuous ratio), a ratio of roles, a machine discount, etc.). Information for every 60000).
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A7 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is information for each predetermined unit (for example, for example, a combination (relation ratio), a combination ratio, a machine discount, etc.). The short-term service group (run ratio) and the short-term role ratio) and cumulative information (for example, the cumulative service group (run ratio), the cumulative role ratio) are switched and displayed.
According to the said structure, the information for every predetermined unit and cumulative information can be compared.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A8 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) includes the main substrate (for example, the main substrate 11, the main substrate of the slot machine, etc.), and is caulked substrate case (for example, substrate case) 201, 202).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) The figure which shows the winning number information managed by the winning number management table, (b) The figure which shows the winning number information managed by the display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between game hall setting and player setting. It is explanatory drawing in the case of performing a display setting with the operation button which a player can operate. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the object corresponding to the winning to a general winning opening. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the number of wins to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each production performed according to a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a fluctuation result notice effect and a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 1st effect form-a 4th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 5th production form-the 8th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 9th effect form-a 12th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 13th effect form-the 16th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 17th effect form-the 20th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st effect form-the 24th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form. It is a figure which shows the number-of-wins information managed by the number-of-wins management table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a point provision effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 27th effect form-the 30th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a gauge update effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 33rd effect form-the 36th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 37th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 38th effect form-the 41st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 42nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a non-winning alert | report effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 43rd effect form-the 46th effect form. It is a figure which shows the appearance ratio of character AC in the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is a figure which shows the display period of character AC in the 47th effect form-the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change effect in the 47th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change result notice effect in the 48th effect form. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each production in the 47th production form and the 48th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th production form and the 51st production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of continuous hit operation alerting | reporting and cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation alert | report and pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation alert | report and pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation alerting | reporting, and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation alerting | reporting, and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each announcement effect for every general winning opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode of an error message. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the item example of the number-of-wins information which can be displayed on a 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of a total period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information, and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information, and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of the built-in ROM area in CPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the use area program area and non-use area program area in a built-in ROM area. It is a table | surface which shows the calling instruction used in a built-in ROM area. It is a figure which shows the other structure of the use area program area and non-use area program area in a built-in ROM area. (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the first interrupt processing, (B) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the second interrupt processing, and (C) is a processing procedure of the third interrupt processing. FIG. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor, (B-1)-(B-5) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data memorize | stored in the storage area of the ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a combination (ream ratio) and ratio related process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a role combination (ream ratio) and role ratio display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a display restriction confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a display switching control process. It is a table | surface which shows the kind of error in a gaming machine. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt processing is executed and the display state of the monitor, etc., and (B) is the signal flow and monitor when the first interrupt processing is executed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship with display states, such as. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of each LED of the display part in a display monitor. It is a perspective view of the main board | substrate with which the display monitor is arrange | positioned by the 1st display monitor arrangement | positioning aspect. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the frame for game machines to which the main board | substrate was attached open | released from the outer frame. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. It is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the game board from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired bonuses, and the number of consecutive acquired bonuses. (A)-(D) are the front views which simplified the modification of the main board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing regarding performance information. It is explanatory drawing regarding performance information. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special figure process (special figure process process). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a state control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit release process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing after big hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is explanatory drawing explaining a state change switching waiting time. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining a state change switching waiting time. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a state control process. It is explanatory drawing explaining a state change switching waiting time. It is a structural example of an out sphere detector. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error notification process. It is an example of the display mode which alert | reports an error. It is an example of the display mode which alert | reports an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance information update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance information update process. It is an example of the arrangement position of an out sphere detector.

As described above, the entry of the game media into the general winning area has an effect on the game as compared to the entry of the game medium into the start winning area where a special symbol variable display is executed when the game medium enters. Is low. Further, when the display result of the special symbol variable display becomes the specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Compared with the approach, the player's interest is low and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Under such circumstances, game nails may be maintained on the game hall side so that entry of the game media into the general winning area is substantially difficult.

However, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is usual to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Therefore, it is desirable that the game nail is in a maintenance state where the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency on the game site side. To increase the player's interest in entering the game media into the general prize area,
It is necessary to make the player aware of the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. In a gaming machine according to an embodiment to be described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of gaming in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In addition, pachinko machine 1
Has a glass door frame 3a formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. The gaming machine frame 3 is attached to the outer frame by a hinge mechanism so as to be opened and closed.
This outer frame is fixed to a so-called game island in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are arranged in parallel. By opening the gaming machine frame 3 with respect to the outer frame, a store clerk or the like can visually recognize the back side of the gaming machine frame 3 or the inside of the gaming island.

The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area 10 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 10, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven. The game area 10 includes a left game area 10A and a right game area 10B. The game area 10 is an area through which a game ball can pass on the game board 2.
The left game area 10A is on the left side and the right game area 10B is on the right side with the center of 0 as a reference.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area 10). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbol ("Special Figure") that is possible multiple types of identification information (Special Identification Information)
(Also referred to as “variable display”). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are numbers such as “0” to “9” or “−
It is not limited to what is comprised from the symbol etc. which show "." Below, the first special symbol display device 4
The special symbol variably displayed by A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. There may be one special symbol display device.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A in the special game is displayed.
Corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special figure by the second special variable display and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, in the decorative symbol display area to be a variable display section divided into a plurality of, for example, three Thus, a decorative pattern, which is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) each identifiable, is variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Medium ”,“ Right ”decorative symbol display area 5
At L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern change (for example, vertical scroll display) is started.
After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game,
“Left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5 in the image display device 5
At R, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended.

In the image display device 5, as display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R,
Three regions may be provided that are bonded or separated, or that can be bonded and separated. The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. The production control CPU 120 is the first
When the variable display of the first special figure is executed on the special symbol display device 4A, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display device 4B performs the second special figure. When the variable display is executed, the effect display is executed by the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). There are numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. Can be, for example, a decoration image showing a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (designs that consist of the characters “Accuracy”) and blank symbols (which are also known as “2R probable big hits”) and blank symbols ( A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

While the decorative symbols are changing, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C,
In 5R, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number flows from top to bottom sequentially from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, Subsequently, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed.
Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

In the lower right part of the display screen of the image display device 5, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B for displaying a fourth symbol after a decorative symbol, a special symbol and a normal symbol which will be described later. In this embodiment, the 4th symbol variable display for the first special figure is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived. The 4th symbol display area 5A and the 4th symbol variable display for the 2nd special symbol are displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the 2nd special symbol, and the display result of the variable display is derived. A fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special figure is provided.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative design is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special design. (However, to be precise, the variable display of the decorative design is specified by the CPU 120 for effect control. This is performed by measuring the variation time recognized based on the command.) When performing an effect using the image display device 5, for example, an effect in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects, for example, and effects such that the moving object shields all or part of the screen are performed. For this reason, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 5, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether the current state of variable display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The 4th symbol for the first special figure and the 4th symbol for the second special figure are sometimes collectively referred to as the 4th symbol. The 4th symbol display area 5A for the first special figure and the second special figure The 4th symbol display area 5B for illustration may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

The variable display (variable display) of the 4th symbol displays the 4th symbol display areas 5A and 5B in a predetermined display color (
For example, the 4th symbol display area 5A for the first special figure is white, and the 4th symbol display area 5B for the second special figure is black). This is realized by continuing the repeated blinking state. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol.
Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display device 4A
The 4th symbol display area 5A for special figure lights up in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of a big hit (
Display). Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Also,
When the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol remains lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Become. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5A.

When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the second
The special symbol 4th symbol display area 5B is lit in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of a big hit (
Display). Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Also,
When the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol remains lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Become. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5B.

In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. Then, when the start condition (the first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts in the mode (transmission color) (for example, the leftmost display part in the display part in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. In addition, when the game condition of the special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied (second start condition) based on the game ball having entered the second start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts which are the modes is changed to red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed, and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

In other words, when a start winning is generated, in the start winning memory display area 5H, holding information (an object indicated by a round shape in FIGS. 1 and 31, etc.) corresponding to a special game executed based on the start winning is obtained. Display control to be newly displayed is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left according to the order in which the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, it is also the order in which the start condition is satisfied). When n pieces of hold information are displayed (n
When a new start prize is generated when the special game for each batch is held), the n + 1th hold information from the left is newly displayed corresponding to the new start prize. And
When the start condition of the special figure game being held is satisfied, the leftmost hold information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth hold information (n ≧ 2) from the left is shifted to the left one by one. As a result, the (n-1) th is displayed.

The order in which the start conditions for the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions are generated, but the start condition for the special figure game for the second special figure is greater than the start condition for the special figure game for the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). On the other hand, the start condition of the special figure game relating to the first special figure is established in preference to the start condition of the special figure game relating to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation). Anyway.

In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. First hold indicator 25A and second
Each of the hold indicators 25B includes, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first and second reserved memory numbers. A movable accessory 1000 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The movable accessory 1000 has a built-in motor and lamp for operating a star-shaped member. The movable accessory 1000 operates (rotation operation and lighting) when an effect of notifying a big hit, for example, a later-described change result notification effect or a prefetch notification effect is executed.

Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 27 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 27 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter or enters the second start winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 27 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state. Easy to open and open.

A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If so, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a solenoid 28 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG.
Is provided with a grand prize opening door that is driven to open and close, and the grand prize opening door is formed to change between an open state and a closed state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the special prize opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG.
Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15
Game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not satisfied, variable display is suspended. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first based on the satisfaction of the first start condition
If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the special figure is not satisfied, the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Is done.
If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When the second
The pending storage number is decremented by 1 (decrement). The added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be the total reserved memory number or the special figure reserved memory number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is
It is called a general game (also called “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 is, for example, “
A plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numerals indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like are variably displayed. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gates 41A and 41B.

In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 50A to 50D which are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A winning area is provided.

The general winning ports 50A to 50D are constituted by ball receiving members that project forward (player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (horizontal width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are arranged in the horizontal direction so as not to pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. In addition, each general winning opening 50A ~
The interval between the ball receiving members provided with 50D is an interval through which at least one game ball can pass. Also, a winning ball device for switching the opening / closing of the openings of the general winning ports 50A to 50D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the normally variable winning ball device 6B for switching the opening / closing of the second start winning port) is not provided. It is always open. In addition, general winning opening 50A-5
Even if the game ball wins at 0D, neither the special-game variable display start condition nor the normal-game variable display start condition is established based on the winning.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that the game balls have won the general prize opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Along with the winning of a game ball in the winning opening, a variable winning ball apparatus, for example, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B for performing opening / closing control of the second start winning opening, or a special variable for performing opening / closing control of the large winning opening. It is good also as the specific value provided when a game ball wins a general winning opening to make the winning ball apparatus 7 actuate and to make a game ball easy to win a 2nd start winning opening or a big winning opening.

Further, the specific value given to the player may be made different depending on the general winning opening, for example, 5 when the game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C.
10 prize balls are awarded when a game ball is awarded to the first general prize opening 50A or the fourth general prize opening 50D (that is, a specific value having a different size is given). May be given). The specific value given when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is a predetermined number of winning balls, but the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening. When a game ball is won in 50D, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 7 may be operated (that is, a different type of specific value is given).

In addition, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, for example, according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening And a case where the variable winning ball apparatus operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the specific value type is different), so that different effects are executed. Also good. In addition, when 10 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening, and when 5 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening. Different effects may be executed (that is, when specific values have different magnitudes).

As shown in FIG. 2, the first general prize corresponding to each of the first general prize opening 50A, the second general prize opening 50B, the third general prize opening 50C, and the fourth general prize opening 50D is shown in FIG. It is detected by the mouth switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24D. When a game ball is detected by the first general prize port switch 24A, the second general prize port switch 24B, the third general prize port switch 24C, and the fourth general prize port switch 24D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected. Will be paid out as a prize ball.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 10 is provided by providing the winning port switches corresponding to the four general winning ports 50A to 50D.
At 0, it is possible to detect not only that the game ball has won the general winning opening but also which general game opening has won the game ball.

In addition, it is not restricted to the structure in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for every general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common prize port switch (a switch for detecting that a prize has been won in a general prize opening provided in the left game area 10A) is provided for the first general prize opening 50A and the second general prize opening 50B. A common winning award switch (a switch for detecting that a winning has been made in a general winning opening provided in the right game area 10B) is provided for the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. Anyway. Also, the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D.
A common prize port switch (a switch for detecting that a prize is awarded to any one of the general prize ports) may be provided for all of the general prize ports.

In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. The game balls taken into the out mouth are collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) communicating with the out mouth. The game balls won in each winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first to fourth general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball collecting box (not shown) It is to be collected on the amusement island via the collection passage. An out ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, a game ball that has been driven into the game area 10 (a game ball guided to the out port without winning any of the winning ports, and a winning ball set by winning in any of the winning ports) Game balls collected in a cage) All game balls are detected. Each time a game ball is detected by the out-ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 12, so that the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of game balls that have been shot into the game area 10, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. When the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the counter value increases by a certain number (for example, 10). The out number increase signal may be output to the substrate 12 so that the number of outs can be tabulated in a certain number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 120 side.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.
Further, a game effect lamp 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 3a, there is an upper plate 60 that holds (stores) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be able to be supplied to the ball hitting device. Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate 60.

A key hole 61 of a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the upper plate 60. By inserting a key corresponding to the key hole 61 into the key hole 61 and rotating the key in one direction, for example, counterclockwise, it is possible to open the front of the glass door frame 3a with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. Further, by inserting the key into the key hole 61 and rotating the key in the other direction, for example, clockwise, the gaming machine frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the outer frame. In the locking device, a spring is built in the key hole 61, and when the key is released and pulled out after inserting the key into the key hole 61 and rotating it counterclockwise or clockwise, the direction opposite to the direction in which the key hole 61 is turned. Turn around to return to the neutral position. When the keyhole 61 is in the neutral position, the glass door frame 3a can be closed and locked with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming machine frame 3 can be closed and locked with respect to the outer frame. Is possible. Also,
By maintaining the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, maintenance of the gaming board (gauge board including gaming nails and winning holes) 2 (for example, measures to eliminate clogging), A mode changeover switch 31 and a display changeover switch 32 described later can be operated.

A lower plate 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 60 is provided directly below the upper plate 60, and a game ball as a game medium is directed to the game area on the lower right side of the upper plate 60. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 63 is provided which is operated by a player or the like for firing. For example, the hitting operation handle 63 adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. The operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. It may be operable, or may be capable of being pressed and tilted like a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation button 30 only needs to be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation performed on the operation button 30 includes a press detection switch (not shown) that detects pressing of the operation button 30 and a rotary encoder that detects the rotation direction and amount of the operation button (jog dial) 30. (Not shown).

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game balls that have passed through the first passing gate 41A provided in the left gaming area 10A and the second passing gate 41B provided in the right gaming area 10B are transferred to the first passing gate 41A shown in FIG. The normal symbol start condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20, such as detection by the corresponding first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B corresponding to the second passing gate 41B, is as follows. After being established, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display device 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable symbol normal display is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. The

In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display).
At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a first game formed on the normal winning ball device 6A.
After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is detected by the first start port switch 22A shown in FIG. Is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by the above, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the last special figure game or the big hit gaming state.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result. "
It becomes. The specific special symbol (big jackpot symbol) as the confirmed special symbol is different depending on the type of jackpot, for example, the confirmed special symbol is different between the probability variation big hit and the non-probable variation big hit. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the big hit gaming state controlled after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number. A round game in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is executed by opening the large winning opening in a period until (for example, nine) winning balls are generated. The In this way, the opening and closing plate that opened the grand prize opening during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby providing a special variable prize ball device. 7 is changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is, for example, 15 times. Note that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of round games may be provided.

After the big hit state is over, as one of the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player, time reduction control is performed in which the variable symbol variable display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state The time-short state is controlled, and the probability variation state in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with the time reduction control is controlled.

Here, the normal state is a normal state as a gaming state different from a specific state such as a big hit gaming state, a short time state, or a probability variation state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. On the other hand, the time-saving state is when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) a special-figure game is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” is met first. You just have to finish. Also, in the probability variation state, the variable display result in each special figure game and decorative symbol variable display will be “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. improves. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) a special game is executed.

The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is ended is also referred to as a probability variation jackpot. The big hit (type) that is controlled to the short-time state without being controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state is ended is also referred to as a non-probability variation big hit.

In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period. A state in which the high opening control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the high opening control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state.

"Left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C provided in the image display device 5
5R, any one of the special game using the first special graphic by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special game using the second special graphic by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of the figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. Then, after the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed.
In the period until the variable display is ended due to the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern at, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, “Left”, “
Part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, “Left” and “Right”)
In the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination (for example, decorative symbols indicating “7” alphanumeric characters) are still stopped and displayed. There is no remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, a “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C), or a display state in which the decorative symbol fluctuates, or a “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display area 5L. This is a display state in which the decorative symbols in all or part of 5C and 5R change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

Also, in response to the reach state, the speed of variation of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image simulating a person) on the display screen of the image display device 5 is different from the decorative design.
Display, change the display mode of the background image, play and display a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or change the variation mode of the decorative design, different effects from before reaching the reach state An action may be performed. Such effects such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the playback display of the moving image, and the change of the variation pattern of the decorative pattern,
This is called reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, depending on which of the multiple types of reach production is executed, the variable display result is “
The possibility of being a “big hit” can be different. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. When the super reach reach mode appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit reliability) is higher than when the normal reach reach mode appears.

During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach effect, the variable display status of decorative designs may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit”,
There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images. Notifying the player that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect may be executed.

If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in a special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative symbol of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

When a special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state. At a later time, for example, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed.
Here, the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the big hit combination is, for example, “left”, “
The symbol number variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “middle” and “right” is “1”.
”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the“ left ”,“ middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Anything is acceptable.

In addition, after a decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, a pre-read that notifies and notifies that pending data with a special figure display result of “hit” is stored during the round in the jackpot game state. A notice effect may be executed.

As described above, the game area 10 includes the left game area 10A and the right game area 10B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the hitting operation handle (operation knob) to thereby adjust the left game area 10A. It is possible to switch between left-handed shots that launch game balls toward the right and right-handed shots that fire game balls toward the right game area 10B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 10A (the left game area 10A)
When the game ball enters the first start winning award, the game ball is put into the first start winning opening by placing a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown) at a higher rate than when the game ball is launched into the right game area 10B. It is designed to win a prize. Also, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal symbol has a longer variation time (ordinary diagram variation time) than when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the short-time state, and the normal symbol variable display result is “per regular diagram”. The left game area 10A in the normal state
The rate at which the game balls fired at the second start winning opening is awarded is extremely low compared to the rate at which the game ball is won at the first starting winning opening.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball is launched into the right game area 10B (when a game ball enters the right game area 10B), the left side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged by placing a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). Compared to the case where a game ball is launched into the game area 10A, the percentage of game balls winning at the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win at the first starting winning opening. Yes. Therefore, even if the player hits the right hand in the normal state, the percentage that the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) left-handed in the normal state. It is extremely low compared to the rate at which game balls sometimes win the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player will make a left strike in the normal state.

In addition, the proportion of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B passing through the second passage gate 41B is the same as that of the game balls launched into the left game area 10A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 41A. The percentage of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B in the opened second start winning opening is determined by the arrangement of game nails or game ball guiding members (not shown) and the like. It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second start winning opening in the open state.

In the probability variation state and the short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per regular diagram” is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, when the player makes a right turn in the probabilistic state and the short time state, the game ball becomes the start winning opening (first
The percentage of winning in either the starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening) is determined by the game ball entering the starting prize opening (the first starting prize opening and the second starting prize opening in the case of left-handed in the probability variation state and the short time state) Higher than the percentage to win. Therefore, the player makes a right turn in the probability variation state and the short time state.

In addition, the ratio of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B winning the open big prize opening is:
Due to the arrangement of a game nail, a game ball guiding member, or the like (not shown), the ratio of the game balls launched into the left game area 10A is higher than the winning percentage in the open big winning opening. Therefore, the player makes a right strike in the big hit gaming state. In this way, the player makes a left strike in the normal state, switches to the right strike with the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, continues the right turn in the probability change state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state ends, and enters the normal state. With the transition (for example, the probability change state without the big hit gaming state or the end of the short-time state), it will return to the left-handed.

Further, the first game ball that is launched in the left game area 10A is provided in the left game area 10A.
The ratio of winning in the general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B is the position where the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B are provided, as well as a game nail or a game ball guiding member not shown. Depending on the arrangement, the game ball launched into the right game area 10B becomes the first general winning opening 50A.
Or it is higher than the rate which wins the 2nd general winning opening 50B. On the other hand, the right game area 10
The rate at which the game balls fired at B are awarded to the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D provided in the right game area 10B is the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D.
And the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50 depending on the position of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown) placed in the left game area 10A.
It is higher than the rate of winning D.

It should be noted that only a plurality of game balls launched into the left game area 10A for a part or all of the plurality of general game openings (first general prize opening 50A and second general prize opening 50B) provided in the left game area 10A. The game balls that can be won and the game balls fired in the right game area 10B may not be awarded, and a plurality of general prize holes provided in the right game area 10B (the third general prize opening 50C and the fourth general prize opening). 50D), part or all of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B can be won, and the game balls launched into the left game area 10A may not win.

Thus, since the left hand is made in the normal state, the probability that a game ball will win the first general winning port 50A and the second general winning port 50B out of the four general winning ports is high, and the jackpot gaming state, In the probability variation state and the short-time state, right-handed is performed, and therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball will win the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D among the four general winning ports. In accordance with the game state and the like, as the game area where the game ball is launched changes, the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win also changes. In the left game area 10A in which the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball is easy to win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability variation state and the short time state. In the area 10B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to win (or vice versa), and the winning frequency for the general winning opening may be changed according to the gaming state.

Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also,
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, pachinko machine 1
Various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in FIG. The power board is the main board 11
, A board that supplies power to each board such as the effect control board 12. In addition to the main board 11 and the production control board 12, the power supply board includes a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15.
It is also connected to other substrates such as to supply power. The power supply board is provided with a power switch. When the power switch is turned on, power is turned on, and power supply from the power supply board to each board is started. Further, the power supply to each board is stopped by turning off the power switch. The main board 11 includes a payout control board. The payout control board may be provided separately from the main board 11. The payout control board is a board that controls the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board includes a ball payout device (not shown) in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 11). The payout mechanism (mechanism for paying out prize balls) is driven to pay out the prize balls.

The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 mainly has a function of setting a random number used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position,
A function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information to a sub-side control board composed of an effect control board 12 or the like, a function to output various information to a hall management computer, etc. I have. Moreover, the main board | substrate 11 is 4A of 1st special symbol display apparatuses.
The second special symbol display device 4B is controlled to turn on / off each LED (for example, segment LED) to control variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the normal symbol display 2
It also has a function of controlling the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable symbol display by the normal symbol indicator 20 by performing 0 on / off / coloring control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 27 and 28 is mounted.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 (details will be described later) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. As will be described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is for detecting an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and is a relay board 15.
The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the image display device 5 and the speaker 8L.
, 8R and game effect lamp 9 are mounted with various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the speakers 8L and 8R.
A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing for outputting audio from the computer is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 includes a first gate switch 21A, a second gate switch 21B, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, and a count switch 23.
The first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the wiring for transmitting detection signals from the fourth general winning port switch 24D are connected.

The first gate switch 21A, the second gate switch 21B, the first start port switch 2
2A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23, first general winning port switch 24
The A to fourth general winning opening switch 24D may have any configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. The main board 1
1 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20,
Wirings for transmitting command signals for performing display control, such as the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the universal hold indicator 25C, are connected. The main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 26.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit
A diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode and the other end grounded (GND) and connected resistors. With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

Such effect control commands include, for example, a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state (normal state, probability variation state, or short-time state), a variation start command for designating a variation start in a special game, and a special game in a special game. A variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a design variation time or a design pattern on the image display device 5, a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a design design, and a design design for the image display device 5. A decorative ball stop command for specifying variable display stop, a jackpot start specifying command for specifying the start or end of a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot end specifying command, or a game ball has won a first start winning port or a second starting winning port Start winning command that is sometimes output, general winning opening that is output when a game ball wins a general winning opening Constant command, gaming ball into the special winning opening includes special winning opening winning command or the like which is output when the prize.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like.
(Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A) that provides a work area for game control
ccess Memory) 102 and a CPU (Ce) that executes a control program by executing a game control program
(ntral processing unit) 103, a random number circuit 104 for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 is a ROM.
By executing the program read from 101, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. At this time, the CPU 103 is in the ROM 101
A fixed data read operation for reading fixed data from the CPU, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data in the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 103 executes the RAM 10
2, a fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the CPU 103;
Receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and transmission operation for the CPU 103 to output various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Etc. are also performed.

Thus, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 is the ROM 101.
Since the game control program stored in is executed and the game control is performed, the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) will execute (or perform processing) below. The CPU 103 executes control according to the program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 Circuit 124
And I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. The fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the effect control CPU 120 is the I / O 12
5, a reception operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the 5, a transmission operation for the effect control CPU 120 to output various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, etc. .

In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 1000, and the like are connected. In addition, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation button 30 has been detected is sent to the effect control board 12 from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Further, the effect control board 12 has a position of the operation unit (first 1
Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position or the second position) and wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the operation section (first position or second position) in the display changeover switch 32 described later. It is connected.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 has an image display device 5 and speakers 8L and 8L.
R, light emitters such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operation buttons 30, movable accessories 100
0, Furthermore, in order to control the production operation using the production device (production electrical component) including the movable member provided in the production role, there are a plurality of types of pattern data constituting the production control pattern in advance. It is remembered.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG.
Based on the display control command from 0, the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 is determined. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 is VD
P (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (
Video RAM), an LCD driving circuit, and the like may be provided.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode switch 31. Including an input port for capturing various signals such as a signal to be enabled and a signal for enabling confirmation of the state of the display changeover switch 32, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. Composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 A command (driving signal) or the like transmitted to the movable accessory 1000 is output.

The voice control board 13 includes, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM,
Amplification circuit, volume, etc. are installed. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the abnormality that has occurred is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13, or the lamp control board 14 is displayed. Via the light by controlling the lighting / extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED through the display, and an abnormal notification image (error message) in the display area of the image display device 5 through the display control unit 123. It is displayed and notified. The abnormality includes a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like, and is detected using the abnormality detection sensor group 26 and the like.

The abnormality detection sensor group 26 includes one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality that occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is not limited to a sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to the sensor, and the like.
The abnormality detection sensor group 26 only needs to be configured to detect abnormality. One or more sensors or the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor groups 26 are prepared according to the type of abnormality. What the abnormality detection sensor group 26 specifically includes may be determined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. An abnormality that occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a phenomenon that does not occur or is extremely unlikely to occur in a normal game performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, And phenomena such as radio wave abnormalities) and phenomena that can hinder the progress of the game,
In particular, it refers to a phenomenon that requires notification to players and employees of game halls (such as pachinko parlors).

Examples of the abnormality detection sensor group 26 include a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band). For example, these sensors may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 26. In addition, the detection of abnormality can utilize a well-known method suitably. When the game control microcomputer 100 detects a magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality or the like based on an output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred is the main board. 11 is transmitted to the production control board 12 and an error has occurred due to the display of an error message on the image display device 5, the output of a warning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode at the time of occurrence of an abnormality in the game effect lamp 9, etc. Notification is performed. For example, when an abnormality has occurred, an image of the characters “An error has occurred” is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

Here, not only the abnormality has occurred by the notification means such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, but any type of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and front door opening. You may make it alert | report so that it is identifiable whether the abnormality of this was detected.

The magnetic abnormality notification is an abnormality notification that is performed when a magnetic abnormality (abnormality that the magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of fraud) is detected.
There are fraudulent acts in which a game medium is moved by a magnet to win a prize opening, or a predetermined area is clogged with a game medium to guide the game medium to the prize opening. By reporting magnetic anomalies,
Preventing such actions from occurring. For example, 1 of the abnormality detection sensor group 26
As one sensor, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a magnetic abnormality by determining whether or not the signal from the magnetic sensor indicates a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (indicating magnetic force → there is a magnetic abnormality). When a magnetic abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 and the magnetic abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of characters “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed.

The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, an abnormality notification that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine or the like provided with the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. There is a fraudulent act that intentionally shakes the pachinko machine to change the flow direction of the game medium closer to a winning opening such as a big winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. CPU103
Determines whether or not there is an abnormality (vibration abnormality) due to vibration by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration having a strength greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold (strength greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold) → Vibration is abnormal). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the vibration abnormality is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the vibration abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of characters “Vibration error has occurred” is displayed.

The radio wave abnormality notification is an abnormality notification performed when a radio wave abnormality (abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of an illegal act) is detected. By applying radio waves to the start port switches (the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B), the count switch 23, etc., these switches are switched on / off, etc. There is a cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band) is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether a signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of a predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and a radio wave abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5,
The image of “A radio wave error has occurred” is displayed.

Both the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32 are DIP switches (Dual switches).
In-line Package switch) is provided outside the game area of the game board 2. Mode switch 31 and display switch 3 constituted by DIP switches
2 by switching the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of a slide type, by switching the position of the knob between one end side and the other end side), the CPU 1 for effect control
The processing (control program) executed by 20 can be switched. In a state where the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, the glass door frame 3a covers the front surface of the game board 2, so that the player cannot operate the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32. It has become. It should be noted that the mode change switch 31 and the display change switch 32 are provided by the player via the glass door frame 3a when the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 (the state shown in FIG. 1). Since it is installed at a position where it cannot be visually recognized, it is not shown in FIG.

As described above, the store clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the key hole 61 to open the locking device (not shown) and opens the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, Operation of the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32 provided on the game board 2 (switching of the DIP switch) becomes possible. Then, the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32
When the above operation is completed, the glass door frame 3a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and a key is inserted into the key hole 61 to close the locking device (not shown).

When the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the first position, the voltage at the mode changeover terminal of the CPU 120 for effect control is in the low state, and when the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 120 is in a high state.
When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 31 is in the first position, that is, information for the player (for example, a demonstration) The game mode for displaying a screen or the like is specified, and information of a winning number management table described later is not displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switch terminal is High, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 has information for the store clerk (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is for displaying the number of winning prizes to each winning mouth and the like, and information on the winning number management table described later is displayed on the image display device 5.

When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 120 is in the low state, and when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 120 becomes High. When the voltage at the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 5 indicates the number of winnings to the general winning opening. Information that is based on the display control table (to be described later)
It is prohibited to display on the image display device 5 information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening.
On the other hand, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 32 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 receives a prize for the general winning opening. Permission to display the number is specified, and information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) is allowed to be displayed on the image display device 5. To do.

In this embodiment, the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32 are connected to the game board 2.
However, the mode changeover switch 31 and / or the display changeover switch 32 may be provided on the rear side (game island side) of the game board 2.
In the case of such a configuration, by turning the gaming machine frame 3 forward with respect to the outer frame,
A mode switch 31 and / or a display switch 32 provided on the back side of the game board 2
Can be operated.

The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 includes the start winning command as described above. The start prize command includes a start prize designation command indicating whether a start prize has occurred with respect to either the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, or a first start prize opening or a second start prize opening. There are a start winning determination result designation command and the like indicating a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type determination result at the time of winning a game ball.

The CPU 103 makes an effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When winning is detected, the big hit determining random number and the big hit type determining random number are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted big hit determining random number and the big hit type determining random number are stored in the first special figure random number storage area. A command for designating the “first start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). Further, the CPU 103 determines that the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number is
A start winning determination is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current game state (normal state, short-time state, or probability change state) is met.

In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value in the big hit judgment table,
Further, it is determined whether the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number matches a determination value stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“first start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

Note that the CPU 103 starts a game ball for a first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening reaches an upper limit (that is, according to the first start winning opening). When a prize ball is paid out but an invalid start prize that is not subject to the special game is detected, a command for designating a “first start prize opening” is set as a start prize designation command,
As the start winning determination result specifying command, blank data for specifying that the start winning prize is not valid is set. Then, the set start prize designation command ("first start prize opening"
Designation) and a start winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

The CPU 103 makes an effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When the winning is detected, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are stored in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. A command for designating “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). Further, the CPU 103 determines that the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number is
A start winning determination is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current game state (normal state, short-time state, or probability change state) is met.

In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value in the big hit judgment table,
Furthermore, it is determined whether the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number matches the determination value stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

Note that the CPU 103 starts a game ball for the second start winning port in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second start winning port reaches the upper limit (that is, according to the second start winning port). When a prize ball is paid out but an invalid start prize that is not subject to the special game is detected, a command for designating a “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize designation command.
As the start winning determination result specifying command, blank data for specifying that the start winning prize is not valid is set. Then, the set start prize specifying command ("second start prize opening"
Designation) and a start winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

In this embodiment, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the starting winning is determined, and based on the determination result The pre-reading notice effect is executed, but it is not limited to this form.
It is also possible to determine the variable display variation pattern corresponding to the start winning based on the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result. For example, when the determination result at the start winning is a super reach variation pattern, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the determination result at the start winning is a non-reach variation pattern. Good.

Specifically, when the CPU 103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts a random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern for the jackpot determination. Along with the random number and the jackpot type determination random number, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. In addition, when the CPU 103 detects the effective start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts the random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern as the jackpot determining random number and the jackpot. Along with the type determination random number, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the second special figure random number storage area.

Here, the ROM 101 corresponds to the deviation variation pattern determination table in which a random number range corresponding to each of the deviation variation patterns shown in FIG. 8A is set, and to each of the big hit variation patterns shown in FIG. 8B. And a big hit variation pattern determination table in which the random number range is set.

When the determination result of the start winning determination (the display result specified by the start winning determination result specifying command) is “out of”, the CPU 103 refers to the shift variation pattern determination table for extraction (storage). The variation pattern determination random number is included in the random number range of the variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is identified, and the identified variation pattern is “non-reach” , A start winning variation pattern determination result designation command for designating which variation pattern is “normal reach deviation” or “super reach deviation” is set.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the determination at the start winning prize (the display result specified by the determination result specifying command at the start winning prize) is one of “non-probable big hit” and “probable big hit”, the fluctuation for big hit Refer to the pattern determination table to determine which variation pattern random number for the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination is included in the random number range, and identify the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number Then, a start winning variation pattern determination result designation command for designating whether the identified variation pattern is a variation pattern of “normal reach big hit” or “super reach big hit” is set.

When detecting the invalid start winning, the CPU 103 sets blank data for designating that the start winning variation pattern determining result designation command is not a valid start winning.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set start prize variation pattern determination result designation command to the effect control board 12 as a start prize command together with the above-described start prize opening designation command and start prize determination result designation command.

The CPU 120 for effect control is a start winning opening designation command designated as “first start winning opening” and a start winning determination result designation command including valid data which is not blank data (and a start including valid data which is not blank data). When receiving the winning variation pattern determination result designation command), the start winning determination result designation command (and the starting winning variation pattern determination result designation command) is held in the first winning command storage area for the first special figure. Stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of memories (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start prize), the start prize opening designation command designated as “second start prize opening” and valid data that is not blank data Start winning judgment result specifying command including (and starting winning variation pattern including valid data that is not blank data) When the start winning prize determination result specifying command (and the start winning fluctuation pattern determination result specifying command) is received, the second pending storage number (in the relevant prize winning command storage area for the second special figure) Stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning). The effect control CPU 120 confirms the start prize determination result designation command (and the start prize variation pattern judgment result designation command) stored in the start prize command storage area, so that the first special characteristic is established before the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to estimate the display result (and fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure and execute the prefetch notice effect.

On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 has a start winning opening specifying command designated as “first starting winning opening” and a starting winning determination result specifying command including blank data (and a starting winning variation pattern determining result specifying command including blank data). Is received, the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) is specified for the first special figure. It is not stored in the start winning command storage area (excluded from the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect), and the winning history storage area to be described later can store the winning history for the first start winning opening. Start winning port designation command designated as “start winning prize opening” and start prize determination result designation command including blank data (as well as start winning prize including blank data) Upon receiving the dynamic pattern determination result designation command), the second
A start winning determination result specifying command (and a start winning variation pattern determining result specifying command) is specified in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure by specifying that an invalid start winning has occurred in the starting winning opening. It is possible to store the winning history to the second start winning opening in the winning history storage area which will be described later without storing (excluding from the pre-reading notice effect execution target).

As described above, the control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 includes a variation pattern designation command. As shown below, when the main board 11 starts variable display of the special symbol, the main board 11 determines a fluctuation pattern according to the special figure display result that is derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control board 12 of the fluctuation pattern. Output a change pattern specification command for The ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern in advance, and the effect control CPU 120 is for effect control corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern designation command. Data is selected and effect control is executed according to the selected effect control data.

When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the CPU 103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure,
In addition, among the random numbers for variation pattern determination, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of stored storages = 1) and the variation pattern determination random number are read The big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. And the read random number for jackpot determination is the current gaming state (normal state, short time state, or probability variation state)
The start time determination is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to is matched.

If the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table at the start determination, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command for designating “displacement” and the jackpot determination random number. The variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of the variation pattern set in the deviation variation pattern determination table, and corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the “outlier fluctuation pattern” is determined.

When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command for designating the “big hit” of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for variation pattern judgment read from the top storage area together with the big hit judgment random number is changed for the big hit By determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, the “big hit variation pattern” is determined.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure.

When the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the CPU 103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure,
In addition, among the random numbers for variation pattern determination, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of stored storages = 1) and the variation pattern determination random number are read out and thereafter The big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. And the read random number for jackpot determination is the current gaming state (normal state, short time state, or probability variation state)
The start time determination is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to is matched.

If the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table at the start determination, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command for designating “displacement” and the jackpot determination random number. The variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of the variation pattern set in the deviation variation pattern determination table, and corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the “outlier fluctuation pattern” is determined.

When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command for designating the “big hit” of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for variation pattern judgment read from the top storage area together with the big hit judgment random number is changed for the big hit By determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, the “big hit variation pattern” is determined.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure.

When receiving the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determining result specifying command) stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area, the leading storage area (the number of stored memories) = 1 in the storage area corresponding to = 1) (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning prize) The time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 stores the reach state establishment timing corresponding to the variation pattern in the ROM 121, so that the reach state is established at the reach state establishment timing corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command. Controls variable display of symbols.
In other words, the production control CPU 120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the variation pattern.

When receiving the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) stored in the start winning command storing area for the second special figure, the leading storage area (the number of stored memories) = 1 in the storage area corresponding to = 1) (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning prize) The time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

In addition, when the first general prize opening switch 24A to the fourth general prize opening switch 24D detect that the game balls have won the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, the game balls are placed in any general prize opening. A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not has been won is output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12. That is, the first general winning opening switch 24
When a game ball is detected by A, a general prize opening designation command for designating a winning to the first general prize opening 50A is output, and when a game ball is detected by the second general prize opening switch 24B, When a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the prize opening 50B is output and a game ball is detected by the third general prize opening switch 24C, a general prize opening designation for designating a prize to the third general prize opening 50C is designated. When a command is output and a game ball is detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, a general winning opening designating command for designating a winning to the fourth general winning opening 50D is output.

Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can identify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and which general winning opening the gaming ball has won based on the received general winning opening designation command. . Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 designates which start winning opening the game ball has won. A mouth designation command is received. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control stores the information that can identify the general winning port where the winning has occurred and the information that can identify the starting winning port where the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122 according to the order of winning. It is possible.

The effect control CPU 120 uses the received general prize opening designation command to designate the general prize opening (
It is confirmed which of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D is the general winning port from which the game ball has been won, and the starting winning port (game) designated by the received starting winning port designation command It is confirmed whether the first winning prize opening or the second starting prize opening is the winning prize opening where the ball has won, and the winning history of each general prize opening and each starting prize opening is stored in the RAM 122. For example, the second general winning port 50B, the first starting winning port, the first general winning port 50A, the second starting winning port,
When a game ball wins in the order of the third general winning opening 50C, it is referred to as [second general winning opening, first starting winning opening, first general winning opening, second starting winning opening, third general winning opening]. History is RAM122
Are stored in the winning history storage area.

In addition, when the winning at the start winning opening and the winning at the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 issues a start winning opening specifying command and a start winning determination result specifying command. , It may be transmitted prior to the general prize opening designation command. For example, detection by any one of the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B and detection by any one of the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D. When the detection is confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the start winning opening designation command and the starting winning determination result designation command as the general winning opening designation command. It is better to send it ahead of the other. By using such a transmission order, the production control CPU 120 knows that it has already received the start prize opening designation command and the start prize determination result designation command when the general prize opening designation command is received. It is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning time determination result designation command received in advance as the specific effect executed based on the winning in the general winning opening.

Note that, when winning in the general winning award occurs a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a plurality of general winning award specifying commands in accordance with a predetermined priority order. To do. For example, if the detection by the first general prize port switch 24A and the detection by the second general prize port switch 24B are confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 100 The general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to a general prize opening that is more difficult to win may be transmitted first with priority. In addition, when the number of prize balls given according to the general prize opening is different, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to a general prize opening with a larger number of prize balls may be preferentially transmitted first. good.

When the count switch 23 detects that a game ball has been won at the big prize opening, a big prize opening command for designating that the game ball has won at the big prize opening is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12. Is output. Therefore, the CPU 120 for effect control
Based on the received winning prize winning command, it is possible to specify the winning of a game ball to the winning prize opening, and the winning history is stored in the same manner as the winning history to the starting winning prize and the winning prize to the general winning prize mentioned above. It is possible to store the winning history for the big winning opening in the area.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command for specifying a start of the jackpot gaming state until receiving a jackpot end specifying command for specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state. The number of receptions and the number of receptions of the general winning opening designation command can be separately distinguished and counted. Thereby, it is possible to distinguish and count the number of times of winning a prize money and the number of times of winning a general prize mouth during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the result of the counting is shown in FIG. 5 can be displayed.

In addition, when a game ball is being fired in the game area 10, the game ball usually wins at any of the start winning port, the general winning port, and the big winning port at a certain frequency. If the decorative symbols are not variably displayed and a game ball has not been won in any of the predetermined winning period (for example, 1 minute), the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening, There is a high possibility that the player is in a non-game state in which no game is played. For this reason, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and receives the start prize opening designation command, the general prize opening designation command, and the big prize opening prize command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to make a game end determination that determines that the game has ended.

FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating an example of winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 122. In this winning number management table, the first general winning opening 50
The number of wins to each of the general winning awards of A to the fourth general winning award 50D is stored. Production control CP
The U 120 can total the number of wins for each general winning slot for each gaming state based on the big hit start specifying command, the big hit end specifying command, the gaming state specifying command, and the general winning slot specifying command. The gaming state designation command is a timing at which the gaming state changes (in this case, the gaming state designation command designates the gaming state to be controlled, and is transmitted, for example, at the end of the big hit gaming state or at the end of the short time state. Or a timing at which the special symbol variable display is started (the game state designation command in this case designates the game state when the special figure game is executed).

In this example, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 50B is 50 (total for all periods), of which 46 are in the normal state, 2 are in the big hit gaming state, and the number in the probable state. Is 1, and the number of winnings in the short-time state is 1. That is, the number of winnings in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of winnings in the right-handed period is 4. Further, the total number of winnings in the general winning opening is 108, of which 81 are winning in the left-handed period and 27 are winning in the right-handed period.

As described above, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored together with the number of winnings in each general winning opening and displayed on the image display device 5 (or corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1). Sent to a gaming device such as a card unit or a call lamp device provided and displayed on a display device included in the gaming device, or transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device included in the information management device. Thus, at the game hall, it is possible to grasp the ease of winning a game ball at each general winning opening and to use it for maintenance of game nails. For example, if the number of game balls received in a general prize opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail near the general prize opening is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

Information on the number of winnings in the winning number management table (the number of winnings in each general winning opening, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in each gaming state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the left-handed period and the right-handed period, and the general winning opening) Is displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (in the maintenance mode), and in the case of the first position (in the game mode). Do not show. The game shop clerk switches the mode changeover switch 31 from the first position to the second position, displays the winning number information in the winning number management table, performs game nail maintenance with reference to this, and enters the general winning opening. Appropriate frequency of winning game balls. Then, after the maintenance is completed, the mode switch 31 is returned from the second position to the first position.

In this embodiment, the number-of-wins information in the number-of-wins management table does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot game state), Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memory for special-purpose games), and the execution status of ordinary games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of reserved memories for ordinary game) Regardless, the period during which the operation portion of the mode switch 31 is in the second position is continuously displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the gaming state. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the second position.
Even if it is in the position, it may not be displayed in the probability variation state, the short time state, or the big hit gaming state.

The winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the execution state of the special figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is the second one.
The special symbol variable display is not executed, and the special symbol game can be displayed only during the period in which the reserved memory number is 0, and the operation portion of the mode switch 31 is in the second position. However, the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or the period during which the number of the special figure games held is not 0 may not be displayed. Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the execution state of the usual game,
For example, the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed, and the display can be performed only during the period in which the number of reserved games of the normal game is 0, the mode changeover Even when the operation unit of the switch 31 is in the second position, it may be prevented from being displayed during a period in which the normal symbol variable display is being executed, or during a period in which the number of reserved games in the regular game is not zero.

The number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table includes the setting state of the mode switch 31, the setting state of the display switch 32, and the display setting by the operation button 30 (1 in FIG. 5).
) To (3) on the setting screen)), it is updated based on the reception of the general prize opening designation command. Also, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the game hall is closed. The winning information for each gaming machine is stored every business day in the gaming information management device. The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is obtained when the winning history in the winning history storage area described above is deleted (reset) based on execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, the operation button in the state in which the store clerk reset operation (for example, the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5) 3
0).

For example, the store clerk of the game hall presses the operation button 30 in a state where the winning number information in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 (the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (display setting)). By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the winning number management table (the number of winnings of each general winning mouth and the total number of winnings of general winning mouths) is 0.
It is possible to reset to

FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 122. In this display control table, the first general winning opening 50
The number of wins to each of the general winning awards of A to the fourth general winning award 50D is stored. Production control CP
U120 can total the number of winnings to each general winning opening based on the general winning opening specifying command. In this example, the total number of winnings in the general winning opening is 11, of which the first
The number of winnings in the general winning opening 50A is 3, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 50B is 5, the number of winnings in the third general winning opening 50C is 2, and the number of winnings in the fourth general winning opening 50D is 1. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 4, winning information (specifically, the number of objects displayed according to the total number of winnings) in the display control table is displayed when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (display setting). And the display of the general winning number is set by the operation button 30, it is displayed on the image display device 5. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (when the display is not set), regardless of whether or not the display setting of the general winning number is set by the operation button 30, the winning of the display control table is won. Number information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of display setting), when the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of non-display setting). Does not display the winning information in the display control table.

That is, when the store clerk of the game hall performs the display prohibition setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 32, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. Yes. Only when the store clerk of the game hall performs the display permission setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 32, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

In this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening is executed. As for the production, as shown in FIG. 4, when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), and the operation button 30 is used to set the display of the general winning number (
Execution is possible when a specific production execution setting) is performed. When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (in the case of execution non-permission setting), depending on whether or not the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of specific effect) is performed by the operation button 30. The specific effect is not executed (execution is prohibited). Further, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of non-execution setting). In this case, the specific performance is not executed.

In other words, when the store clerk of the game hall performs the setting prohibition of execution of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 32, execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the player's execution setting operation. Only when the store clerk of the game hall performs execution permission setting of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 32, the specific effect can be executed according to the player's execution setting operation.

Thus, in this embodiment, whether or not to notify the number of winning a prize to the general winning opening,
It also serves as a setting for whether or not to execute a specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common (
Amusement hall side: display changeover switch 32, player side: operation button 30). Not only in such a form, whether or not to inform the number of winning a prize to the general winning opening, and whether or not to enable a specific effect,
It may be set individually or may be set by different operation means.

The number-of-wins information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 31, the setting state of the display changeover switch 32, and the display setting by the operation button 30 ((1 in FIG. 5).
) To (3) on the setting screen)), it is updated based on the reception of the general prize opening designation command. In addition, the number-of-wins information stored in the display control table (the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning slot) is the identification of the winning history in the winning history storage area described above corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the performance (A or B), it is not erased, and when the game end determination is made by the performance control CPU 120, for example, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. If the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the big prize opening designation command have not been received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), they are erased (reset to 0).

When the number of winnings and the total number of winnings in each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed. The number of winnings is also reset to zero. For example, on the screen shown in FIG.
The coin-type object (winning display) displayed on the right side of the character no longer appears and the number of display objects becomes zero. It should be noted that when the number of winnings in the general winning award is not displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings in each of the general winning awards stored in the display control table are determined as the game end. If it is reset to 0 based on
When the number of winnings for the general winning award is displayed on the image display device 5, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings) is displayed. It will be.

In addition, the store clerk or the player of the game hall, the winning information of the display control table is the image display device 5
When the operation button 30 is pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more) in the state displayed in (the object corresponding to the total number of winnings is displayed), the display control is performed regardless of the game end determination. It is possible to reset the number of winnings of all items stored in the table (the number of winnings of each general winning mouth and the total number of winnings of general winning mouths) to 0, which is displayed on the image display device 5 accordingly. The number information of winning prizes is also reset to 0 (all displayed objects are erased).

As shown in FIG. 5, the player's display setting operation is accepted by operating the operation button 30 during the display of the demonstration screen not related to the progress of the special game and the progress of the normal game.
A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and the start prize opening designation command, the general prize opening designation command, and the big prize opening prize command are set for a predetermined period (for example, 1 5 minutes), the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the screen shown in FIG. 5 (1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is displayed.

On the screen of FIG. 5 (1), a message “Please press the decision button for display setting of the number of general winnings” is displayed, and an image simulating the operation button 30 is displayed below it.
An arrow prompting the user to press the operation button 30 is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 30 in accordance with the instruction, the selection screen shown in FIG. 5 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, click “Show”
And an icon containing the characters “Do not display” are displayed, a message “Select button after selecting with the jog dial” is displayed, and the operation button 30 (jog dial) is further rotated. An arrow prompting you to press is displayed.

In order to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize, the operation button 30 (jog dial) is turned to the left to select an icon including the characters “display”, and to enter the general winning award. In order not to display the number of wins, the operation button 30 (jog dial) is rotated to the right to select an icon including the characters “not displayed”. In this example, an icon including the characters “display” is selected.

Then, when the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “display” is selected in FIG. 5 (2), as shown in FIG. 5 (3), “the number of general winnings is displayed”. A message is displayed, and the display returns to the normal demo screen shown in FIG. By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at the time when the setting operation is completed (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings in FIG. 6) is displayed immediately. The total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 5 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You may make it.

On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected in FIG.
Return to the normal demo screen of (4). As a result of this setting operation, the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is at the second position, that is, at the game hall side, the winning information stored in the display control table is displayed on the image display device 5.
The screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize as shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) is displayed only when permission to be displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed. Shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, that is, when the game hall side does not permit the image display device 5 to display the winning information stored in the display control table, As shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), the screen for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG.
Regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player, it is determined that only the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 32 does not display the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to display the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening. In this embodiment, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening only when the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position) on the game hall side. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the game hall is prioritized over the intention of the player. For this reason, on the game hall side, when the player does not want to know the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first.
It is better to set the position (non-display position).

In addition, in the case where the intention of the game hall has priority over the intention of the player, even though the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (
(Although it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening regardless of the player's setting), the player's side as shown in FIGS. When the setting screen is displayed, it is misunderstood that the player can display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by his / her setting operation.

In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, the display changeover switch 3
When the operation portion 2 is set to the first position (non-display position) (when it has already been determined not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening regardless of the player's setting), FIG. ) ~ (
The setting screen on the player side as shown in 3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself that “the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed according to the setting operation on the player side” is not performed.

Display setting on the game hall side (the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position) and display setting on the player side (the icon including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2)) When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 30 in the selected state), as shown in FIG. "General Prize"
Is displayed. And, the general prize opening (the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50
When a game ball wins in D), as shown in FIG. 6 (2), a coin-shaped object (winning correspondence display) is displayed on the right side of the character “general winning”.

The number of coin-type objects displayed on the image display device 5 corresponds to the total number of winnings in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 6 (3), each time a game ball wins a general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D), the total number of winnings in the display control table is incremented by one. As a result, the number of coin-type objects also increases. Also,
The coin-type object includes a number “10”, which indicates the number of prize balls given when a game ball wins a general prize opening. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general winning opening. Note that the number of winning balls that are awarded when a game ball is won in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, large winning opening) is stored in the ROM 121 in advance. And

In this way, by displaying the object corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and increasing the number of objects to be displayed in accordance with the increase in the winning number, the player can It is possible to easily grasp that the game ball has won and the number of game balls won to the general winning opening.

When the game end determination is performed by the effect control CPU 120, the number of game balls won and the total number of wins at each general winning opening stored in the display control table are 0 as described above.
As shown in FIG. 6 (4), all the coin-type objects displayed on the right side of the “general winning” character are erased. That is, it is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is zero.

As described above, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in a non-game state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been notified is reset to 0 (general It is possible to prevent a player who plays a game on the gaming machine from grasping the number of winnings in the general winning opening after that. .

In this embodiment, by setting the game end determination condition and the above-described condition for shifting to the demo screen as a common condition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been informed at the time of shifting to the demo screen is 0. Will be reset. In this way, when displaying the demo screen, the number of winning prizes received in the general winning award may be reset to zero.

As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 5), the display control for increasing the number of objects to be displayed for each winning in the general winning opening shown in FIG. 6 is not executed. . In these cases, the “general winnings” character itself shown in FIG. 6 is not displayed, and the coin-type object itself is also displayed regardless of the number of winnings in the general winning opening (total winnings in the display control table). Do not show.

Note that if the number of objects (usually objects) to be displayed for each winning prize in the general prize opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases, so the number of normal objects has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a different aspect from the normal object including the number “100”) instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. Accordingly, a predetermined number of winning times and the number of winning balls corresponding thereto can be notified in one special object display area without requiring a predetermined number of normal object display areas.

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of displayed objects increases by one for each winning of a general winning opening. Objects may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the number of displayed objects may be increased by 1 for every five winnings in the general winning opening.

Also, the display setting on the game hall side (the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2)). When the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon selected), when it is determined to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, as shown in FIG. , The number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed together with the number of winnings in the large winning opening.

FIG. 7 (1) is a screen displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the first round game is started, the characters “general winnings” are displayed, and the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed on the right side thereof, and “large winnings” Is displayed, and on the right side, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed. In this example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the jackpot gaming state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when a game ball is won in the general winning opening is 10 [0 × 10]. Is displayed. In addition, [0 × 15] is displayed because the number of winning balls in the big winning game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when a game ball is won in the big winning gate is 15. Has been. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of winning balls [0 × 10] awarded in response to winning in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls [0 × 15] awarded in response to winning in the big winning mouth Since the total number of and is 0, [0 balls in total] is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 7 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the game ball has won seven times in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 7), and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A). Since the game ball has won once in the fourth general winning opening 50D), the general winning number is 1, and the large winning number is updated to 7. In addition, the number of winning balls [1 × 10] awarded in accordance with winning in the general winning opening,
Since the total number of prize balls [7 × 15] awarded in accordance with the winning of the big winning opening is 115, “total 115 balls” is displayed. It should be noted that the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning in the general winning opening [1 × 10 = 10 balls] and the number of winning balls awarded in accordance with winning in the big winning opening [7 × 1]
5 = 105 spheres] may be displayed separately.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (3), as a result of the second to fifteenth (final) round games, the game balls are counted in the big winning mouth (special variable winning ball device 7) in the big hit gaming state. 1
The game was won three times and the game balls were won three times in the general prize opening (first general prize opening 50A to fourth general prize opening 50D), so the number of general prizes was 3, and the number of big prizes was updated to 105. ing. In addition, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning a general winning opening [
3 × 10] and the total number of award balls [105 × 15] awarded in response to winning in the grand prize opening are 1605, so that “total 1605 balls” is displayed.

In this way, the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled to the jackpot gaming state,
By displaying it separately from the number of winning prizes in the big prize opening, the player is interested not only in the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening but also in the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening. In addition, by distinguishing and displaying the number of winning balls according to the number of winning prizes and the number of winning balls according to the number of winning winnings in the general winning slot, the player can win the winning prize. In addition to the number of prize balls given in response to this, there is an interest in the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general prize opening.

In addition, it is not limited to the number of winning in the general winning opening in the period controlled to the jackpot gaming state,
The number of winning prizes in the general winning opening in the probability changing state or the short time state may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the winning number in the general winning opening in the normal state may be displayed on the image display device 5. . In addition, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the right-handed period (big hit gaming state, probability change state or short-time state) may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state) may be displayed. The number of winning prizes for the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 5. Further, the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening during a period in which the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number corresponding to the number of stored special figure games) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 5), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 7 is displayed. Display control to be performed is not executed. In these cases, the “General Winning Number” shown in FIG.
The number of wins in the general winning slot and the corresponding number of winning balls and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning in the general winning slot during the period when the character itself is not displayed and controlled in the big hit gaming state And the total number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the grand prize opening are not displayed. Only the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 6, the example in which the number of winning balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object has been described. However, the image display device 5 has the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 7, the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening (
10) and the example in which the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general winning opening has been described. However, the image display device 5 may not display them.

In this way, only the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening may be displayed, and the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening or the number of winning balls given in accordance with the winning to the general winning opening may not be displayed. . With such a configuration, when the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening is changed in the design process of the gaming machine, the display information of the image display device 5 must be changed in accordance with the change. The situation of disappearing can be prevented. In contrast to this, only the number of prize balls awarded in accordance with winning in the general winning opening may be displayed.

In this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side, the player setting shown in FIGS. The example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not informed that the winning number display / non-display switching is possible) has been described. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) is displayed (the number of winnings can be displayed / hidden switched). May be notified to the player).

In the case of such a configuration, even if the player has set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the player setting screen of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), Production control C
Based on the fact that the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side, the PU 120 does not display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 5. Yes (the playground setting takes priority). At this time, it may be displayed on the image display device 5 that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to the priority of the game hall setting.

When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIG. 5A is displayed (the number of winnings can be displayed / hidden switched). That the player is informed), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, FIG.
Even when the operation button 30 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 5, it is not possible to select whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening without shifting to the selection screen of FIG. Also good.

Thus, in this embodiment, the game hall setting has priority over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may have priority over the game hall setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. As displayable on the image display device 5, FIG.
The operation button 30 with the icon including the characters “display” selected on the selection screen (2)
When is pressed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed), and the character “not displayed” is included in the selection screen of FIG. When the operation button 30 is pressed while the icon is selected, the number of winnings for the general winning opening may not be displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

Further, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening in accordance with the order of the accepted setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting having the same priority. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is moved to the first position (
Even in the case of (non-display position), on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3),
When the setting is made to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). Moreover, even if it is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), after that, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is moved to the second position. In the case of (display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is subsequently displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3). Is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed). In addition, FIG.
Even if it is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the player setting screen of (3), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) after that. In
The number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize on the image display device 5 by operating the display changeover switch 32 by the store clerk of the game hall, and the player By operating the operation button 30, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. By operating the switch 32, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. On the player side, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 5. Whether or not to display may not be set (for example, a setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) is not provided). Thus, only at the amusement hall side,
It may be possible to set whether or not to display on the image display device 5 the number of winnings for the general winning opening.

On the contrary, it is possible to set whether or not the image display device 5 displays the number of winnings in the general winning a prize by the player (and the store clerk of the game hall) operating the operation button 30. On the other hand, there may be no means (for example, the display changeover switch 32 is not provided) that allows only the game hall side to set whether or not the image display device 5 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In the case of such a configuration, the player and the store clerk at the game hall share a common setting operation (operation button 3
0 operation), it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation for the player and the game hall.

In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5, but the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed in the pachinko. An information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1
May be transmitted to a card unit display device provided on the side of the card or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 1 and displayed on the information display device. Also, the winning information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the information management device receives a general winning opening for each gaming machine. The number of winnings may be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition,
As a configuration in which the mode switch 31 is not provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 5), and the information display device and the information management are not displayed. It may be displayed only on the device.

In this embodiment, the number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, and is stored in the display control table according to the setting of the display changeover switch 32. The example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 5 has been described. Thus, the winning number management table and the display control table are not provided with individual switches for controlling the display of the winning number management table and the display control table. A common switch for performing display control of both the number management table and the display control table may be provided. For example, when the common switch is set to display setting, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are both displayed on the image display device 5.
And the common switch is set to non-display so that neither the winning number information stored in the winning number management table nor the winning number information stored in the display control table is displayed on the image display device 5. You may do it.

In FIG. 8 (A), a special symbol other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) as a confirmed special symbol (
The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 1) is displayed when the off symbol is stopped and displayed.
00) is shown as an example. In FIG. 8B,
When a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the main board 11
The jackpot variation pattern determined by the (game control microcomputer 100) is illustrated. Since the special figure fluctuation time is determined for each fluctuation pattern, the presentation control CPU 120 that has received the fluctuation pattern designation command can perform the presentation according to the special figure fluctuation time.

Among the deviation variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that are non-reach out of effect, PX003 is a variation pattern that is out of normal reach and PX004 is a non-reach effect. It is a fluctuation pattern. Among the big hit fluctuation patterns, PY003 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of normal reach big hit, and PY004 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of super reach big hit. Here, the super reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The normal reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

The battle effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other and win or lose. P, which is the fluctuation pattern of superreach
In X004, a defeat effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, whereas in PY004, which is a super reach jackpot variation pattern, a victory effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed.

As described above, the CPU 120 for effect control is the microcomputer 100 for game control.
When the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the special figure is executed, the variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command are received. As a result, when the special symbol variable display is being executed (before the fixed special symbol is stopped), the specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol of the variable display (that is, the big bonus symbol) Controlled to gaming state)
Fluctuation result notice effect to predict

In the fluctuation result notice effect shown in FIG. 9A, “Now is a chance!” From the speakers 8L and 8R.
In the second mode, the change notice effect in the first mode in which only the voice production in which the voice is output is executed, and the combination effect production in which the movable accessory 1000 operates (rotates and lights) together with the voice production is executed. Fluctuation notice effect can be executed. Due to such a difference in the production mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is established).

The effect control CPU 120, based on the notice effect determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 124, when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect) based on the winning to the general prize opening is satisfied. The mode of the change result notice effect is determined. Specifically, the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening (timing when winning conditions based on winning a general winning opening)
Thus, the variation result notice effect is determined, and the variation result notice effect is executed in the determined manner. As will be described later, if the special symbol variable display (the decorative symbol variable display associated therewith) is not executed, the execution of the fluctuation result notice effect is suspended or the change result notice effect is displayed. Do not execute.

For example, if the variable display result (variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies “out of”, the audio effect is 80%. The change notice effect of the 1st mode with only is performed, and the change notice effect of the 2nd mode with a sound effect and an accessory effect is performed in the ratio of 20%. On the other hand, when the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specifies “big hit”, the voice effect is 25%. The change notice effect of the 1st mode with only is performed, and the change notice effect of the 2nd mode with a voice effect and an accessory effect is performed in the ratio of 75%.

Further, as described above, the production control CPU 120, when the effective start winning to the first start winning port or the second starting winning port occurs in the game control microcomputer 100,
A start winning port designation command and a start prize determination result designation command are received. This
Before the special chart start condition is established, a special special symbol (big win symbol) will be stopped (ie, controlled to the big hit gaming state) as a fixed special symbol for variable display that has not yet been executed. The pre-reading notice effect to be performed can be executed.

In the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG.
The second aspect in which the pre-reading notice effect of the first aspect in which only the sound effect is output and the effect effect in which the movable accessory 1000 operates (rotation operation and lighting) is executed together with the sound effect. It is possible to perform the pre-reading notice effect. Due to the difference in the production mode,
It is possible to suggest the possibility that a big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 pre-reads based on the notice effect determining random number extracted from the random number circuit 124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) based on the winning in the general prize opening is satisfied. The mode of the notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning to the general winning opening is established)
A mode of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the determined mode. Note that, as will be described later, if the number of reserved memories is zero, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is suspended or the prefetching notice effect is not executed.

For example, if the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area does not include the start prize judgment result designation command for designating “big hit” (all start prizes for designating “out”) In the case of the time determination result designation command), the prefetching notice effect of the first mode with only the voice effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the second mode with the voice effect and the effect effect at a rate of 15% is executed. A pre-reading notice effect is executed. On the other hand, if the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area includes a start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit”, the voice effect is 10%. First with only
The prefetching notice effect of the aspect is executed, and the prefetching notice effect of the second form accompanied by the sound effect and the effect effect is executed at a rate of 90%.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a specific effect that is executed based on the winning of a game ball in a general winning opening. The variation result notice effect for notifying whether the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a big hit symbol is executed as the specific effect A in the present embodiment. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied becomes a jackpot symbol, that is, whether or not the reserved memory includes the one determined to be a jackpot, It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not the specific effect can be executed, and notifies the number of winnings to the general winning opening. When the setting has been made (when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 30 is used, the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of specific effect) is performed. Only when it is performed) the effect control CPU 120 can execute the specific effect.

As described above, each time the production control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command and the start winning opening designation command, the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122. However, this winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are provided separately.
First general winning opening 50A, second general winning opening 50B, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, third
When winning occurs in the order of the general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D, each of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B [first
General winning entrance, 2nd general winning entrance, 1st starting winning entrance, 2nd starting winning entrance, 3rd general winning entrance, 4th
] Will be stored.

In the effect form in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (the timing at which a winning at any one of the winning openings occurs). ), Whether or not the winning condition is satisfied is determined, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the winning condition being satisfied. Further, in an effect form in which only the specific effect B can be executed, every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at the timing when a winning in any winning opening occurs) It is confirmed whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. Further, in an effect form in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any one) At the timing of winning a prize at the winning opening), it is confirmed whether or not a winning condition corresponding to the specific effect A is established in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and corresponding to the specific effect A. The execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the established winning condition, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is satisfied in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. The execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is established.

Further, when the execution of the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect A execution flag. And at the timing when the winning conditions are established, variable display of special symbols (variable display of decorative symbols accompanying this)
Is executed, as described above, the aspect of the specific effect A (only the sound effect or both the sound effect and the effect effect) according to the variable display result is determined and determined. The change result notice effect is executed and the specific effect A execution flag is deleted. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without holding the fluctuation result notice effect.

On the other hand, when the special symbol variable display (variable display of the decorative symbol associated therewith) is not executed at the timing when the winning conditions are satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is executed because there is no target for the change result notice effect. Is put on hold and the specific effect A execution flag remains set.
The effect control CPU 120 can grasp that the execution of the specific effect A is determined by setting the specific effect A execution flag, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. And when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decorative symbol associated therewith) is established, the aspect of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, The specific effect A that has been executed is executed, and the set specific effect A execution flag is deleted.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this form, and if the special symbol variable display (the variable decorative symbol display) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. Without executing the specific effect A, the specific effect A may not be executed even when the variable display start condition is satisfied.

Further, when the execution of the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect B execution flag. When the winning condition is satisfied, when the number of reserved memories (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1 or more, as described above, 1 The aspect of the specific effect B (only the sound effect or both the sound effect and the effect effect) according to the determination result at the time of starting winning is determined, the pre-reading notice effect of the determined aspect is executed, and the specific effect Clear the B execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without holding the pre-reading notice effect.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, there is no target of the pre-reading notice effect, so the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag is set. State. The effect control CPU 120 can grasp that the execution of the specific effect B is determined by setting the specific effect B execution flag, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. Then, when the start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening (when the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more), the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the start winning determination result, The specific effect B that has been put on hold is executed, and the set specific effect B execution flag is deleted.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without deferring the execution of the specific effect B, and thereafter Even if the start condition is satisfied and the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more, the specific effect B
May not be executed.

In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (for example, when a power interruption is detected), the effect control CPU 120 receives the winning history storage area (the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area). All winning histories stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B and the specific effect execution flags (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) are deleted. As a result, during the execution of a specific effect (change result notice effect, prefetch notice effect), or
Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the power supply is resumed after the specific effect has not been executed yet after the execution of the specific effect is decided, The specified specific effect or the specific effect determined to be executed is not executed again. That is, for a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the specific effect is not executed because the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased. When it is confirmed that the winning conditions are satisfied based on the winning history since the power supply is started, the specific effect is newly executed.

[First production form]
In the first effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a game ball in one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is satisfied every time the player wins. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D that is the first winning condition). (Including winning history for any of them) is deleted.

On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability variation state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 120 each time the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the presence / absence of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. And whenever specific production A is performed,
Winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (including at least a winning history in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D which is the second winning condition)
Is erased.

In the first effect form, and in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, (1) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the normal state is (2 )
It is higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probability variation state or the short time state. In the probabilistic state and the short-time state, the player usually
We are more interested in the winning status of game balls in the 2nd starting prize opening and the variable display of decorative symbols than in the status of winning game balls in the general winning opening. It is difficult to create the same interest as sometimes. For this reason, in the probability variation state or the short time state, the execution rate of the specific effect is reduced compared with the normal state, and the interest reduction of the specific effect is suppressed.

In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, unlike the first effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution. In any of the second to fourth effect forms described later, the specific effect can be executed when the winning condition is satisfied. However, the winning condition in the (2) probability change state or the short-time state is (1) normal. More winnings are required than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution rate of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution rate of the specific effect in the probability variation state or the short-time state.

Thus, by making the execution ratio of the specific effects different according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening. In addition, the 1st production form-the 4th
Contrary to the example of the production mode, (2) the proportion of the specific production executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probability variation state or the short time state, (1) the normal winning opening in the normal state You may make it become higher than the ratio by which a specific effect is performed based on winning a game ball.

In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, as in the first effect form, whether or not the specific effect is executed is determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect when the winning condition is satisfied. You may do it. For example, in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the first winning condition required in the normal state and the second winning condition required in the probability changing state or the short time state are the same winning condition. As in the production mode, by making the lottery probability when the winning condition is established in the normal state different from the lottery probability when the winning condition is established in the probability variation state or the short-time state, the ratio that the specific effect is normally executed and the probability variation You may make it differ from the ratio in which a specific effect is performed in a state or a time-short state.

Further, the specific effects may be executed at different ratios depending on not only the gaming state but also the display result of variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate compared to the case where the display result of the variable display is a loss symbol. When there is a hold memory determined to be a big win, compared to a case where there is no hold memory determined to be a big win at the time of starting winning (when there is only a holding memory determined to be a deviation at the time of starting winning), The specific effect may be executed at a high rate. Further, the number of times that the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type,
Alternatively, different types of specific effects may be executed only once for each type).

[Second production form]
In the second effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has two or more general ones out of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. A winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when a game ball wins at least once each at the winning opening. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variation state or the short-time state, the production control CPU 120 has two or more general winning ports out of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, respectively. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins two or more times. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

As described above, in the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the number of winnings to the general winning opening necessary for executing the specific effect in the normal state, Because the number of winnings in the general winning opening required to execute the specific performance in the short-time state is different, it is possible to make interest in the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening depending on the gaming state. .

Moreover, in the 2nd production form, in order to perform a specific production, 1st general winning opening 50A-
It is a condition that at least one game ball is won at least once for each of the two or more general winning slots in the fourth general winning slot 50D. In this way, by setting the winning for each of the plurality of general winning awards as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only the presence or absence of the winning in the general winning award, but the game ball wins in any general award You can be interested in what you did.

In the second effect form and the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the start of the big hit game state is designated based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 controls the big hit game state. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the jackpot start designation command, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the specific effect B
All winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to are deleted.

Also, in the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change in the gaming state. . Therefore, the establishment of the first winning condition means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state.
The first winning condition is not necessarily established based on the winning history only in the normal state. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the probability changing state or the short time state. The second winning condition is not always established based on the winning history only in the short-time state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time-shortening state to the normal state. Also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition is established based on the winning history only in the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition is established based on the winning history only in the probability variation state or the short-time state. You may make it confirm.

[Third production form]
In the third effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to 4th general within 120 seconds). The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when the game ball has won a total of three or more times at the winning opening 50D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. And
Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 120 has a general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) within 120 seconds.
The winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game ball has won five or more times in total. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). Set). And if the winning conditions are not satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (specific production A
When the timer for timer expires), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are met within the 120-second period (
When the winning condition is established before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased.

As described above, the winning frequency (the number of winnings within a predetermined period) required for executing the specific effect in the normal state and the winning frequency (predetermined period) required for executing the specific effect in the probability variation state or the short time state. (The number of winning prizes) can be made interested in the winning frequency of the general winning opening according to the gaming state.

Further, in the third effect form, when the specific effect A targeted for the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning award in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only for one variable display period) If there is a winning condition according to the winning history), a specific effect A is executed for a variable display different from the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds). In some cases, the winning conditions may be satisfied by winning histories in a plurality of variable display periods.

It should be noted that, as in the third production mode, a special design is variably displayed a predetermined number of times as a mode in which the specific production is executed when the number of prizes received in the general prize opening in a predetermined period reaches a predetermined number. The specific effect may be executed when the number of prizes received in the general prize opening during the period reaches a predetermined number. For example, it is specified when the number of winnings in the general winning award reaches a predetermined number until all the reserved memory of the special figure game is exhausted, that is, within the period when the variable display of special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories is executed. An effect may be executed.

[Fourth production form]
In the fourth effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 starts the winning prize opening (either the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening). , The winning winning opening (one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) in order of the game balls The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established by winning the mouth. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 120 has a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a starting winning opening (first start). Any one of the winning a prize opening and the second start winning a prize opening), the general winning a prize opening (any one of the first general award winning opening 50A to the fourth general award opening 50D), and the general winning a prize opening (the first general winning a prize opening 50A to the fourth award). General winning entrance 50
D), the winning conditions (the second winning condition) is established when the game balls win the winning opening. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. And
Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

In this way, the other winning ports different from the general winning port and the general winning port (the first start winning port, the second winning port)
The specific presentation is executed on the condition that the winning order to the starting winning opening) becomes a specific order, so that not only the winning status of the general winning opening but also the winning order to the general winning opening and other winning openings Can be interested in.

It should be noted that a range may be provided for the number of times that a game ball wins continuously to the general winning opening and the number of times that a game ball wins continuously to another winning port. For example, the winning condition may be satisfied by winning the general winning opening twice or more after winning the starting winning opening three or more times continuously. In addition, the winning condition may be determined regarding which of the plurality of general winning awards or which of the plurality of other winning awards has been won. For example, a winning condition is established when a game ball wins a winning opening in the order of a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first general winning opening 50A, and a second general winning opening 50B. Also good. The winning conditions are not limited to the order in which the winning in the general winning opening occurs after the winning in the starting winning opening occurs, but the winning condition is determined by the winning in the starting winning opening after the winning in the general winning opening occurs. May hold.

Further, the winning conditions may be established based on the fact that the order of winning the game balls to the plurality of general winning holes becomes a specific order. For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition (( The first winning condition is established, and the gaming state is (
2) In the case of a certain change state or a short time state, the first general winning opening 50A, the second general winning opening 50
B. Furthermore, a winning condition (second winning condition) is established when a game ball has won a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. May be.

Further, the winning conditions may be established based on the winning order of the game balls in the plurality of general winning holes and the winning order of the game balls in the one or more starting winning holes being in a specific order. . For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition ((1) the game ball is won in the order of the first general winning opening 50A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 50B) (The first winning condition) is established, and the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state,
The game balls won in the order of the first general winning port 50A, the first starting winning port, the second general winning port 50B, and the third general winning port 50C, the second starting winning port, and the fourth general winning port 50D. Accordingly, a winning condition (second winning condition) may be satisfied.

In addition, the order of entry to the general prize opening and entry to the start prize opening is not limited to the order of entry to the general prize opening and entry to the grand prize opening. The condition may be satisfied, and the entry to the general winning opening and the first passing gate 41A or the second passing gate 4
The winning conditions may be established based on the fact that the order of entering 1B is a specific order. In addition, when there is a specific area in which a big hit type (for example, a probable big hit) is determined based on the entry of a game ball, the order of entry into the general winning opening and the entry into the specific area is specific. The winning conditions may be satisfied based on the order.

In the first effect form to the fourth effect form, the example in which the variation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect has been described. However, the prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. May be.

[Fifth effect form to eighth effect form]
In the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 11, unlike the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state. The winning conditions are not different and are common winning conditions. In the examples of the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, the first winning conditions in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, that is, the winning conditions employed in the normal state are provided as common winning conditions, respectively. ing. Then, (1) if the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the change result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is a certain change state or a short time state, a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, according to the gaming state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the specific effect executed based on the game ball winning the general winning opening Interest can be improved.

In the fifth effect form shown in FIG. 11, when the winning condition is established, the effect control CPU 120
The execution of the specific effect is determined at a rate of 50%. When the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and All winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, if the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short time state,
Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. Is done.

In the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 11, the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific effect A when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state, Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and
All winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, if the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, it corresponds to the specific effect A. Both the winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased.

In the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form, the game control microcomputer 10 is used.
The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state based on being controlled to the jackpot gaming state by 0 The winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are all erased. Further, in the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased when the gaming state is changed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time-shortening state to the normal state. Also good.

In the seventh effect form, the specific effect timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general prize opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. . Then, when the specific effect timer times out, the specific effect A and the specific effect B are not executed, and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are displayed. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are satisfied before the time-out of the specific effect timer, (1) in the normal state, the specific effect A is executed and the winning history and the specific effect B in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All the winning histories in the winning history storage area of (2) in the case of (2) probability change state or short time state, the specific effect B
And the winning history in the winning history storage area for the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area for the specific effect B are both erased.

[9th effect form-12th effect form]
In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 12, unlike the first effect form to the eighth effect form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state. The winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is established in the normal state, the variation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probability variation state or the short time state. When is established, a prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, according to the gaming state when the game ball has won the general winning opening, the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the game ball has won the general winning opening. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance executed based on the above.

In the ninth effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a game ball in either the first general winning port 50A or the second general winning port 50B. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established each time the player wins, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 120 each time the game ball wins one of the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. The winning condition (second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined at a rate of 20%. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In the tenth effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has 1 for each of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B. When the game ball wins at least once, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, CPU 120 for effect control
When the game state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state, a game ball is won by winning at least twice each in both the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D. The condition (second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the microcomputer 1 for game control is used.
Based on the fact that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state by 00, when the bonus control start designation command for specifying the start of the big hit gaming state is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific presentation A is received. The winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are all erased. In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change in the gaming state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time-shortening state to the normal state. Also good.

In the 11th effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the CPU 120 for effect control has the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50 within 120 seconds.
When a game ball wins a total of three or more times in B, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. And whenever specific production A is performed, specific production A
Only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to is deleted. On the other hand, CPU 12 for effect control
0 is the third general winning opening 50C when the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short time state.
And the fourth general winning opening 50D with a total of five or more game balls winning the winning conditions (second
And the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In the eleventh effect form, the timer for specific effect A is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general prize opening is stored in the prize history storage area of specific effect A. When the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A, the specific effect A is executed and only the winning history in the prize history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted. Further, based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B, the timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds. When the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is erased without executing the specific effect B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is established in the probability variation state or the short-time state before the timeout of the timer for the specific effect B, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted. Is done.

In the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a first start winning port, a first starting winning port, a second general winning port 50B, The winning conditions (the first winning condition) are established when the game balls win the winning opening in this order. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. And specific production A
Is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the production control CPU 120 has the second start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening. 50
The winning conditions (the second winning condition) are established when the game balls win the winning opening in the order of D. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

As in the ninth to twelfth effect forms, a general winning opening (a general winning opening and a start winning opening in the twelfth effect form) that is a target for winning a game ball for executing a specific effect is selected according to the gaming state. Thus, the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the gaming state. In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, in order to establish the second winning condition in the probability variation state or the short time state, the target winning opening to be awarded in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state Although the example where all the target winning mouths to be awarded are different is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the target winning mouth in the normal state and the target winning mouth in the certain change state or the short time state are partially It may be common. For example, the first prize condition and the second prize condition may include a prize for the second general prize opening 50B.

[13th effect form-16th effect form]
In the thirteenth effect mode to the sixteenth effect mode shown in FIG. 13, the ratio of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is a period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. However, the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A when (2) the reach variation is outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation.

Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, specifically, the confirmed decorative pattern (final stop) after the reach state is established in the variable display of the variation pattern with the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) This is the period until the symbol is stopped.
In addition, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation,
Specifically, the variable pattern variable display with reach production (normal reach, super reach) is excluded, or the variable pattern variable display with reach production (normal reach, super reach) is started. It is a period from after that until the reach state is established.

The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, respectively. It has become. In any production form, when the timing when the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is determined by the second winning condition. When the established timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A. In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[17th effect form to 20th effect form]
In the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form shown in FIG.
(1) When it is a period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, the specific effect A is executed, and the timing when the winning condition is established is (2) outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation. When it is a period, the specific effect B is executed.

The winning conditions in the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form are the fifth effect form to the eighth effect, respectively.
It is the same as the winning conditions (common winning conditions) in the production form. In any production mode, when the timing when the winning condition (common winning condition) is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is established. When the performed timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[21st effect form to 24th effect form]
In the 21st effect form to the 24th effect form shown in FIG. 15, when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is a period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation, the specific effect A
When the second winning condition is established is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the twenty-first effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, respectively. It has become. In any production mode, when the timing when the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the second winning condition is established. When the completed timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, depending on the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, the execution ratio of the specific effects is made different, and by executing different types of specific effects according to the gaming periods when the winning conditions are satisfied,
It is possible to improve interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening.

[25th effect form and 26th effect form]
In the 25th effect form shown in FIG. 16, unlike the 1st effect form to the 24th effect form, regardless of the gaming state or the game period, the general winning award (first general winning award 50A to fourth general winning award 50D). The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won three or more times in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. Further, regardless of the game state and the game period, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won a total of five or more times in the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In the 26th effect form shown in FIG. 16, unlike the first effect form to the 24th effect form, the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general) is within 120 seconds regardless of the game state and the game period. The first winning condition is established when the game ball has won a total of three or more times at the winning opening 50D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. In addition, regardless of the game state and the game period, the second prize is awarded because the game ball has won five or more times in the general prize opening (first general prize opening 50A to fourth general prize opening 50D) within 120 seconds. The condition is met. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

In this way, regardless of the game state and the game period, the number of winnings to the general winning a prize mouth is executed by performing different effects according to the number of winnings to the general winning award and the winning frequency (the number of winnings within a predetermined period). And interest in winning prizes. In this example, the production mode (output audio) differs according to the number of winnings to the general prize opening and the winning frequency, and the variable display to be notified differs (specific production A: variable display being executed, Specific presentation B: variable display that has not been executed), but is not limited to this, depending on the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency, whether or not to suggest the display result of the variable display is different ( For example, it may be possible to execute an effect of notifying the display result of the variable display and an effect not related to the display result of the variable display, and an effect (for example, high probability) indicating whether or not the game state is suggested. It is also possible to execute an effect that informs that the state is in effect and an effect that is not related to the gaming state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 receives a general winning opening designation command and receives a general winning opening, and the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls has been won, and upon receipt of the start winning port designation command, a winning to the starting winning port has occurred, and either the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port has a game It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won, and it is possible to specify that a winning to the big winning opening has occurred by receiving the winning prize winning command. Therefore, the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 17 can be stored as the winning number management table and can be updated.

The second start winning opening is formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, and the normally variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be opened (the game ball can be won or won easily from a closed state where the game ball is not won or difficult to win). The game ball can be won by switching to the state. Further, the special winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened (the game ball can be won or won easily from a closed state where the game ball is not won or difficult to win). The game ball can be won by switching to the open state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, the second start winning opening and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 are classified into a prize winning slot where a game ball can be won by the operation of the winning combination. On the other hand, the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50
D and the first start winning opening are always open, and are classified into non-community winning holes where game balls can be won regardless of the operation of the playing.

In the winning number management table of FIG. 17, the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D.
, The number of prize balls given when a game ball is won at each of the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the big prize winning opening (the number of prize balls corresponding to each prize opening is In the example 10, 10, 10
, 10, 2, 2, 15) are stored. For each winning opening, the number of winnings (in this example, 11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 42, which is the number of times the game ball has won the winning opening).
0) and the number of payouts obtained by multiplying the number of winning prizes by the number of winning balls (the total number of balls paid out by winning game balls in the winning opening, in this example 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508) , 63
0,6300) is stored.

The winning ratios are as follows: (1) The number of winning prizes in each winning mouth (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420), respectively, with respect to the total number of winning prizes in each winning mouth (1572 in this example).
And (2) non-community winning ports (first general winning port 50A to fourth general winning port 50D and first start winning) with respect to the total number (1572 in this example) of each winning port. Mouth) (11)
+ 36 + 22 + 14 + 754), the ratio of winning prizes (315 + 420) for the winning prize winning opening (second start winning opening and big winning opening), and (3) the total number of winning prizes for each winning opening (15 in this example).
72), the number of winnings other than the big winning mouth (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315)
And the ratio of the number of winning prizes (420) of the big winning mouth are stored.

As the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts for each winning mouth (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, respectively) with respect to the total number of payouts for each winning mouth (9268 in this example)
6300) and (2) the total number of payouts for each winning mouth (9268 in this example)
Percentage of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) of non-principal winning awards (first general winning award 50A to fourth general winning award 50D and first starting award), and a bonus winning award (second starting award and grand prize) Number of payouts (630 + 6300), and (3) the number of payouts other than the big payouts (110 + 360 + 2) with respect to the total number of payouts of each winning mouth (9268 in this example)
20 + 140 + 1508 + 630) and the payout number (6300) of the big prize opening are stored.

Here, as described above, during the period when the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Display on device 5. Accordingly, the store clerk at the game hall is paid out when the game ball is won at the prize winning port with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out when the game ball is won at each winning port. The ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as “first payout ratio”, which is 74.77% in this example) can be grasped. In addition, the number of balls (6300) paid out by winning the game ball at the big prize opening with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out by winning the game ball at each prize opening. The ratio (hereinafter referred to as “second payout ratio”, which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

Here, when the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the fact in an identifiable manner. . In the example of FIG. 17, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame. Further, the production control CPU 120 determines that the second payout ratio is a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60).
%)), It shall be notified in an identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 17, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 5, and the comparison result between the first reference ratio and the second reference ratio determined in advance. It can be displayed in a graspable manner. The mode switch 31
For example, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 5 by the setting of the display changeover switch 32 and the setting operation by the operation button 30. When the demonstration screen is displayed, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the settings on the game hall side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the gaming state, for example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 uses the calculated first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for the game device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1.
And storing the received first payout ratio and the second payout ratio in the gaming device,
It can be displayed on a display device. Further, the production control CPU 120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management apparatus such as a hall computer, and the information management apparatus uses the first payout ratio and the second payout of each gaming machine. The ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 is provided for the effect control CPU 120.
When outputting the general prize opening designation command, the start prize opening designation command, and the large prize winning prize winning command, as the external output information corresponding to these commands, the fact that the winning in the general winning prize has occurred and the first general prize winning mouth Information that can specify which of the 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D the game ball has won, the occurrence of winning in the starting winning opening, and the gaming ball in which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening Information that can identify whether or not a prize has been won, information that can identify that a prize has been won in the big prize opening, such as a corresponding gaming device (card unit, calling lamp device), information management device (hall computer), etc. Output to an external device.

This makes it possible to specify information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received this information, it is possible to store the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 17 for each gaming machine and update it. This makes it possible to grasp the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine. In addition, for each gaming machine, the first
It can be determined whether or not the payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether or not the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

In addition, regarding the counting period of the winning number information (value of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko machine 1, if no setting is made for the counting period, the pachinko machine It is a period from when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is started until the power supply is stopped. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is reset (the number of winnings at each winning port becomes 0), and the pachinko gaming machine 1
When the power supply is restarted, the number of winnings to each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is 0. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped,
The number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table is erased without being backed up.

Winning number information (FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko machine 1
The value of each item) can be set on the game site side, for example,
The operation button 30 can be used to set a total period (for example, 10 hours or 3 hours) for the gaming machine. In addition, in a gaming device (card unit or calling lamp device), a shop clerk inputs a desired counting period with an input device or the like, and the input counting period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 1, and the counting period (RAM122
May be stored). In addition, in the information management device (hall computer), the manager of the game hall inputs a desired total period with an input device or the like, and the input total period is the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the pachinko machine selected as the setting target). Sent to the gaming machine 1)
The total period may be set (stored in the RAM 122). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning number management table is created for each set counting period (for example, 10 hours), and these are displayed on the image display device 5, or correspondingly provided gaming devices (cards) Unit, call lamp device) and displayed on the display device of the gaming device, or output to the information management device (hall computer) and displayed on the display device of the information management device. .

Also, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the information corresponding to the general winning mouth designation command, the information corresponding to the start winning mouth designation command, and the information corresponding to the big winning mouth winning command. By storing and updating information (value of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17), by setting an aggregation period using an input device provided in the external apparatus, an external apparatus that updates the information is set for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours). A winning number management table can be created and displayed on a display device provided in an external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning number management table for a predetermined period related to the corresponding gaming machine is displayed on the display device. If the external device is an information management device that manages gaming information for each gaming machine, the winning number management table for each predetermined period can be displayed on the display device for each gaming machine. It becomes.

[27th effect form]
The specific effects A and B described above both give notice of the variable display result in the special game according to the effect mode, and are executed in connection with the winning of the game balls to the general winning openings 50A to 50D. As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game. FIG. 18 illustrates a specific effect C (point giving effect) as an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game.

In the 27th effect form shown in FIG. 19 and the 29th effect form to be described later, the first general winning opening 50A.
When a game ball is won in any of the fourth general winning opening 50D, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect C is determined based on the random number for execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124, and it is determined to execute The specific effect C is executed. By executing the specific effect C, the RAM 122
1 is added to the total points of the point storage areas formed in FIG. 18 and an image 2000 including the characters “1point” is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

That is, every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, a lottery for whether or not to give one point is performed, and the lottery is won. In this case, a point form effect in which 1 point is given is performed.
A privilege is given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

For example, when the total point reaches 5 (when 5 wins have been won), a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server is displayed on the image display device 5. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal that he owns, and download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. . When the total point reaches 10 (when 10 points are won), a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 5. The player can access the music providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

In the 27th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the rate is 80%. The specific effect C is executed. The effect control CPU 120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in the special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of the special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed.

As with the specific effects A and B, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effects C is provided. Each time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50 which are the winning conditions)
D is included).

Here, the total point of the point storage area formed in the RAM 122 is 10 regardless of the winning history in the winning history storage area (even if the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased). After reaching (in this example, a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and 1 is added again each time the specific effect C is executed.

In the 27th effect form and the 29th effect form, which will be described later, (1) the specific effect is based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol change period). The rate of execution is lower than (2) the rate of execution of a specific effect based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period when the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol change period). Is set. During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L and 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed in the period of (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period (2), the player can execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special game that is the object of interest is not executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (1).

Further, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to a variable display result in a special game or a variable display result in a normal game as a specific effect, depending on the execution status of the special game and the number of reserved memories. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when an effect related to a variable display result in a special game such as a specific effect A is adopted as a specific effect, the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is (2) variable symbol variable display is executed When the period is not set (outside the symbol change period), there is no change result notice target at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning in the general prize opening is stopped) or the execution is suspended until the start condition of the variable display related to the special game is established (the general prize) The specific effect is not executed at the timing of winning the mouth, and the specific effect is subsequently executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. By adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game as the specific effect, such a problem can be avoided.

In the twenty-seventh effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). Also good. Also, contrary to the example shown in the 27th effect form, (1) specified based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The rate at which the effect is executed is (2) the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during a period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). May be set to be higher.

[28th effect form]
In the twenty-eighth effect form, unlike the twenty-seventh effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 124. In the twenty-eighth effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) , Specific production A
Do not execute.

In addition, as shown to Fig.9 (a), the specific effect A is either the 1st aspect in which only an audio effect is performed, and the 2nd aspect in which an accessory effect is performed with an audio effect. Thus, the variation result notice effect suggests that the possibility that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied is suggested before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Also,
As shown in FIG. 9B, the specific effect B is a first aspect in which only the sound effect is executed and a second aspect in which the accessory effect is executed together with the sound effect, This is a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the possibility that a jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Furthermore, the specific performance C is
As shown in FIG. 18, it is related to both the display result of the variable display related to the special game (whether it becomes a big win symbol) and the display result of the variable display related to the normal game (whether it becomes a win symbol). It is an effect that is not performed, and points are awarded to the player in accordance with winning in the general winning opening.

As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the specific effect A is not executed (described above “
The execution of the specific effect A is deferred, and the process of “execute when the variable display start condition for the special game is satisfied” is not performed), and is specified only in the period (1). Production A is to be executed. Every time the specific effect A is executed, the specific effect A
The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to (including at least one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the winning condition) is deleted.

In the 28th effect form, by executing the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening as the specific effect, I am trying to improve my interest in specific productions. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the change result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize opening), and then specified when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. When the production A is executed, there is a possibility that the interest will be lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific production.
Therefore, in the twenty-eighth effect form, the specific effect A is not executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period).

In the twenty-eighth effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20% in the case of the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). In the case of such a form, when a winning in a general winning opening occurs during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (in the general winning opening) The specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning a prize), and then the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. As described above, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is either the period (1) (within the symbol variation period) or the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). Alternatively, the specific effect A may be executed, and the specific effect A may be executed at a different rate.

In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is within the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), a special feature being executed is further displayed. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may be varied depending on the variable display result of the figure game and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. For example, in the case where the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol, 80%
The specific effect A may be executed at the rate of, and the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20% when it is determined that the confirmed decorative pattern is to be used as the off symbol.

[29th effect form]
In the 29th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). Is within the period of 1 or more, (2) In the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: (3) A period in which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the special symbol variable display is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

That is, when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is executed, or at least the special symbol variable display is determined to be executed (the above (
In the case of 1) or (2)), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and the special symbol variable display is not executed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. And when it is not decided to execute the variable display of special symbols (in the case of (3) above),
The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

Each time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

In the 29th effect form, when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is executed, or at least the special symbol variable display is determined to be executed ((1) above) (If it is during the period of (2)), the specific effect is executed at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is not executed, and the special symbol variable display is performed. It is set lower than the rate at which the specific effect is executed when the execution is not determined (in the case of the period (3)). In the period of (1) and (2), an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect or a prefetch notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L and 8R. The player is usually more interested in these effects including variable display of decorative symbols rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period (3), the player can execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game that is the target of interest is not executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, (1)
And by performing a specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (2), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

Further, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to a variable display result in a special game or a variable display result in a normal game as a specific effect, depending on the execution status of the special game and the number of reserved memories. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more as in the specific effect B is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the number of reserved memories In the period in which is 0, there is no target of prefetching notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the prize winning in the general prize opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the reserved memory count becomes 1 or more (the general prize winning is won). The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special game is established). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. By adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game as the specific effect, such a problem can be avoided.

In the 29th effect form, variable display of a special symbol is executed or at least variable display of a special symbol is performed at a timing when a game ball wins any of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D. (1) or (2) above
), The specific effect C is not executed, the special symbol variable display is not executed, and the variable symbol special display is not determined to be executed (period (3) above). The specific effect C may be executable only in the case of Contrary to the example shown in the 29th effect form, is the variable symbol display being executed at the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D? Or, when it is decided to execute variable display of special symbols at least (in the case of the period (1) or (2) above), the variable symbol special display is executed at a rate that the specific effect is executed. If it is not determined to execute variable symbol special display (in the period (3) above), it may be set to be higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed.

In addition, the timing at which variable display related to the special figure game is started (the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and including the same time). In this case, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the variable display is started, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the game is related to the special figure game. In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (the timing when the start condition is established) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including the same time). In some cases, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the reserved memory number increases without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is established (for example, in the case of the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the game is related to the special figure game.

[30th effect form]
In the 30th effect form, unlike the 29th effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 124. In the 30th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). ) Is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the reserved memory number is 0. Is the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period), (3) the period in which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period) If it is, the specific effect B
Do not execute.

As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2) or (3), the specific effect B is not executed. (
The above-mentioned process of “suspending execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more” is not performed), and is specified only in the period (1). Production B is executed. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least the first general winning port 50A to be the winning condition)
(Including a winning history for any of the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 30th effect form, the specific effect B is specified by executing the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) related to the variable display result of the special figure game held at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. I try to improve my interest in production. However,
When the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is the period (2) or (3) in which the number of stored memories is 0, there is no pre-reading notice target at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize opening), and then the specific effect B is displayed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. When it is executed, there is a risk that the interest will be lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific performance. Therefore, in the 30th effect form, the specific effect B is not executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (the period in which the stored storage number is 0). .

In the 30th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory). The specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and if it is the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 20%. You may do it. In the case of such a form, when a winning to the general winning opening occurs during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended. Every time (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. As described above, the timing at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory) and the period (2) or (3) (within the period without reserved memory). ), The specific effect B can be executed, and the specific effect B can be executed at a different rate.

Further, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is within the period (1) (within a period with reserved storage), the holding is further held. The execution ratio of the specific effect B varies depending on the variable display result of the special game related to memory and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols accompanying the execution of the special game related to the reserved memory. You may do it. For example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the start winning prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” in the start winning command storage area (that is, the reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special game is a big hit symbol). In the case where there is a special winning effect B at a rate of 80%, the start winning time determination result designation command for designating “big hit” is not stored in the start winning command storage area (ie, In the case where there is no reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st effect form]
In the 31st effect form shown in FIG. 20, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: (1) A period during which the variable symbol variable display is executed ( If it is within the symbol change period), the specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) In some cases, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

As described above, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) and the period (2). Different types of specific effects are executed. Thereby, it can be interested in the effect performed when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and it can improve interest. In addition, every time a specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history (at least the first general winning opening 50A to 4A that are the winning conditions) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect. The winning history for any of the general winning ports 50D is included).

In the 31st effect form, by executing the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game being executed at the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening, I am trying to improve my interests. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the change result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, if no specific effects are executed, the execution frequency of the specific effects decreases. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect,
Is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition for the special game is satisfied. In such a case, there is a risk that the interest will be lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific performance.

In the 31st effect form, when a game ball wins a general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), instead of the specific effect A, the variable display result in the special game or the variable in the normal game By executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result, such a problem can be avoided. It should be noted that any type of specific production is always executed (percentage is executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, and any type of specific presentation is given every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening. The specific performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

[32nd form]
In the thirty-second effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). ) Is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the reserved memory number is 0. Is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period), the specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved memories is 0 When the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

As described above, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1), the period (2), In the case of the period 3), different types of specific effects are executed. This allows you to be interested in the performance that is executed when a game ball wins the general winning opening,
Interest can be improved. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning that is the winning condition) The winning history for any of the mouth 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is included).

In the thirty-second effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the prefetch notice exists, the specific effect B (prefetch notice) When the period is within the period of (2), that is, when there is no target of the prefetching notice but there is a target of the fluctuation result notice, the specific effect A (fluctuation result notice effect)
When the period is (3), that is, when neither the target of the pre-reading notice nor the subject of the change result notice exists, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed.

In this way, by selecting a specific effect that can be executed immediately at the timing when a game ball is won in the general prize opening and executing this, the interest when the game ball wins in the general prize opening is appropriately improved. I try to let them. It should be noted that any type of specific production is always executed (percentage is executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, and any type of specific presentation is given every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening. The specific performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

In the thirty-second effect form, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. Regardless, that is, the pre-reading notice effect is executed regardless of whether or not there is a subject of the change result notice. That is, in the case where “the subject of the change result notice and the object of the prefetch notice exist both”, the prefetch notice effect is preferentially executed. Not only in such a form, but when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening, when variable display of special symbols is executed at that timing, the change result notice When the effect is executed, and the variable symbol special display is not executed at that timing, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed. That is, in the case where “the target of the change result notice and the target of the prefetch notice exist both”, the change result notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modified example of the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form]
In the twenty-seventh effect form to the thirty-second effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be varied according to the state when the game ball is won at the general winning opening. The “state” here is a state that is generated as a result of a game in the gaming machine and is based on a game in the gaming machine. The execution ratio of the specific effect is varied according to the state category. For example, in the 27th effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within (1) the symbol variation period, if the game state at that time is a normal state, the specific effect is 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the symbol variation period (2), if the gaming state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%. If the game state at that time is a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, the interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be further enhanced.

Moreover, in the 27th effect form-the 32nd effect form, you may make it vary the kind of specific effect performed according to the state when a game ball wins a general winning opening. For example, in the 31st effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within (1) the symbol change period, if the reserved memory number at that time is 0, the specific effect A (change result notice) If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside (2) the symbol variation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed, If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed. According to this, the interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be further enhanced.

As described above, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the state classification for changing the type of the specific effect is either (1) the game state is the normal state or (2) the game state is the probability change state or the short-time state. Or (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, (2) the number of reserved memories is 0,
It is not limited to that. For example, it may be classified as (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good. Furthermore, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be different according to the difference between these categories.

Whether or not execution of the specific effect C (point granting effect) is performed according to the display setting table of FIG. 4 is performed in the same manner as the other specific effects A and B executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It is like that. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect C can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

In addition, the specific effect C (point granting effect) is not limited to one point that is awarded for one prize to the general prize opening, but 2 points or 3 points are given for one prize to the general prize opening. It may be. The number of points awarded may be different depending on, for example, which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the game ball has won the general winning opening, for example, The game state may be different depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state.

In addition, in the specific effect C (point giving effect), points may be awarded according to factors other than winning the general prize opening. Alternatively, points may be awarded according to the establishment of the reach state.

[33rd effect form]
FIG. 21 illustrates a specific effect D (gauge update effect) as an effect in which the effect mode changes step by step in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 21, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is the image display device 5 according to the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.
The filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 displayed on the screen can be changed in stages from a minimum of 0 levels to a maximum of 10 levels.

In the example of FIG. 21A, the filling area 2100a (the black portion in the gauge image) in the gauge image 2100 is in the 0 stage in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning openings 50A to 50D. (The white part occupies 10/10) to one stage (the black part is 1 /
10 (the white part occupies 9/10)) (Gage + 1)
. In the example of FIG. 21B, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is changed from the 0th stage to the 3rd stage (black part) in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning ports 50A to 50D. Occupies 3/10 and the white part occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

In this way, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 increases in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and reaches 10 levels (the black portion in the gauge image is 10).
/ 10), a privilege is given to the player. For example, similarly to the specific effect C described above, a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 5, and the player can select a desired image or music as the image providing server or the music. It can be downloaded from the providing server to the information terminal.

Not limited to this, when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 5, and B
Special music may be output as GM. Alternatively, filling area 2100
A variable result notice effect may be executed in which the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game being executed at the timing when a reaches 10 stages may be a big hit symbol,
A pre-reading notice effect may be executed in which the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game held at the timing when the filling area 2100a reaches 10 stages may be a big hit symbol.

That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels may be an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game. It may be an effect related to a variable display result in a game or a variable display result in a usual game. In addition, it may be an effect related to the gaming state or an effect not related to the gaming state. Further, a different effect may be executed every time the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels. Further, different effects may be executed according to the gaming state when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels.

When the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect is given by displaying a message on the image display device 5 or outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the gauge image 2100. The filling area 2100a at is reset to the zero level. After resetting, the gauge image 21 is again displayed in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.
The filling area 2100a at 00 will increase.

In the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form shown in FIG. 22 to FIG.
Each time a game ball wins one of the fourth general winning ports 50D, the stage of the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 (hereinafter referred to as a gauge level) based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 124. ) Is increased by one step, and if it is determined to be executed, the gauge level is increased by one step from the current level. That is, the first general winning opening 5
Every time a game ball wins one of the 0A to 4th general prize opening 50D, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the gauge level by one step. If the lottery is won, Level increases by one level.

In the 33rd effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) when it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), a rate of 80%. Increases the gauge level by one step. The effect control CPU 120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in the special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of the special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed.

As with the specific effects A to C, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effects D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and a privilege grant (
For example, along with the display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, the display of special characters, the output of special music, etc., the winning history (at least the first general) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (Including winning history of 10 or more times to the winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

In the 33rd effect form, and in the 34th effect form, the 36th effect form, and the 37th effect form, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in (2) is that the game ball won in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) The gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L and 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period of (2), the player can increase the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special game of interest is not preferentially executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (1), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In the 33rd effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) (Within the period), the gauge level is not increased. (2) The gauge level can be increased when the special symbol variable display is not performed (outside the symbol variation period). Also good. Contrary to the example shown in the 33rd effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period). The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that (2) the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) You may set so that it becomes.

[34th form]
In the 34th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2)
When the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) and the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game is 10 seconds or more, 40 The gauge level increases by one step at the rate of%. First general prize opening 50A ~
The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period), and as a variable display result in the special symbol game. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in the special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of the special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, and until the special symbol variable display is completed (the confirmed special symbol is It is possible to specify the remaining time (until the stop is displayed). For example, when the variation start command and variation pattern designation command are received, the variation time of the special symbol designated by the variation pattern designation command is set as the value of the variation time timer.
In the PU 120, the remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable symbol special display ends (until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed). In addition, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character,
(Such as the output of special music), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) Is erased.

In the 34th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is 10 seconds or longer until the symbol stops is (3) when the symbol level is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops In addition, the gauge level is set to be higher than the rate at which the game level is won based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state will be, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. for that reason,(
Even if the gauge level is increased during the period of 3), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level, the player is easily interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (3), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In the 34th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased. In the case of the period (3), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 34th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops.

Moreover, in the 34th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed. For example, the production control CPU 120 uses the first general winning opening 5.
In the case where the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the 0A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is a jackpot symbol The gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and if the display result is out of the design, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, while the gauge level is increased to one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the timing when the game ball wins is the period (3),
When the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is being executed is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 30%, and when the display result is out of the pattern, the gauge level is increased by 10%. You may make it let it.

[35th form]
As described above, the specific effect B is exemplified as the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the reserved special game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 9B, does the start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” be included in the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area? Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is the first mode (sound effect only) or the second mode (sound effect and accessory effect). That is, in the pre-reading notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target fluctuation) that is the target of the pre-fetching notice is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target fluctuation. It has become difficult.

As the pre-reading notice effect, it is also possible to adopt an effect that notifies the target fluctuation.
For example, as described above, in the start winning storage display area 5H, a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Is provided. When the start control winning determination result designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display portion corresponding to the command if it is a command that designates “big hit”, and the display corresponding to the command that designates “off”. It is possible to execute a hold change effect displayed in a special mode (for example, gold) different from the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display portion displayed in a special manner, and the player can grasp the remaining variable display count executed until the target variation.

For example, if a command for designating “big hit” is received when the start winning determination result designation command is received, the display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special manner at a rate of 70%.
A display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a normal mode at a rate of 30%. On the other hand, if it is a command that designates “out” when the start winning determination result designation command is received, 5
The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of%, and the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a normal mode at a rate of 95%. As described above, when the display part corresponding to the reserved memory generated by the start winning is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Each time), and when the start condition of the variable display game (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is satisfied, The display part disappears from the start winning storage display area 5H. In such an aspect, the hold change effect is executed during the period from the start winning to the start of the variable display game corresponding to the start winning.

That is, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied according to the order in which the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the hold portion change effect is executed, so that the display portion displayed in the special mode (
The display part of the normal mode that exists to the left of the display information corresponding to the variable display hold memory that is the target of the hold change effect (the display corresponding to the variable display hold memory that is not the target of the hold change effect) The number of remaining variable display games until the variable display that is the target of the on-hold change effect is executed can be grasped by the number of information).

In addition, the timing which displays a display site | part in a special aspect is not restricted at the time of a start winning prize. For example, the display part may be displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and after changing the predetermined effect, the normal mode may be changed to the special mode. The timing at which the start condition is satisfied (display mode of each display part) May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing of shifting to the left). In these aspects, from the timing at which the display portion corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice changes from the normal state to the special form, the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is satisfied. During the period, the pending change effect is being executed.

In the thirty-fifth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: If it is a non-period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the pending change effect and it is not a target variation execution period), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more. (If there are two or more special-figure games for which the start condition is satisfied before the special-figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect)
The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%.

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 1. 2 (in the case where there is one special figure game in which the start condition is established before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect)
The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4) an execution period of target fluctuation accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (
The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10% when the variable display based on the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect is established) To do.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character,
(Such as the output of special music), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) Is erased.

In the 35th production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) until the target change The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball is won at the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count of 1 is 1, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) During the period), the gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening. In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation that is currently being executed than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired.
On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In the 35th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), increasing the gauge level. In the case of (3) and (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 35th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until target change is 2 or more is (3) remaining variable until target change. The ratio may be set so that the gauge level increases when the number of display times is 1, and (4) the gauge level increases when the target variation is executed.

Moreover, in the 35th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is in any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4) In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation or not. For example, the production control CPU 120 uses the first general winning opening 50A.
When the timing at which a game ball wins any of the fourth general winning openings 50D is in the period (2), 70 when the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol.
The gauge level is increased at a rate of%, and when the variable display result is out of the design, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, and a game is played in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the timing when the ball is won is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%, and the variable display result is out of symbol. In some cases, increase the gauge level by 20%,
When the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (4), 15 when the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol. It is also possible to increase the gauge level at a rate of 10%, and increase the gauge level at a rate of 10% when the variable display result is out of pattern.

[36th effect form]
In the thirty-sixth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. The first
The timing at which a game ball wins any of the general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D,
(2) When the variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without the reach effect is being executed, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%.

In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) a variable display (reach fluctuation) with a reach effect is being executed and the reach state In the period after establishment, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character,
(Such as the output of special music), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) Is erased.

In the thirty-sixth production mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening before the reach state in reach change is established is (4) after the reach state is established in reach change The gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the winning opening. During the period of (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that are not stopped after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, since the reach state is not established in the period (3), the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In the thirty-sixth production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period of (3), increasing the gauge level. In the case of (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the thirty-sixth effect form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the reach fluctuation period and before the reach state is established is (4 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the reach variation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[37th effect form]
In the 37th effect form shown in FIG. 23, the ratio of increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won. When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C is (1) the period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is being executed (within a symbol variation period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%.

In addition, the timing when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, the first general winning opening 5
When the timing at which a game ball wins either 0A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside of the symbol variation period), the rate is 80% Increases the gauge level by one step.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character,
(Such as the output of special music), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) Is erased.

In the 37th effect form, the rate of increase of the gauge level is different between (1) the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, and further, the second general prize opening 50B or the third general prize opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between the case where a game ball is won in 50C and the case where a game ball is won in the first general winning port 50A or the fourth general winning port 50D. The rate at which the gauge level increases depending on the general winning opening where the game ball has won, so that the player will be interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won, and improve the interest. be able to.

For example, the first general prize provided closer to the end of the game area 10 than the winning of the game ball to the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C provided near the center of the game area 10. When it is difficult to win game balls in the mouth 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game balls win in the first general prize opening 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D Is made higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, thereby making it more interesting to win a general winning opening that is more difficult to win. It is good to raise it.

In the 37th production mode, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and in the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening. When a game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Also,
Contrary to the example shown in the thirty-seventh presentation mode, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is the second general winning opening 50B or the second 3
You may set so that it may become lower than the ratio which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 50C.

[38th production form]
In the thirty-eighth effect form to the forty-second effect form shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 124. Moreover, in the 38th production form-the 42nd production form, the gauge level which increases according to one prize-winning to a general winning opening is not restricted to one step. For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the gauge level may be increased by three stages in response to a single winning at the general winning opening.

In the thirty-eighth production form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: ), The gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1), and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the gauge level is three steps. Increase (gauge + 3).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character,
(Such as output of special music), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) Is erased.

In the 38th effect form, and the 39th effect form, the 41st effect form, and the 42nd effect form, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol change period) The number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in (2) is that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) Is set to be less than the number of gauge level steps that increase based on During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L and 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player corresponding to the special game that is the subject of interest is not executed in the original period, so that the player is increased by increasing the gauge level. Are in a situation where they are interested in this. for that reason,
By increasing the gauge level more than the period of (1), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In the thirty-eighth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) (Within a period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one step is changed is 80%), and (2) a period during which variable symbol special display is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels may be, for example, 80% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 20%). Contrary to the example shown in the 38th effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a general winning opening during a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period). The number of stages in which the level increases is (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) May be set to be larger.

In addition, as a privilege granted when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a privilege with a different value may be given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a two-dimensional code capable of downloading only an image may be displayed, and a two-dimensional code capable of downloading an image and music may be displayed. At this time, the privilege value given to the latter is greater than the former. Depending on the number of stages at which the gauge level increases, the value of the privilege value that is given when the gauge level reaches 10 stages may be suggested. For example, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is executed (within a symbol variation period). In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is set to, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 80%). When the rate of increase is, for example, 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), and (2) when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the privilege value is small For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more levels is 50% (the rate of changing only one level is 50%). If the privilege value is large, the gauge level is increased by two or more levels. Ratio, for example 80% to (ratio to one step change of 20%) may be.

[39th form]
In the 39th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by three levels (gauge + 3). The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2)
When the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) and the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge Level increases by 2 steps (gauge +2). First general prize opening 50A ~
The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period), and as a variable display result in the special symbol game. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one level (gauge + 1).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character,
(Such as output of special music), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) Is erased.

In the 39th production form, (2) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the fact that a game ball has won the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3) less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops It is set to be higher than the number of gauge levels that increase based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening. During the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state will be, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (3), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than the period (3).

In the 39th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more stages. For example, assuming that the rate of change is 80% (the rate of change by one step is 20%)
In the case of the period of 3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more levels is, for example, 20% (
The rate of change by one step may be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 39th production mode, (2) the number of stages at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops ( 3) It may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops.

Moreover, in the 39th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed. For example, the production control CPU 120 uses the first general winning opening 5.
In the case where the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the 0A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is a jackpot symbol When the gauge level is increased by 3 levels, and the display result is out of the design, the gauge level is increased by 2 levels, and the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D However, in the period of (3), if the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol that is being executed is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by two steps, and if the display result is an outlier symbol The gauge level may be increased by one step.

[40th effect form]
In the 40th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the pre-reading notice effect is not executed and the target variation is also executed. If it is a non-period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the on-hold change effect and it is not an execution period of target variation), the gauge level is increased by four stages (gauge + 4).

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more. (If there are two or more special-figure games for which the start condition is satisfied before the special-figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect)
, The gauge level increases by 3 levels (gauge + 3).

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change becomes 1. If there is one special figure game where the start condition is established before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge level is increased by two stages. (Gauge +2).

In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4) an execution period of target fluctuation accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (
The gauge level is increased by one level (gauge + 1) when the variable display based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect is established) .

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character,
(Such as the output of special music), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) Is erased.

In the 40th effect form, (2) when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more, the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening is (3)
When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 1, the increase in gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 ( It is set to be larger than the number of stages of gauge level that increases based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the target fluctuation execution period. In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation that is currently being executed than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased in the period of (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In the 40th production mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more stages when the timing at which the game ball is won in any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2). For example, 80% (the rate of change by one step is 20%) and (3
) In the case of (4), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is, for example, 20
% (The rate of change in one step is 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 40th effect form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining until the target change. It may be set so that the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the number of times of variable display is 1, and (4) less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases during the target variation execution period.

In the 40th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is in any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation or not. For example, the production control CPU 120 uses the first general winning opening 50A.
When the timing at which a game ball wins any of the fourth general winning openings 50D is in the period (2), if the variable display result in the target variation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by four stages. If the variable display result is out of the design, set the gauge level to 3
When the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (3), the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol. In this case, the gauge level is increased by 3 levels, and when the variable display result is out of the design, the gauge level is increased by 2 levels, and the game ball is placed in one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the winning timing is the period of (4) and the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is set to 2.
The gauge level may be increased by one step when the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol.

[41st effect form]
In the 41st effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level is increased by 4 levels (gauge + 4). The first
The timing at which a game ball wins any of the general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D,
(2) When the variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without the reach effect is being executed, the gauge level is increased by three levels (gauge + 3).

In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by two steps (gauge +3), and (4) a variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is being executed and the reach state is established. In the subsequent period, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character,
(Such as the output of special music), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) Is erased.

In the forty-first production mode, (3) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening before the reach state is established in reach change is (4) after the reach state is established in reach change. The number is set more than the number of stages of gauge levels that increase based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening. During the period of (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that are not stopped after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, since the reach state is not established in the period (3), the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than in the period (4).

In the 41st production mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more stages when the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (3). For example, the ratio to be changed is 80% (the ratio for changing only one step is 20%), and (4
) For a period of 20% (1
The rate of change by steps may be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 41st effect form, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and before the reach state is established, 4) It may be set to be smaller than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[42nd effect form]
In the forty-second effect form shown in FIG. 25, the number of stages for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won. 2nd general prize opening 50B
And the timing at which the game ball wins at either of the third general winning ports 50C is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period), the gauge level is 1
Increase in steps (gauge + 1). On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is being executed (within a symbol variation period). Increases the gauge level by two levels (gauge + 2)
.

In addition, the timing when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level is increased by 3 levels (gauge + 3). On the other hand, the first general winning opening 5
When the timing at which the game ball wins either 0A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the gauge level is 4 Increase in steps (gauge + 4).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character,
(Such as the output of special music), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) Is erased.

In the 42nd production form, the number of steps of increasing gauge level is different between (1) the symbol change period and (2) outside the symbol change period, and further, the second general prize opening 50B or the third general prize is given. The number of steps of increasing gauge level is different between the case where a game ball wins the mouth 50C and the case where a game ball wins the first general winning port 50A or the fourth general winning port 50D. By increasing the number of gauge levels to be increased according to the number of general winning holes that the game balls have won, the player will be interested in which general winning holes the game balls have won, and improve the interest. Can be made.

For example, the first general prize provided closer to the end of the game area 10 than the winning of the game ball to the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C provided near the center of the game area 10. When it is difficult to win game balls in the mouth 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D, the stage in which the gauge level increases when the game balls win in the first general prize opening 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D By increasing the number more than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when a game ball is won in the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, it is possible to win a general winning opening that is more difficult to win. It is good to raise interest.

In the forty-second production mode, when a game ball is won at the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more stages is, for example, 80% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 20). %), And when a game ball wins the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), for example. Also good. Contrary to the example shown in the 42nd production mode, the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is the second general winning opening. You may set so that it may become less than the number of steps which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins 50B or the 3rd general winning opening 50C.

[Modification of the 33rd effect form to the 42nd effect form]
In the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form, the division serving as a reference for determining whether to increase the gauge level, and the number of gauge levels to be increased in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form are determined. The classification used as a reference for this is not limited to the above example.
For example, the category for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level, and the category for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased include (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2) the gaming state is It may be a category of whether the state is a certain change state or a short time state. Further, it may be classified as (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . further,
It may be classified as (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects.

Note that the gauge image 2100 is displayed even when the filling area 2100a is at a minimum of 0 stage, but a condition for displaying the gauge image 2100 may be provided. For example, the gauge image 2100 is displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, and an effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed. An effect of increasing the level may not be executed).

The effect of increasing the display of the gauge image 2100 and the gauge level is executed in a period in which the predetermined effect is being executed, and may not be executed in a period in which the predetermined effect is not being executed. For example, the gauge image 2100 is displayed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening only during a period (a predetermined stage stage period) in which the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 is a predetermined background image. Or the gauge level may be increased. In addition, the game ball is won at the general winning opening only during a period in which the display portion in the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, white indicating that there is a possibility of changing to a special mode). When this is done, the gauge image 2100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has an RTC (not shown) provided on the effect control board 12.
When performing a simultaneous performance (an effect that is executed at the same time on a game machine of the same model) at the time when the real-time clock) reaches a predetermined time, a general prize opening during the simultaneous performance execution period When the game ball wins, the gauge image 2100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

Further, when the gauge level is increased, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, different production sounds may be output depending on the number of gauge level stages to be increased. For example, when the gauge level is increased by three stages,
Compared with the case where the gauge level is increased by one step, the volume of the effect sound may be increased.

In addition, it is preferable to output an effect sound that increases the gauge level at a volume different from the effect sound related to the special game or the effect sound related to the ordinary game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the usual game, but lower than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game. Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level is larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game, but may be smaller than the volume of the error sound that notifies the gaming machine error.

Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the sound volume in the normal state may be larger than the sound volume in the probability change state or the short time state.

In addition, the specific effect in which the effect mode changes step by step in accordance with the winning of the general prize opening is not limited to the specific effect D that changes the gauge level, and the displayed character mode is step by step. It may be one that changes (for example, the size of the displayed character increases or the item that the character owns changes), and the number of characters that the player can select increases step by step. Also good. Further, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed step by step, and the emission color of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed stepwise. Moreover, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R may change stepwise.

Whether or not the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is executed is switched according to the display setting table of FIG. 4 in the same manner as the other specific effects A to C executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is like that. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect D can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

[43rd effect form]
The specific effects A to D described above are effects that are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not win the general winning opening. Anyway. For example, when the game ball is not won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D in the 10 minute game period, as shown in FIG. An image simulating the form of a general prize opening and “There is no general prize.
The specific effect E for displaying the notification image 2200 including the characters “on the image display device 5 can be executed.

As described above, the specific effect is not limited to an effect that is executed based on a game ball having won a general winning opening, but an effect that is executed based on a game ball that has not won a general winning opening (general winning game) It may be a presentation that suggests difficulty in winning a prize in the mouth. That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event such as a game ball winning in a general winning opening (an effect executed when a game event occurs or no game event occurs).

In the 43rd effect form shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period in which a game ball has not won the general winning opening. Production control CP
When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (assuming that the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), U120 sends a start winning port designation command, a general winning port designation command, And when any of the commands for winning prizes is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started. If the general prize opening designation command is received before the non-winning determination timer times out (before 10 minutes have elapsed from the timer set), 10 minutes is again set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and again Start the timer.

On the other hand, when the non-winning determination timer times out due to not receiving the general winning opening designation command before the non-winning determination timer times out, as shown in FIG.
A specific effect E for displaying the notification image 2200 on the image display device 5 is executed. Specific production E
Is executed, 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the notification image 2200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the non-winning determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and performs the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, the process (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) due to the non-winning determination timer timing out is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in the period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited).
. When the update of the non-winning determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 1
No. 20 enables processing due to timeout of the non-winning determination timer (specifically, execution of the specific effect E in response to detection of timeout when the timer value becomes 0). In the state where the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, the production control CPU 120 receives any of the start winning port specifying command, the general winning port specifying command, and the big winning port winning command. The renewal of the non-winning determination timer is resumed.

In other words, the non-winning determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (the game is not determined to be finished). A time-out occurs when the number of winnings in the winning opening becomes 0 (the time-out control CPU 120 detects the time-out). As a result, when the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed if no winning in the general winning opening occurs for 10 minutes.

In the above-described production form, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being fired toward the game area 10. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 10, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects a game ball. Anyway. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game, depending on whether or not the hitting operation handle 63 is operated (whether or not the launching motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

In this way, when the player is playing a game and no winning in the general winning opening occurs in a predetermined period (10-minute gaming period), the specific effect E is executed, Informs that no winning in the general winning opening has occurred. By this notification, the player can grasp that the winning to the general winning opening has not occurred, and can use it as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a base) when playing the game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nail is made so that the frequency of winning the general prize opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance.

In addition, when a game is being played by the player and no winning in the general winning opening has occurred, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not being played by the player. If no winnings are made to the general winning opening, the non-winning determination timer is paused (
The execution of the specific effect E is restricted by the effect control CPU 120 not performing the process based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that no prize has occurred in the general prize opening due to the fact that no game is being played by the player. The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than the case where it is determined that a winning in the general winning opening has not occurred despite the game being played by the player.

[44th form]
The specific effect E is not limited to notifying that a general winning opening has not been won within a predetermined period (the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than 1), You may make it alert | report that it can specify that the number of winnings to a winning opening is less than predetermined number. 4th
In the 4-effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening during a predetermined period. Production control CPU120
When the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (assuming that the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), from the gaming control microcomputer 100, a start winning port specifying command, a general winning port specifying command, and When any of the commands for the big prize opening winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started. At this time, RAM
The value of the winning number counter area formed at 122 is set to zero. Then, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area every time a general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer set).

Then, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the specified effect E is within a predetermined period. That the number of winnings is less than a predetermined number and / or the number of winnings within a predetermined period is notified. For example, the message “The number of general prizes for 30 minutes is less than 3” and / or “The number of general prizes for 30 minutes is only 1.”
Is displayed on the image display device 5.

When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is again set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time after the specific effect E is started. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the specific number E is not executed and the winning number determination timer is set. Set the value again to 30 minutes and start the timer again.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and performs the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to timeout of the winning number determination timer is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in the period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited).
. When the update of the winning number determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 1
No. 20 enables processing due to timeout of the winning number determination timer (specifically, execution of the specific effect E in response to detection of timeout when the timer value becomes 0). Then, when the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, the production control CPU 120 receives any of the start winning mouth designation command, the general winning mouth designation command, and the big winning mouth prize command. Then, the update of the winning number determination timer is restarted.

In other words, the winning number determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (no game end determination is made), and 30 minutes have elapsed within the period in which the player is playing a game. The time-out occurs (the time-out control CPU 120 detects the time-out). At the time of the time-out, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the game period of 30 minutes is less than the predetermined number.

In the above-described production form, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being fired toward the game area 10. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 10, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects a game ball. Anyway. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game, depending on whether or not the hitting operation handle 63 is operated (whether or not the launching motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

Thus, even if the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period (30 minute game period) is less than the predetermined number. And
It is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the frequency of winning in the general winning opening is low, and can use it as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a base) when playing the game. Also, at the amusement hall, a specific production E
By taking into account the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific performance E is high), it is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance of the game nail so that the winning frequency at the general winning opening becomes higher. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is being played by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of prizes received in the general prize opening during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 120 executes processing based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer) By doing so, the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the player is not playing a game. In this case, the specific effect is produced at a lower rate than the case where it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is being performed by the player. E may be executed.

[45th effect form]
In the 43rd effect form and the 44th effect form, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Regardless, the specific effect E is executed. However, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be varied according to the state when this determination is made. In the forty-fifth production mode, the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (
When the gaming state at the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1) the normal state, the specific effect E is executed, and (2) the probability change state or the short time state In some cases, the specific effect E is not executed.

Note that the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer has timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number is (1 ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) In the case of the probability changing state or the short-time state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. May be. As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effects E at different ratios according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[46th effect form]
In the 43rd effect form and the 44th effect form, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Regardless, the specific effect E is executed in the common mode. However, the specific effect E may be varied depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 46th performance mode, the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number However, (1) When it is in the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output). The program is executed in two modes (image display only).

Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is informed to the image display device 5 together with the notification by the image display that displays that the number of winning in the general winning award in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. This is a mode in which notification is performed by sound output for outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which only notification by image display is performed and notification by sound output is not performed.

Note that the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer has timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number is (1 ) In the normal state, the specific performance E is executed in the first mode at a rate of, for example, 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), (2)
In the case of the certain change state or the short time state, the specific effect E may be executed in the first mode at a rate of 20%, for example (executed in the second mode at a rate of 80%). As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E in a different mode according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winning in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modification of the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is the display setting table of FIG. 4 as with the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. The execution can be switched according to the above. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not the specific effect E is executed can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

For example, when it is not desired to execute the specific effect E on the game hall side, the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting by switching the display changeover switch 32 to the non-display setting (first position). . By having such a configuration, whether or not to execute the specific performance E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning a prize in the general winning opening is reflected with priority given to the intention of the game hall side. Can be made.

In addition, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect form, the value of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect form, and the value of the winning number counter area are all stored in the RAM 122. If it is not backed up at the time of disconnection and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, it is erased accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect form and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect form are both invalid. The timer value is not referred to until the predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the 44th effect form becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed.

Thus, with the stop of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is erased without being backed up, and when the power supply is resumed, the addition starts from 0 again. become. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a control burden that requires providing backup means at the time of power interruption.

As in the 45th effect form and the 46th effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the category for differentiating the effect mode of the specific effect E is either (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2
) It is not limited to whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short-time state. For example, it may be classified as (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. Also,(
It may be classified as 1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Also, (1) is a period during which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed, or (2)
It may be a classification of whether or not variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed.
Further, (1) before the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the variable display accompanied with the pseudo continuous effect, or (2)
It may be a classification of whether or not it is after the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect. Furthermore, according to the difference of these divisions, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the aspect of the specific effect E may be different.

It should be noted that the specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is executed when the number of wins to the general winning opening in the predetermined game period is less than the predetermined number. Not only in such a form, but among the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, only a specific general prize opening is targeted, and the predetermined number of prizes to the specific general prize opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when there are fewer. For example, the first general winning opening 50A
Counting the number of winnings to the general winning opening during a predetermined game period only for the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, where the winning frequency of the game ball is higher than that of the fourth general winning opening 50D, The specific effect E may be executed when the counted number of winnings is smaller than a predetermined number.

Further, in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form, within a certain time (10 minutes or 30 minutes).
In a case where the number of wins in the general winning award is less than the predetermined number, the specific effect E is executed. However, the period for determining the number of winnings in the general winning opening is limited to this. I can't. The period may be defined by the number of executions of the special figure game. For example, the variable display related to the special figure game may be executed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the present time, or may be a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period controlled to a predetermined gaming state, for example, a period controlled to a normal state (a period in which a game is performed by left-handed), a probability change state or a time reduction It may be a period controlled by the state (a period in which a game is played with a right hand).

Furthermore, the following method may be used as a method for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening during a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

(A) You may make it determine whether the number of winning in a general winning opening with respect to the predetermined number of balls thrown into the game area 10 is less than a predetermined number. During driving of the launch motor provided in the hit ball launching device, approximately 100 game balls are launched into the game area 10 in one minute. Therefore, for example, the specific effect E may be executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to 1000 shot balls (corresponding to a game period of 10 minutes) is less than a predetermined number. . Further, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is calculated, and the specific effect E is executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. May be.

In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the gaming area 10 is
You may make it perform the specific production of a different aspect by the case where it is lower than a predetermined ratio and the case where it is more than a predetermined ratio. For example, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 10 is low, the character A appears and the winning frequency to the general winning opening is low. If the ratio of the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot into the game area 10 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio, the character B
Appears and the frequency of winning in the general winning opening is informed to the medium level, and the ratio of the number of winning in the general winning opening to the number of shots shot in the game area 10 is higher than the medium ratio If the ratio is high, a notification may be made that the character C appears and the winning frequency at the general winning opening is high.

(B) You may make it determine whether the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to a general winning opening in a predetermined period is smaller than a predetermined number. For example, when 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball is won at the general prize opening, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning at the general prize opening in the game period of 30 minutes The specific effect E may be executed when the number is less than 30 (3 wins). In addition, a predetermined number of balls shot into the game area 10 (
For example, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to a prize at the general prize opening is less than a predetermined number. The ratio of the number of prize balls that are paid out in response to winning in the general winning opening with respect to the number of shot balls is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, the specific effect E is executed. May be. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening with respect to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is lower than a predetermined ratio, or more than a predetermined ratio It may be made to perform the specific effect of a different aspect with the case where it is.

As described above, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number. It should be noted that such a form can be applied even in a case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on a general winning opening where game balls have been won.

(C) It may be determined whether or not the number of winning in the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to a predetermined number of winning (for example, 100) in the starting winning opening. It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to the number of winnings in the starting winning opening, and to execute the specific effect E when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general prize opening with respect to a predetermined number of winning balls (eg, 10,000) paid out in accordance with the winning in the start winning opening is more than the predetermined number. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number is less, and the number of prize balls that are paid out in response to the winning prize in the starting prize opening is the prize ball that is paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general prize opening. The ratio of numbers may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general prize opening to the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the starting prize slot is lower than a predetermined percentage. And the specific effect of a different aspect may be performed when it is more than a predetermined ratio.

In addition, for example, the total number of balls for a predetermined period paid out when the gaming state is the normal state (in accordance with the number of winning balls paid out in accordance with the winning at the starting winning opening and the winning at the general winning opening) The total number of award balls paid out) is calculated as a percentage of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general winning opening, and the percentage is lower than the predetermined percentage. The specific effect E may be executed. Moreover, you may make it perform the specific production of a different aspect according to the ratio.

(D) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening for a predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the gaming machine is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In such a form, depending on the lending unit price of the game media used in the gaming machine (for example, 4 yen, 1 yen, etc.)
Different predetermined number (for example, 2 times for 4 yen, 8 times for 1 yen, etc.), or different predetermined ratio (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 for 1 yen) Yen). In addition, specific effects in different modes are executed depending on whether the percentage of the number of winnings in the general prize opening with respect to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined ratio or more than a predetermined ratio You may make it do.

[47th effect form]
In the 47th effect form shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening, and the first start winning opening is displayed within the period during which the character is displayed. Effective start winning of the game ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the first start winning port when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning port is less than the upper limit value) and the game to the second start winning port Based on the occurrence of one of the effective start winnings of the ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning port is less than the upper limit value) In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold change effect is executed in which the display portion corresponding to the variable display game held including the variable display game based on the generated effective start win is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. .

Note that the production control CPU 120 displays the display portion corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning based on the occurrence of the effective starting winning in the special mode from the beginning without going through the normal mode. You may make it perform change production. For example, when a new effective start winning occurs, the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new effective start winning in accordance with the action that the displayed character swings up the wand etc. May be displayed not in the normal mode but in a special mode (from the beginning of the display of the hold information, a state in which the hold information in the special mode corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is finally established exists).

Here, in the 47th effect form, and the 48th effect form and the 49th effect form, which will be described later,
Every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening, the random number circuit 1
A random number for character determination is extracted from 24. Then, based on the extracted character determination random number, whether or not to make the character appear and whether to make any of the characters A to C appear in the character determination table of FIG. Determine at the indicated rate.

Note that the character determination random number may be extracted by the effect control CPU 120 only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting a random number for character determination on the condition that the game is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to limit the character from appearing during the period controlled to the jackpot gaming state. . In addition, it is possible to prevent characters from appearing after the reach state is established by not extracting the random numbers for character determination after the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is being executed.

In the example of FIG. 28, the production control CPU 120 determines to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 10% when receiving a general winning opening designation command for designating a winning to the first general winning opening 50A. It is determined that the character B appears at a rate of 30%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 60%. Also, when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general prize opening 50B, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 50%, and character A appears at a rate of 35%. 10 to decide
The character B is determined to appear at a rate of%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 5%.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines that no character will appear at a rate of 90% when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the third general prize opening 50C. The character C is determined to appear at a ratio. In addition, when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the fourth general prize opening 50D, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 75%, and a character C appears at a rate of 25%. Decide to let

In other words, in this example, when a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B provided in the left gaming area 10A, the third gaming area provided in the right gaming area 10B. Characters appear at a higher rate than when the game ball wins at either the general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D. Since the player fires a game ball in the left game area 10A when the game state is in the normal state, and a game ball is fired in the right game area 10B when the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, in the normal state, the player Characters appear at a higher rate than the state or the short time state.

Then, in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, the specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect)) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (effective start winning, reach state) during the period in which the character is displayed. , The specific effect G (the change result notice effect by dialogue) is executed, and in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the probability change state or the short time state. Specific effects can be executed at a rate.

In this way, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous compared to the probability variation state and the short time state, and the player's game, for example, the state of low interest in variable display of the special figure game is low. By making the execution frequency high, the interest is improved.
On the other hand, the probability variation state and the short time state are advantageous compared to the normal state, and the player's game, for example, the state of high interest in variable display of special figure games is high. However, if it remains high, it may be detrimental. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

In addition to the example shown in FIG. 28, even when a game ball wins the same general winning opening, the rate of appearance of the characters may differ depending on the game state, for example, the normal state When a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B, a character appears at a rate of 50%. However, if a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B in the probability variation state and the short time state, 10%. Characters may appear at a rate of.

Further, the character can appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the probability variation state and the short time state. Thus, in order to “make the execution rate of the effect in one state different from the execution rate of the effect in the other state”, the effect can be executed only in one state and the effect is not executed in the other state. Is included. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 28, the appearance ratio of characters in the probability variation state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance ratio of characters in the normal state.

In the example of FIG. 28, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B. Yes. Further, when a game ball wins the fourth general winning opening 50D, the third general winning opening 50
Characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins C. In this embodiment, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 10A, the first general winning opening 5
When the game ball is won more frequently in the second general prize opening 50B than 0A and the game ball is fired in the right game area 10B, the game is given in the third general prize opening 50C rather than the fourth general prize opening 50D. The frequency that the ball wins is high. That is, when a game ball wins a general winning opening where it is difficult for a game ball to win, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins a general winning slot where a game ball easily wins. On the other hand, when a game ball is won in a general winning opening where a game ball is easy to win, a higher percentage of characters are played than when a game ball is won in a general winning port where a game ball is difficult to win. You may make it appear.

Further, in the example of FIG. 28, characters that may be displayed when a game ball wins in the first general winning port 50A and the second general winning port 50B, where the frequency of winning the game ball in the normal state is high, Although it is the characters A to C, there is a possibility that the game ball is displayed when the game ball wins in the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D, where the frequency of winning the game ball is high in the probability changing state and the short time state. The character with is only the character C. In the probability variation state and the short time state, which are gaming states that have a higher gaming interest compared to the normal state, the occurrence of a situation in which the character display period elapses without the predetermined condition being met, although the character has appeared, Since it is conceivable to cause a decrease, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 28, and even when a game ball is won in the same general winning opening, characters appearing in accordance with the game state may be different. 2 When the game ball is won at the general winning opening 50B, the characters A to C may be displayed. However, when the game ball is won at the second general winning opening 50B in the probability variation state and the short time state, the character is displayed. Only C may be displayed. In addition, FIG.
Contrary to the example shown in FIG. 8, the number of characters that may be displayed in the probability variation state and the normal state may be larger than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. .

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a display period of each character displayed on the image display device 5. It is assumed that the characters A to C are immediately displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning in the general winning opening. That is, the character is displayed immediately after the winning in the general winning opening, so that the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred.

When the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within 1 minute from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of display of the character A Character A is erased from the screen at the timing when one minute has elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within one minute from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character A is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (including a condition related to an effect executed as the game progresses). Even when an effective start prize is generated, if the number of variable display games held including the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize is 1, the start condition for the variable display game is satisfied. Since the start condition is satisfied immediately after the hold (hold information is deleted), it is difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change effect by the displayed character. Therefore, when the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start winning is equal to or less than the predetermined number (1 in this example), the hold change effect is not executed, and the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start winning is the predetermined number. If the number is larger than (1 in this example), the hold change effect may be executed.

Further, the character may be deleted when the game state is shifted to the big hit game state or when the above-described effect control CPU 120 determines the game end. The character displayed on the image display device 5 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped is not displayed again after the power supply is resumed. That is, it is assumed that the backup process for displaying the character displayed before the power interruption on the image display device 5 after the power supply is resumed is not performed.

Note that the execution of the specific effect F (holding change effect) causes the reserved character to be stored in the holding memory as the appearing character performs a predetermined action (that is, according to a change in the mode of the displayed object). Both the case where the aspect of the corresponding display part changes and the case where it does not change shall be included. Further, the timing at which the specific effect F (holding change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. In the example, the character A is used. However, in the specific effect F (holding change effect), the character B may appear or the character C may appear). This is the timing at which the action effect for covering the corresponding display part is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

In addition, the fact that the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed means that as shown in FIGS. 32 (f) and 32 (g), the appearing character 3100 (in this example, the character B is the specific effect G). When character A appears in (change result notice effect) or character C
Is a predetermined dialogue, and the specific presentation G (variation result notice production) ends when the character's dialogue is displayed for a certain period of time (predetermined dialogue display). Timing).

When the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within 2 minutes from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of the display of the character B Character B is erased from the screen at the timing when two minutes have elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within two minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character B is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

When the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) when the predetermined condition (effective start winning, establishment of reach state) is not established within 3 minutes from the start of display, the display of the character C is started. Character C is erased from the screen at the timing when 3 minutes have elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character C is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

As described above, the state in which the game ball is won at the general winning opening is shown to the player by immediately displaying the character on the image display device 5 based on the winning of the game ball at the general winning opening. Can be recognized. In addition, the period during which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period when the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on the character is not executed, the player recognizes that the specific effect is executed if the predetermined condition is satisfied while the character is displayed, and plays the game to satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, the interest of the game is enhanced until a specific performance is executed.

Further, since the display period differs depending on the character to be displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is being displayed. The player who has confirmed the character type can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period during which the predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. Thereby, the interest until a specific effect is performed can be improved.

In addition, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the set ratio for a specific period in which a predetermined condition must be established differs depending on the general winning opening, so that the player can play a game ball in any general winning opening. You will be interested in winning.

(Specific example of specific effect F (holding change effect))
In the 47th effect form shown in FIG. 30, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 and an effective start winning is generated, the character displayed as the specific effect F is displayed. The hold change effect with the action is executed. As described above, the occurrence of the effective start winning is the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit, and the second That is, winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening occurs when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

The production control CPU 120 has received a start winning port designation command specifying “first start winning port” or “second start winning port”, and a start winning determination result specifying command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of the effective start winning. FIG. 31 shows a specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect form.

In FIG. 31 (a), the decorative symbols change (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and the reserved memory is stored. number(
Assume that the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is 2. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first. Is displayed in the normal mode, and the display part (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game that satisfies the start condition second is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 decides to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 35% based on the winning of the game ball in the second general winning opening 50B (FIG. 2).
8). In FIG. 31B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character 3000 (character A) having the staff 3001 on the image display device 5.
It is assumed that the character A appears on the screen immediately after the general winning.

Then, it is assumed that an effective start winning is made to the first start winning opening within one minute from the appearance of the character A, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, in FIG. 31 (c), the reserved memory count is 3
Thus, the display portion (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied third is displayed in the normal mode. The production control CPU 120 that has detected the occurrence of the effective start winning, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines whether or not to change the display portion corresponding to each of the three reserved storages from the normal mode to the special mode. Each is determined.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 has a start winning command storage area for the first special figure and the second
Each start prize determination result designation command (containing valid data other than blank data) stored in the special prize start prize command storage area is confirmed. And
As shown in FIG. 31 (d), regarding the start winning determination result designation command designating “big hit”, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. And the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is determined not to be changed in the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, regarding the start winning determination result designation command for designating “out of”, it is decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and the rate of 90% Thus, it is determined that the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode.

In this example, regarding the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game in which the first and second start conditions are satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode. Only with respect to the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied for the third time, the display part mode corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. Suppose that it is decided to make it happen (with pending change).

Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG.
(Character A) points the tip of the cane 3001 toward the start winning memory display area 5H and the cane 3
The action effect of the aspect that the display site | part corresponding to each holding | maintenance memory | storage is surrounded by the flame 3002 emitted from the point of 001 is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (f), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode to the normal mode based on the above-described determination for the second display part from the left end and the left with the execution of the action effect. For the third display part from the left without changing, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the determination described above. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period, the character 3000 (character A) holding the wand 3001 and the flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the wand 3001 are erased from the screen.

As a result of the change in the display portion mode accompanying the action effect, the player will see the third display portion from the left as a result of the action of the character 3000 (character A) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening. Recognizes that the game has changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and expects a variable display game executed three times after the currently executed variable display game.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 31 (c) and 31 (d), regarding the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is not satisfied, all of the display part modes corresponding to the command are normally set. When it is decided not to change the mode (no change in hold), after the action effect shown in FIG. 31 (e) is performed, three hold memories are stored as shown in FIG. 31 (g). All three corresponding reserved sites remain unchanged as normal.

Thus, the effective start winning is generated during the character display period by executing the specific effect F (holding change effect) triggered by the fact that “the effective start winning has occurred within the period during which the character is displayed”. Whether or not the game ball is won at the general winning opening until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced. In addition, a game ball is placed at the general prize opening by an effect configuration in which a display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established is triggered by an event of winning a prize at the general prize opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from winning a prize until a specific performance is executed.

Also, with the action of the character 3000 (character A), of the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established, the display form of any display part changes from the normal form to the special form. If not, and if it changes, it can be noted which display mode of the display part changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, it is possible to improve interest by suggesting a variable display game that a player can expect.

In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (appearance of character A) and an effect that suggests a display result of a variable display game in which the start condition is not satisfied (action of character A) are common objects ( By being constituted by the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The common object suggests the winning to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied, thereby relating to the appearance and action of the character. It can increase the player's interest.

The specific effect F (holding change effect) is a variable display game corresponding to an effective start prize (an effective start prize that has been determined to satisfy a predetermined condition) as an opportunity to execute the hold change effect. Lastly, the display results are announced for each variable display game that is held, including the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the hold change effect is executed. Targeting only the variable display game (variable display game where the start condition was finally satisfied) corresponding to the effective start prize (the effective start prize determined that the predetermined condition was established) The display result may be notified in advance. On the other hand, the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize that triggered the execution of the on-hold change effect (the effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was met) (the last start condition) The display result may be notified in advance by targeting a variable display game (except for the variable display game in which is established).

(Character deletion process)
Similarly to the specific effects A to D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (holding change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and at the same time, wins the winning history (at least the first general prize opening 50A to the first general winning opening 50A to the second) corresponding to the specific effect F. 30. One or more winning histories to the general winning opening 50D and one or more winning histories to any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are deleted (the winning history of FIG. 30). Reset condition).

In addition, when the displayed character is erased by elapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect F, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F) is associated with this. The first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D including one or more winning histories are deleted) (winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

FIG. 33A is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that a decorative display variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When the variable display 1 is being executed, the general winning opening 50A-50 at the timing of (1).
Any of characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of D.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (2) after one minute has passed since the appearance without generating an effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. However, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. Yes. If an effective start prize is generated within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is not displayed after the action effect ends.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (3) after 2 minutes from the appearance without generating an effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. Further, the variable display 2 is ended and the variable display 3 is started. However, the variable display 1 is ended, the variable display 2 is started, and the variable display 2 is started. With the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not displayed but is continuously displayed. If an effective start winning is generated within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the action effect ends.

When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without generating an effective start winning. In this example, the action effect is executed without the character being hidden because the effective start winning is generated at the timing of (4) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C. At the timing (5) when the production ends, the display portion corresponding to one or more reserved memories changes from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, variable display 1 ends and variable display 2 starts,
The variable display 2 is finished and the variable display 3 is started. Further, the variable display 3 is finished and the variable display 4 is finished.
Is started, however, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, and the end of the variable display 3 and the start of the variable display 4, C is not displayed but is continuously displayed.

As described above, once the character is displayed, it is continuously displayed until “a predetermined condition is satisfied” or “a predetermined period of time elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”. ing. Then, the character is not displayed at the earlier timing of “the predetermined condition is satisfied” and “the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”.

[48th form]
In the forty-eighth effect form shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening, and the reach state is established within the period during which the character is displayed. Based on the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game with a variation pattern with a reach state) is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as in the 47th effect form, but the predetermined condition to be established within the character display period and the type of the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific effect G (change result notice effect))
In the forty-eighth effect form shown in FIG. 30, when the reach state is established in a state where any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5, the specific effect G of the character being displayed is displayed. The change result notice effect accompanied by the dialogue display is executed. Production control CPU120
As described above, it is possible to grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the variation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display game with the reach state is being executed, and the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state has reached a predetermined reach state establishment timing, the fact that the reach state has been established The specific effect G can be executed if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 32 shows a specific example of the change result notice effect in the 48th effect form.

In FIG. 32 (a), the decorative symbol variation (eg, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. number(
Assume that the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied 1
It is assumed that the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, it is assumed that the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to cause the character B to appear at a rate of 30% based on the winning of the game ball in the first general winning opening 50A (FIG. 2).
8). In FIG. 32B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character 3100 (character B) having the staff 3101 on the image display device 5.
Character B shall appear on the screen immediately after the general winning.

In FIG. 32 (c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decorative symbols that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a finalized decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses with “2” on the left, “1” on the right, and “3” on the middle is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

Then, it is assumed that the reach state is established and the predetermined condition is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 32 (e), when the reach state is established, “reach!” Is displayed at the top of the screen.
The character 3050 is displayed. The production control CPU 120 detects the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, and determines the line of the character B.

Here, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether the display result of the decorative display variable display game being executed is determined to be the big hit combination or the lost combination. It should be noted that it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is a big hit variation pattern designation command or a deviation variation pattern designation command. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (f), when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a big hit combination, the character of the character displaying the “chance!” Line at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be displayed horizontally, and it is determined to display the line “Intense heat !!” next to the character being displayed at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a combination of lost, it is determined to display the line “chance!” Next to the displayed character at a rate of 90%. % Will be displayed next to the character being displayed at the rate of%.

In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line “Intense heat !!” next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, the CPU 120 for effect control, as shown in FIG.
Burning! ! "Is executed in the form of uttering the line 3102. When the dialogue 3102 is displayed for a predetermined period, a character 3100 (character B with a staff 3101) is displayed.
) And the dialogue 3102 emitted from the character 3100 is erased from the screen.

As a result, for the player, the character 31 that appears based on the winning in the general winning opening.
With the dialogue of 00 (Character B), it is possible to grasp that there is a high possibility that the decorative symbol that will be a jackpot combination is finally stopped and displayed as a result of the reach effect.

In this way, whether or not the reach state is established in the character display period by executing the specific effect G (change result notice effect) triggered by “the reach state is established within the period during which the character is displayed”. It is possible to make it interested in whether or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest until a specific effect is executed after a game ball is won in the general winning opening. In addition, in the event of a prize-winning event at a general prize opening not related to the progress of the variable display game, a play structure for notifying the display result of a variable display game for which a display result has not been derived and displayed has been announced. It is possible to further enhance the interest until a specific performance is executed after a ball is won. Also,
It is possible to focus attention on the dialogue of the character 3000 (character A), and to improve the interest of the character display effect.

In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (appearance of character B) and an effect that suggests the display result of the variable display game whose display result is not derived and displayed (the line of character B) are common objects. By being constituted by (Character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening. Then, a common object suggests a winning to a general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game and a display result of the variable display game that is not fixed, so that the player's appearance and dialogue regarding the appearance of the character and dialogue Increase interest.

In the forty-eighth effect form, the specific effect G in which the character emits a predetermined dialogue is executed when the reach state is established, that is, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in a predetermined mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the specific effect G may be executed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol.
Further, for example, when a predetermined notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed when variable display of decorative symbols is executed. The specific effect G may be executed as follows.

Moreover, in the 48th effect form, the example in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening regardless of the decorative display variable display mode has been described. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when the game ball is won at the general winning opening becomes a predetermined mode. For example, the game ball is won at the general winning opening. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed at the time of reaching the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is being executed).

(Character deletion process)
As with the specific effects A to D and the specific effects F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the displayed character from the screen, and at the same time the specific effect G
The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to (including at least one winning history for the first general winning slot 50A to the fourth general winning slot 50D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 30). .

In addition, when the displayed character is erased with the elapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect G, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G is associated with this). The first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D including one or more winning histories are deleted) (winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

FIG. 33B is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative display variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. Of these, the reach effect is executed only on the variable display 4 and the reach state is reached. Is assumed to hold. When the variable display 1 is being executed, the general winning opening 50A at the timing of (11).
Any one of characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of .about.50D.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (12) when one minute has elapsed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. When the reach state is established within one minute from the appearance of character A, character A is not displayed after the end of the line display effect.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (13) when two minutes have passed since the appearance without establishment of the reach state. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, and the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is continuously displayed instead of being hidden. If the reach state is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the end of the dialogue display effect.

When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without establishment of the reach state. In this example, the dialogue display effect is executed without the character being hidden because the reach state is established at the timing of (14) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C. During this time, the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, and
With the end of the variable display 3 and the start of the variable display 4, the character C is not displayed but is continuously displayed.

[49th effect form]
In the 47th effect form and the 48th effect form described above, an example is shown in which a specific effect is executed as long as a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of character A to C is displayed. However, only when a specific type of character is displayed, a specific type of specific effect may be executed.

For example, in the 49th effect form shown in FIG. 30, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed based on the fact that an effective start winning is generated within the period in which either the character A or B is displayed. Thus, even if an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed. In addition, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed based on the fact that the reach state is established within the period during which the character C is displayed, and the character A or B is temporarily displayed. Even if the reach state is established within a certain period, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is not executed.

As described above, according to the type of character to be displayed, that is, the notification mode for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect, and the predetermined condition The types of specific effects executed based on the establishment may be different.

In addition, although the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect is common regardless of the type of the displayed character, the specific that is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the type of the displayed character The type of production may be different. For example, when an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect)
Is executed (the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is not executed), but if an effective start winning occurs within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is displayed. It may be executed (the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed).

Moreover, although the predetermined conditions for enabling execution of a specific effect differ depending on the type of character displayed, it is executed when a predetermined condition corresponding to each is established regardless of the type of character displayed. The types of specific effects may be common. For example, when an effective start prize is generated within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (
(Holding change effect) is executed (the specified effect F is not executed even if the reach state is established within that period), but it is also specified when the reach state is established within the period during which the character C is displayed. An effect F (pending change effect) may be executed (the specified effect F is not executed even if an effective start prize is generated within that period).

In addition, if an effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is displayed. After the execution, the character is deleted. (2) When the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning, the character being displayed is executed after executing the specific effect G (change result notice effect) in which the character is displayed. It may be deleted. As described above, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) may be satisfied within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition previously satisfied among the plurality of predetermined conditions is set. A corresponding type of specific effect may be executed.

In addition, if an effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is displayed. The character is deleted after being executed, and (2) the character is deleted after the specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action even when the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning. You may make it do. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) may be satisfied within the display period of one character, and a specific effect is produced when any of the predetermined conditions is satisfied. You may make it perform.

[Modification of 47th Production Mode to 49th Production Mode]
In the example of FIG. 29, when a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined period after the character is displayed, the character is erased before the end of the specific period. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be continuously displayed until the specific period ends even after the specific effect is executed. good.

In such a form, a specific effect may be executed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied within a period during which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening, for 5 minutes during which the character C is displayed,
The character C may be continuously displayed without disappearing from the screen even if an effective start prize is generated, and the specific effect F (holding change effect) may be executed every time an effective start prize is generated for 5 minutes. .

In the example of FIG. 29, the character display period is a predetermined period (1 minute, 2 minutes,
However, the display period of the character is not limited to such a form, and the character display period may be, for example, a period until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times. It may be the period until the end of the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed, until the game state (eg, normal state, probability change state or short-time state, jackpot game state) when the character is displayed is ended. It is good also as the period.

Further, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the display period. That is, once such a character is displayed, it is assumed that the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

In addition, the character display period may be determined before the character type to be displayed is determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the character display period is 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. If the character B is selected at a rate of 70%, the character A is selected at a rate of 15%, the character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, C is 70
% May be selected, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, different display periods may be determined depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won or depending on the game state.

In addition, the predetermined condition to be satisfied in order to be able to execute the specific effect is not limited to the above-described effective start winning or reach state, but the occurrence of a big hit gaming state, a predetermined type of big hit gaming state (
For example, the occurrence of a promising big hit or a big hit with the largest number of rounds, that the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive big hit gaming states (the number of consecutive =
After the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of consecutive big hit gaming states controlled to be in a promiscuous state or a short time state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the end of the big hit gaming state, and a predetermined gaming state (for example, a probable changing state) A variable display game in which the display result is a combination of misses has been repeated for a predetermined number of times, a variable display game with a variation pattern of “non-reach” (“losing without reach”) has been continued for a predetermined number of times, and the number of reserved memories is predetermined. Any other condition such as reaching the number, that is, a condition that is satisfied with the game may be used. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period in which the special symbol variable display is being executed, but the special symbol variable display (the effect corresponding to the special symbol variable display) such as the period controlled in the big hit gaming state is executed. It may be performed during a period that is not performed.

In the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form, the example in which the notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is the hold change effect is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 9 (b) described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot hold, an effect of only sound is executed or an effect by the sound and the movable accessory 1000 is executed. It may be a pre-reading notice effect with a different ratio of whether or not, or it may be a chance eye notice effect as shown in a 50th effect form or a 51st effect form to be described later. Further, it may be a countdown notice effect in which the player is notified of the remaining variable display count until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice.

In the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form, after the character is displayed based on the fact that the game ball has been won in the general winning opening, the displayed character is the mode of the hold information by the occurrence of the effective start winning. Although the example of executing the hold change effect for changing the game is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a game in a general winning opening, determination at the start winning prize corresponding to each variable display game held Check the result specification command and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, and if there is a variable display game with a big hit display result or a variable display game with a reach state, it will be at a higher rate than when it does not exist A character may appear. In addition, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the rate at which a specific character appears may be higher than when there is no such game. Further, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, and a case in which there is no reach. Then, when an effective start winning occurs after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable that the displayed character performs a hold change effect that changes the mode of the hold information.

In the 47th to 49th effect forms, when the big hit game state is controlled, the displayed character is erased, and during the period in which the big hit game state is controlled, a game ball is placed in the general winning opening. Even if a prize is won, a specific effect may not be executed by preventing a new character from appearing. As a result, the player's consciousness is concentrated on various effects (for example, fanfare effect, in-round effect, ending effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the control to the big hit gaming state so as not to disturb these various effects. be able to.

In the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, the example in which the specific effect is always executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period has been described.
Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is performed at the rate of 50%. When the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%, for example, the specific effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the displayed character. The execution ratio may be varied.

Here, in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening when the character is displayed, the display of a new character based on winning in the general winning opening is as follows. It is assumed that the already displayed character is continuously displayed without performing the above.
That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the character display and the character to be displayed at the rate shown in FIG. 28 on condition that no character is displayed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The character is displayed based on the determination.

In addition, not only in such a form, when a character is displayed when a game ball wins in the general winning opening, instead of the character based on the previous general winning that is already displayed (
Characters that have already been displayed may be deleted), and characters based on the subsequent general winnings may be displayed.

In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is compared with the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize, and the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is If the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize is longer, it is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general prize (already The displayed character may be deleted), and the character based on the subsequent general winning may be displayed.

In such a form, when displaying a character based on the subsequent general winning instead of the character based on the previous general winning (deleting the already displayed character), the character display period based on the subsequent general winning In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed may be added (the period during which both are added is taken as the display period of the newly displayed character).

In addition, in the 47th to 49th presentation forms, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening during the character display period, no new character is displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening. The remaining display period of characters that have already been displayed may be extended. Here, the period to be extended (the time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period (for example, 1 minute if character A is displayed) defined for the already displayed character. Also, even when a winning in the general winning opening occurs during the character display period, one of the characters is determined at the rate shown in FIG. 28, and the determined character (however, newly displayed) Display period according to the character
For example, 2 minutes for character B) may be added to the remaining display period of the already displayed character.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, when a character is displayed when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the character is displayed along with the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (without deleting the already displayed character). The character based on the general prize may also be displayed.
For example, when it is determined that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when the character A is displayed and the character B is newly displayed, a new character is added in addition to the already displayed character A. B may also be displayed on the image display device 5.

In such a form, in the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning,
You may make it make the period which added the display period of the character based on a subsequent general winning a common display period of both characters. In this case, when the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed, and either one character or both characters are erased. Further, when a common display period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition, both characters are erased.

Further, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 5, the first predetermined condition (for example, effective When the start prize is established and the first specific effect (for example, the specific effect F (holding change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is deleted and only the second character is present. Next, the second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is established, and the second specific effect (for example, the specific effect G (variation result) based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition is established. When the notice effect) is executed, the second character may be deleted. Here, the first character and the second character may be the same type of character.

In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be set as a common condition (for example, occurrence of an effective start prize). In this case, both the first character and the second character The first specific effect by the first character and the second specification by the second character based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of a single effective start prize) in the state displayed on the image display device 5 Both the effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are deleted.

Further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, the specific effect F (holding change effect)), and in this case, both the first character and the second character are image display devices. When the first predetermined condition (for example, effective start winning) corresponding to the first character is satisfied in the state displayed in FIG. 5, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect)) is executed, When one character is erased and only the second character is displayed, and then a second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, a specific effect (specific effect F ( The second character may be deleted by executing the hold change effect)).

In addition, as in the 49th effect form, if the first character (character A or B) is being displayed, the first specific effect (specific effect) according to the establishment of the first condition (occurrence of an effective start prize). F) can be executed, and the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed in accordance with the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state) during the period in which the second character (character C) is displayed. In this case, it is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed simultaneously). Here, when the second specific effect is executed, if the ratio of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is higher than when the first specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character. It is assumed that it is displayed with priority over the character. For example, when it is determined to display the second character based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the first character is displayed, the first character is deleted and the second character is deleted. Is newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, the control for displaying the first character is not performed instead.

On the other hand, if the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed according to the establishment of the first condition, and the second
It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of the condition. However, when both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects for the same variable display game and the execution periods overlap (for example, both are the change result notice effect of the same variable display game and reach) In the case where it is executed immediately after the state is established), the second specific effect is executed with priority over the first specific effect, and at this time, the first specific effect is not executed.

[50th effect form]
In the 50th effect form shown in FIG. 34, each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a button icon 4000 is newly displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 35, etc.), and the displayed button icon 4000 is displayed. Depending on the number, the types of specific effects that can be executed are different.
Here, each of the specific effects in the effect form is an effect that prompts the player to perform some operation, and is an effect that can notify the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's action. As specific effects, three types of cut-in notice effects (specific effects H), pseudo-continuous notice effects (specific effects I), and chance eye notice effects (specific effects J) are provided.

The display information condition of FIG. 34 is a button icon 40 necessary for executing each specific effect.
If the number of display is 00 and at least the number of button icons 4000 indicated in the display information condition is not displayed, each specific effect is not executed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 4000 are displayed. If 3 or more button icons 4000 are not displayed, the button icon 4000 is not executed.

The button icon 4000 displayed on the image display device 5 is incremented by 1 every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 5. It shall be. When the specific effect is executed, the button icon 40 required for the execution of the specific effect is determined from the number of button icons 4000 displayed before the specific effect is executed.
The number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the display number of 00 is displayed on the image display device 5 after execution of the specific effect. For example, when (1) a cut-in notice effect (the number of required button icons to be displayed = 1) is executed in a state where five button icons 4000 are displayed, the button icon after the cut-in notice effect is executed. The display number of 4000 is 4,
2) When the pseudo-continuous notice effect (the number of necessary button icon displays = 2) is executed, the number of 4000 displayed button icons after the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is 3, and (3) the chance eye notice effect ( When the required number of button icon displays = 3) is executed, the number of 4000 displayed button icons after the chance eye notice effect is executed becomes two.

(Cut-in notice effect)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect in which after the reach state is established, the display result of the variable display pattern of the variable display pattern is notified based on the content of the characters displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 34, the cut-in notice effect is (1) when one or more button icons 4000 are displayed and (2) when a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern with a reach state. A notification is given to perform a predetermined continuous hitting operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing the predetermined continuous hitting operation.

In addition, when the variable display game is executed in a state where no button icon 4000 is displayed and the variation pattern with the reach state is performed, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notification effect is not notified and the cut-in notification is performed. Production is not executed. Further, in a variable display game with a variable pattern that does not involve a reach state, notification of a continuous hit operation related to a cut-in notice effect is not performed, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

Further, in the cut-in notice effect, the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is being executed, and then the player operates the operation button 30 a plurality of times, so the reach effect is executed. The condition is that the variable display game is executed with the variation pattern to be executed. A specific aspect of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 35 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. number(
Assume that the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied 1
It is assumed that the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the first button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 35B, the screen is updated from a state where the button icon 4000 is not displayed to a state where one button icon 4000 is displayed. In addition, when one or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen in total, a “cut-in” character 4000a indicating that “a cut-in notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied”.
Is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition here is that (1) one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable pattern variable display game with a reach state is executed.

In FIG. 35 (c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a definite decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses, “4” on the left, “2” on the right, and “8” in the middle, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern with a reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Confirm based on the variation pattern designation command received from 100. When the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition for the cut-in notice effect is satisfied.

Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the CPU 120 for effect control is shown in FIG.
As shown in e), when the reach state is established, an effect of displaying a character 4080 of “reach!” is executed. Then, based on the fact that the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), in the center of the screen, in order from the top, the characters “continuous hit!”, A plurality of downward arrows, and the operation button 30 are imitated. The continuous hit suggestion information 4100 composed of an image and a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is valid is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 30 should be continuously performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 erases one button icon 4000 necessary for executing the cut-in notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000 in accordance with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 4100. As a result, the number of button icons 4000 displayed becomes 0, and there is no specific effect that can be executed.
Delete 0a from the screen.

It is assumed that the player who has recognized the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 continuously performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30 for a predetermined number of times. The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar in accordance with the elapsed time since the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 is displayed. The time bar is 5 when displayed.
It is in the state of 5 stages in the stage, and it decreases by 1 stage every time 1 second elapses from the display. As shown in FIG. 35 (g), the effect control CPU 120 operates the operation button 30 a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 level out of 5 levels (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined and a cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 5.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines that when the continuous hitting suggestion condition is satisfied, FIG.
), When the display result of the variable display game to be executed is the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination, the character “chance!” Is displayed at a rate of 20%, and “檄” is displayed at a rate of 80%. heat!
! When the display result of the variable display game to be executed is the final stop symbol of the lost combination, the “Chance!” Character is displayed at a rate of 80%.
It is decided to display the characters “Burning !!” at the rate of%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in notice effect that causes the image display device 5 to display a screen including the determined character. In the example of FIG. 35 (i), the letter 42 of “Burning !!”
00 is displayed large on the entire screen.

It should be noted that the CPU 120 for effect control is within a predetermined period from the start of displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 (
If the operation button 30 is not operated more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within 5 seconds, for example, neither “chance!” Nor “extremely hot!” Is displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo-continuous notice effect)
The pseudo-continuous notice effect provided as the specific effect I is as if multiple times in a variable display game, by performing re-variation that scrolls and temporarily displays the temporarily stopped decorative symbols again and again. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of decorative symbols is continuously executed. When re-variation is performed, in accordance with the player's each symbol stop operation, the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C has a pseudo-continuous symbol as a decorative symbol (in this example, composed of characters “NEXT”). Shall be temporarily suspended.

As shown in FIG. 34, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is (1) in a state where two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game is executed with a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more. In such a case, a notification is given to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing each predetermined symbol stop operation.

Moreover, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the player operates the operation button 30 three times (performs each symbol stop operation three times) within a period in which one variable display game is executed. It is required to execute a variable display game with a variation pattern that requires a certain operation time and has a variation time of a certain time (8 seconds in this example) or more. A specific aspect of the pseudo continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

In FIG. 36 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. number(
Assume that the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied 1
It is assumed that the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

Also, one button icon 4000 is displayed on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. "Cut-in" character 400 indicating that "in-notification effect can be executed"
0a is displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 36B, the screen is updated from a state where one button icon 4000 is displayed to a state where two button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, when two or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen in total, a “pseudo-continuous” character 400 indicating that “pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied”.
0b is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more. is there.

In FIG. 36C, it is assumed that after the second button icon 4000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a fixed decorative pattern, a combination of non-reach loses in which “5” on the left, “1” on the right, and “7” on the middle is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 receives from the game control microcomputer 100 whether or not the variation time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Check based on the change pattern specification command. And when the variation time of the variable display game to be started is 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is established.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state. Decides to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform no re-variation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern with a reach state, it is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform re-variation) with a probability of 100%.

When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decorative symbol display area 5L on the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player, and In addition to determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R,
It is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C.

As described above, when receiving the change start command, the variable display result notification command, and the change pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the change pattern designation command and also displays the variable display result. A confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the notification command is determined. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in accordance with the player's respective symbol stopping operations are determined It may be different from the “left” and “right” decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol (final stop symbol), or may be the same.

When it is determined that the CPU 120 for effect control does not temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols,
In accordance with the player's respective symbol stop operation, the determined decorative symbols (“left” decorative symbol display area 5L, “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C are determined. It is determined that the “left”, “right”, and “middle” decorative symbols constituting the final stop symbol) are stopped in a swinging manner. That is, when the re-variation is not performed, it is determined to stop the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

Thus, when the presence or absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol for re-variation are determined, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, there is a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. The leftmost display region is not displayed. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the characters “Press!”, The downward arrow, and the operation button 30 are sequentially displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display area 5 </ b> L. Operation suggestion information 4 composed of simulated images 4
050 is displayed. Thus, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

In addition, with the display of the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 erases two button icons 4000 necessary for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and there is no specific effect that can be executed.
And “pseudo-ream” characters 4000b are erased from the screen.

When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol (“1” in this example) is stopped from swinging in the symbol display area 5L. The swing stop is a state in which the decorative symbols are not scrolled in the vertical direction but are not completely stopped and are shaking (the state where the final stop is not displayed). Here, the decorative symbol to be rocked and stopped is the “left” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbol that has been determined in advance if the pseudo continuous symbol has been determined to be stopped. When it is determined not to stop the continuous symbols, it is a “left” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

When the “left” decorative symbol is stopped from swinging, the effect control CPU 120 then displays the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG.
As shown in g), operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R.

When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol ("2" in this example) is stopped from swinging in the symbol display area 5R. Here, the decorative symbol to be stopped is the “right” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbols that has been determined in advance if it is determined to stop the pseudo continuous symbol. When it is determined not to stop the continuous symbols, it is a “right” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

When the “right” decorative symbol is stopped from swinging, the effect control CPU 120 then displays FIG.
As shown in h), operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. Thus, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbols in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C.

It is assumed that the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

At this time, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols based on the table of FIG. 36D, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display area 5C, the pseudo continuous symbol composed of the characters “NEXT” is stopped. As a result, the combination of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” temporary stop symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (j), after the temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the variation of the decorative symbols (for example, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”) Re-variation is resumed to resume the vertical scroll display. After re-variation,
In the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and the display result of the variable symbol display game is finalized. Will do.

On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols based on the table of FIG. 36D, as shown in FIG. The “medium” decorative symbol constituting the combination of the predetermined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) determined in advance in the decorative symbol display area 5C is stopped. As a result, “Left” and “Right” which were determined in advance
The combination of the “medium” confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is stopped. And
As shown in FIG. 37 (l), after the rocking is stopped for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbols) This combination is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is confirmed.

It should be noted that the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols even when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 4050. In this case, it is assumed that the combination of the temporary stop symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped and re-variation is executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, even if no operation is performed, the temporary stop symbol combination is automatically displayed as temporary stop and re-variation is executed. And

In this example, when the operation suggestion condition that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more is satisfied, The operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern is in a reach state (that is, regardless of the specified variation pattern effect mode). The operation suggesting condition may be that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed in a variation pattern with a reach state. In the case of such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the reach state is a big hit, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is lost. It is good to make it.

In addition, when the presence or absence of execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is preset for each variation pattern determined on the game control microcomputer 100 side, that is, by a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. In a case where the pseudo-continuous design is designated to temporarily stop, the effect control CPU 120 uses the button icon 40.
00 or more is displayed, and a variation pattern designation command designated to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol is received (a variable display game is executed by a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous notice effect), This may be an operation suggestion condition. As in the example described above, two or more button icons 4000 are displayed regardless of the specified variation pattern, and the variable display game is executed with a variation time of a predetermined time or more. It is good also as an operation suggestion condition.

(Chance eye notice effect)
The chance eye notice effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game that is the target of the prefetch notice. By displaying the chance that is the display result as a final stop display, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

In this example, the same odd number of decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and “left” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In addition, an even-numbered decorative symbol that is one larger than an odd-numbered decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in each of the “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C is finally stopped and displayed, so that “left”, “middle”, “ right"
The combination of the decorative patterns is completed.

That is, the combination of the decorative symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right” that are chances in this example is any one of “112”, “334”, “556”, and “778”. In accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is possible to display the final stop combination of decorative symbol combinations that are chances.

As shown in FIG. 34, the chance eye notice effect is (1) three or more button icons 4000.
(2) When a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold and any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game does not have a reach state Then, a notification is given to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing a predetermined all symbol stop operation.

In the chance eye notice effect, the combination of “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols swings when the player operates the operation button 30 only once in one variable display game. Stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation three times to stop swinging each of the “left”, “right”, and “middle” decorative symbols in one variable display game, The operation (all symbols stop operation) required in one variable display game is only once. A specific aspect of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

In FIG. 38 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. number(
It is assumed that the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is 3. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied 3
Each display part (left end, second from the left, and third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

Here, the production control CPU 120 stores the start winning change pattern determination result designation command stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area and the second special drawing start winning command storage area. The change pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the display part at the left end) that first satisfies the start condition among the three variable display games that are put on hold is confirmed after confirming the start winning change pattern determination result designation command. Is the non-reach variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) that satisfies the second start condition is the non-reach variation pattern, and the third start condition is satisfied It is assumed that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (third display portion from the left) is the reach variation pattern.

In addition, game balls are placed in the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D multiple times (at least 2 times).
2 button icons 4000 are displayed at the left end of the screen based on winning, and “cut-in” indicating that “a cut-in notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggesting condition is satisfied” is displayed. And a “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b indicating that a “pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” are displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the third button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 38B, from the state where the two button icons 4000 are displayed,
The screen is updated so that the three button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, when three or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen in total, a “chance eye” character 400 indicating that “a chance eye notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied”.
0c is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold, and the variable display game None of the variable display games executed before the time is accompanied by the reach state.

In FIG. 38C, it is assumed that after the third button icon 4000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a confirmed decorative pattern, a combination of non-reach loses with “5” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “6” on the middle is derived and displayed.

Here, the CPU 120 for effect control is a non-reach variation pattern in which the variation pattern of the variable display game in which the start condition is established is not accompanied by the reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Among the two variable display games that are put on hold, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the display portion at the left end) that first satisfies the start condition is a non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition of the chance eye notice effect is established.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display game that is executed before the variable display game of the reach reach variation pattern (two times including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied). Each variable display game) is requested to request the player to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. In addition, whether or not the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern is a big hit combination or a loss combination, a start winning determination result designation command or a start winning variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game Check based on the judgment result specification command.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), when the display result of the variable display game of the reach reach variation pattern that is put on hold is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game that satisfies the start condition Depending on the stop operation, the chance is stopped at a rate of 75%, 25%
If it is decided to stop the non-chance eyes (miss combinations other than the chance eyes) at the rate of and the display result of the variable display game of the reach reach variation pattern is a miss combination, the start condition is satisfied In the variable display game, according to the player's all symbols stop operation,
Decide to stop chance chances at a rate of 25% and stop non-chance eyes at a rate of 75%.

When it is decided to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 120 configures the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display area 5L that constitutes the chance eye according to the player's all symbol stop operation. And the odd number of decorative symbols to be stopped at 5C, and the even number of decorative symbols to be stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R.

When it is decided not to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C according to the player's all symbol stop operation. In addition, the decorative symbols constituting the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command are swung in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Decide to stop. In other words, in accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is determined that the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is a non-chance is to be rocked and stopped.

Thus, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance eye stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display portion from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 38 (f), the characters 4200 of “Stop all symbols!” Are displayed in the center of the screen, and the characters “Press!” Arrows and
Operation suggestion information 4050 including an image simulating the operation button 30 is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in all the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. To do. In addition,
In the chance eye notice effect, unlike the above-described pseudo-announce notice effect, all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, "L", "Middle", and "Right" are displayed by operating the operation button 30 only once. 5
The decorative design is stopped at R.

In addition, the display control CPU 120 displays the three buttons required for the execution of the chance eye notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000 in accordance with the display of the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050. The icon 4000 is deleted. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and there is no specific effect that can be executed. Accordingly, “cut-in” character 4000a, “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b, and “chance” Is deleted from the screen.

Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050 performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

At this time, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to stop the non-chance eyes based on the table of FIG. 38D, as shown in FIG. "
The combination of the fixed decorative pattern (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is swung in the middle and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (h), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. In this case, as a non-chance eye definitive decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses, “4” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “7” on the right, is derived and displayed.

If the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 When it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to all the symbol stop operations, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop symbol) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command This combination shall be stopped.

Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the next variable display game start condition for the next variable display game is based on the fact that it is determined that the player is requested to stop all symbols. Even if established, whether or not to stop the chance eye is determined as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 39 (i), when the display result of the variable display game with the reach reach variation pattern is a big hit combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. According to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 75%, and stop the non-chance eye at a rate of 25%. In the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 25% according to the player's all symbol stop operation, and the non-chance rate at a rate of 75%. Decide to stop.

Further, as in the previous variable display game, the effect control CPU 120 performs the player's all symbol stop operation when it is determined to stop the chance eye or when it is determined to stop the non-chance eye. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped is determined according to the above.

Thus, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance eye stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 39 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there is one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display portion from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 39 (k), the characters 4200 of “Stop all symbols!” And operation suggestion information 4050 are displayed at the center of the screen. As a result, the player is left, left,
, It is recognized that the operation button 30 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in all the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050 performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

At this time, if it is determined that the chance control CPU 120 stops the chance eye based on the table of FIG. 39 (i), as shown in FIG. 39 (l), “left”, “ The combination of the decorative symbols constituting the determined chance eyes is stopped in the middle and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (m), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. Here, “1” is on the left as a confirmed decorative pattern of chance,
A combination of non-reach loses with “1” in the middle and “2” on the right is derived and displayed.

If the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye according to all the symbols stop operation of, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command The combination of symbols) shall be stopped.

Next, for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern that is the target of the chance eye notice effect, it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 requests the player to stop all symbols. Therefore, when the next variable display game start condition is satisfied, whether or not to stop the chance eye is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the display portion at the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the CPU 120 for effect control is shown in FIG.
As shown in o), when the reach state is established, the effect of displaying the character 4080 of “reach!” is executed.

In the 50th effect form described above, the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect are all in the state after the game ball has won the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 4000 is displayed. In the displayed state, it can be executed with the player's operation corresponding to each notice effect. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is executed on the condition of the player's operation after winning the game ball to the general winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

Each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a button icon 4000 displayed on the screen is displayed.
With the increase, the player can recognize that the game ball has won any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening.

When the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in notice effect is established in a state where one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, a notification for prompting a continuous hit operation is given as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 4000 are displayed. If the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is established in the state of being displayed, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation as an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is given, and three or more button icons 4000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition for the notice effect is established, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations as an operation corresponding to the chance eye notice effect is given, and the player can execute the specific effect by performing any operation. I can understand.

Further, according to the display number of the button icon 4000, when the display number is 1 or more, the “cut-in” character 4000a is displayed, and when the display number is 2 or more, the “pseudo-continuous” character 400 is displayed.
When 0b is displayed and the number of displays is 3 or more, the character 4000c of “chance” is displayed, so that the player can select a specific effect type that can be executed according to the number of button icons 4000 displayed. I can grasp it. Thereby, interest can be given to the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening.

In addition, you may make it alert | report the operation required in order to perform the specific effect with the kind of specific effect which can be performed. For example, according to the display number of the button icon 4000, when the display number is 1 or more, a “continuous hit” character is displayed next to the “cut-in” character 4000a, and when the display number is 2 or more, a “pseudo continuous” character is displayed. Next to the character 4000b
Is displayed, and when the number of display is 3 or more, the “chance eye” character 4000c is
By displaying the characters “stop all symbols”, the player can grasp the operation required according to the type of specific effect that can be executed.

Here, in this embodiment, there are cases where the operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of the plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the variable display game start condition is satisfied, the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a reach state, and the variation time of the variation pattern is 8 In this case, a notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation for executing a cut-in notice effect (display of continuous hitting suggestion information 4100) and a prompting operation for stopping each symbol for executing a pseudo-notice notice effect are performed. Which of notifications (display of operation suggestion information 4050 in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R) should be a problem. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the one having the larger number of button icons 4000 required to execute the specific effect is executed with priority. Accordingly, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (two or more button icons 4000 are required) is a notification that prompts a repeated operation for execution of the cut-in notice effect (one or more button icons 4000 are required). Shall be given priority over.

Further, in a state where three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach variation pattern is satisfied, the variation time of the non-reach variation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and In some cases, the variable display game that is put on hold has a reach variation pattern. In this case, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (
Display of operation suggestion information 4050 in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) and a notification that prompts the user to stop all symbols for performing the chance eye notice effect ("Stop all symbols!" In each variable display game) 4200 or display of operation suggestion information 4050) is a problem. In this case, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations for the chance eye notice effect execution (three or more button icons 4000 are required) is a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for the pseudo-continuous notice effect execution (button icon 4000). Is given priority over 2).

Further, in this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 4000 is the number of button icons 4000 required to execute a specific effect (1 for a cut-in notice effect, 2 for a pseudo-continuous notice effect) If it is more than 3), the button icon 4000 required for executing the specific effect is determined from the number of the button icons 4000 initially displayed.
The number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the number of buttons will continue to be displayed after execution of the specific effect.

For example, when a chance eye notice effect is executed in a state where four or more button icons 4000 are displayed, one button icon 4000 that is continuously displayed remains after execution of the chance eye notice effect. The “4000” character 4000a remains displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggesting condition of the cut-in notice effect is established, and the notification for prompting the continuous hitting operation is performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not an operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is established (button icon 4000).
However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when the variable display game is executed, the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is confirmed. It may be determined whether or not is established. For example, CP for production control
U120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 4000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. If the button icon is displayed, U120 indicates the repeated hitting suggestion information 4 for making repeated hits.
100 may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not two or more button icons 4000 are displayed at a timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display result derivation display) reaches a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). If it is determined and displayed, the operation suggestion information 4050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. In addition, the production control CPU 120, at the timing when the effective start winning occurs,
Variable display game with reach status (including variable display game corresponding to the effective starting prize)
Is determined and whether or not three or more button icons 4000 are displayed when any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is not accompanied by the reach state, If it is displayed, the characters 4200 and “operation suggestion information 4050” for “stop all symbols!” For performing the all symbol stop operation may be displayed. In other words, within the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of display of the button icon 4000 reaches a predetermined number set in advance (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed) A notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed is the reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the case of the reach variation pattern, the repetitive hit suggestion information 4100 may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 remains until the end of the variable display game being executed (the display of the display result) at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It is determined whether or not the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). You may make it display the operation suggestion information 4050 for making each symbol stop operation be performed at the timing which became 10 seconds. Further, the effect control CPU 120 has three button icons 4000 based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.
The variable display game with the reach state (including the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) is put on hold at the timing described above, and the variable display game is executed before the variable display game To determine whether they are all without reach,
If a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold and any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is not accompanied by a reach state, the variable display game being executed , "Stop all symbols!" To stop all symbols
The character 4200 and the operation suggestion information 4050 may be displayed. That is, in the variable display game being executed at the timing when the display number of the button icon 4000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the start condition of the variable display game to be executed next) to be established,
A notification that a predetermined operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

Also, in the 50th effect form, the operation suggestion conditions for informing to perform a predetermined operation (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stopping operation, all symbol stopping operation) are all conditions relating to the variable display game (display mode and The example in which the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable display game because the predetermined operation is performed has been described. However, the operation suggesting condition is not limited to such a form, for example, the jackpot It may be a condition relating to a gaming state (for example, whether or not the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state, whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit, and whether or not the number of rounds is greater than a predetermined number). A specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the gaming state. For example, when the number of display of the button icon 4000 reaches a predetermined number within the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. In some cases, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the big hit gaming state is a probabilistic big hit or whether or not the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is greater than a predetermined number. In addition, the button icon 4 is displayed within a period during which the gaming state is controlled to be a probable change state (however, it is set as an effect mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the probable change state).
When the display number of 000 reaches a predetermined number, the player is informed to perform a predetermined operation, and when the predetermined operation is performed, the effect of notifying whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state May be executed.

Further, in the 50th effect form, even when the number of display of the button icon 4000 is 1, a notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the button icon 40
If the display number of 00 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), notification for prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example, any of the continuous operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operations) The specific effect may not be executed (for example, any specific effect of the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect is not executed).

(Example of single announcement)
In the 50th effect form, in order to stop the temporary stop symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, three operations are performed for each area. However, the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is used. ) May be caused to be performed three times for each area in order to stop the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the operation button 30 is displayed. The left symbol composing the final stop symbol is rocked and stopped in response to the operation, and then the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and the final stop symbol is displayed in response to the operation button 30 The right symbol constituting the symbol is stopped from swinging, and finally the operation suggestion information 405 is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C.
0 may be displayed, and the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol may be rocked and stopped according to the operation of the operation button 30. In such a configuration, when the jackpot symbol combination is the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 5L, 5R for “left”, “right”, and “middle” are displayed according to the player's three operations. By sequentially stopping the same decorative design in 5C, the player's expectation for the operation can be enhanced.

In addition, in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” symbol display areas, a combination of special ornament symbols different from a combination of normal ornament symbols (for example, images of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”) is used. By stopping, the player is informed of a predetermined operation, and whether or not the display result of the variable display game is a big hit or off (or a probable change big hit) according to the player's predetermined operation. Or a specific effect that informs whether or not it is a non-probable big hit or the like.
For example, in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas, special ornament symbols, which are images simulating the operation buttons 30, are stopped (or in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas, normal ornament symbols are displayed. The symbol is stopped), and the image of the characters “continuous hit!” Is stopped in the “medium” symbol display area. Then, when the player who has recognized the image of the character “continuous hit!” Performs the hit operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the character “big hit!” Or “losing” is displayed on the image display device 5. May be displayed.

Further, in such a form, according to the character image stopped in the “medium” symbol display area (according to the notification mode that suggests performing a predetermined operation), the variable display game The rate at which the display result is a big hit (or the rate at which the probability variation big hit) may be different. For example, in the “middle” symbol display area, the operation button 30 is made longer than when the image of the “continuous hit!” Character suggesting that the operation button 30 be pressed many times shortly is stopped as a special symbol. When the image of the character “Long press!” Suggesting that the user presses once is stopped as a special symbol, the ratio of the display result that is a big hit may be increased. In this way, an effect in which the display result of the variable display game is notified in accordance with the player's operation without passing through the reach state may be executed as the specific effect. During the period in which one variable display game is being executed, the special decorative design is stopped by causing the combination of the special decorative symbols to be stopped a plurality of times in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” symbol display areas. Each time the combination is stopped, the player may perform a predetermined operation. In this case, a notice effect that suggests a display result is executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. .

In the 50th effect form, each symbol stop operation is valid on condition that two or more winnings are made to the general winning opening, and further, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stopping operation, An example is shown in which all symbol stop operations are valid on condition that three or more winnings are made, and a chance eye notice effect is executed in response to all symbol stop operations, but a notification that a predetermined operation should be performed (
The condition that the predetermined operation is valid) may be a condition that four or more winnings are made to the general winning opening.

[51st effect form]
In the 51st effect form shown in FIG. 34, the specific effect that can be executed according to the gaming state is different from the 50th effect form. In the 51st effect form, the cut-in notice effect requiring continuous hitting operation can be executed when the game state is the normal state, the probability change state, and the time-short state. On the other hand, the quasi-continuous notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the gaming state is in the normal state, and the chance eye notice effect that requires all symbol stop operations is in the probable state or in the short time state. It can be executed only when

In the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, an operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state. In this case, a pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires a larger number of button icons 4000 is executed. Therefore, each symbol stop operation is preferentially prompted. On the other hand, since the executable game state is different between the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the chance eye notice effect, the operation suggesting condition is not satisfied at the same time.

Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the normal state is three or more, the chance eye notice effect is not executed in the normal state, so that the characters “cut-in” 4000a and “pseudo-continuous” are displayed. The character 4000b is displayed, but the “chance eye” character 4000c is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the probability change state or the time-short state is three or more, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed in the probability change state or the time-short state. The characters 4000a and “chance eyes” 4000c are displayed, but the characters “pseudo-continuous” 4000b are not displayed.

Thus, according to the gaming state when the game ball is won in the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed, is appropriately changed according to the gaming state. It is possible to make the interests different.

In this production form, a notice production that requires a larger number of button icons 4000 is preferentially executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Priority may be given to execution. For example, when an operation suggestion condition for a cut-in notice effect and an operation suggestion condition for a pseudo-continuous notice effect are established for the same variable display game, a notice effect with a higher percentage of big hits (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) ) Should be prioritized.

[52nd production form]
In the 52nd effect form shown in FIG. 40, unlike the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 4000 is not displayed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and the game ball to the general winning opening is displayed. Whether to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c for each winning prize, and
In the case of display, the characters “cut-in” 4000a, the “pseudo-continuous” characters 4000b,
And “Chance Eye” character 4000c is to be displayed. In FIG. 41 (A), whether or not to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c in accordance with winning in each general winning opening, and to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c. The display information determination table for determining is shown.

When the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A, the CPU 120 for effect control 25
It is decided to display the character “4000a” “cut-in” on the screen at a rate of% and to display the character “4000b” 4000b on the screen at a rate of 75%. In addition, when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B, the characters 4000a to 4000c at a rate of 50%.
Is not displayed, and the character “cut-in” 4000a at a rate of 25%
Is determined to be displayed on the screen, and the “pseudo-continuous” characters 4000b are determined to be displayed on the screen at a rate of 25%.

In addition, when a game ball is won in the third general winning opening 50C, the character 400 is 80% of the rate
Decided not to display any of 0a-4000c, "cut-in" at a rate of 10%
The character 4000a is determined to be displayed on the screen, and the “chance eye” character 4000c is determined to be displayed on the screen at a rate of 10%. Further, when a game ball is won in the fourth general winning opening 50D, it is determined that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 70%, and the character “cut-in” 4000a is set at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and the character 4000c of “chance” is determined to be displayed on the screen at a rate of 20%.

Similarly to the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started in a state where the character “cut-in” 4000a is displayed, the continuous hitting operation is performed. A cut-in notice effect is executed in response to a continuous hitting operation, and a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is started in a state in which the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b is displayed. In such a case, it is notified that each symbol stop operation is performed, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in accordance with each symbol stop operation, and the reach variation pattern is changed in a state where the character 4000c of “chance eyes” is displayed. If the display game is put on hold and all the variable display games executed before that are non-reach variation patterns, a notification is made to perform all symbol stop operations, To run the chance eyes announcement attraction in accordance with the symbol stop operation.

In the example of FIG. 41A, when a game ball is won in the first general winning opening 50A, one of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and a gaming ball is displayed in the second general winning opening 50B. When winning a prize, one of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and when a game ball is won at the third general winning opening 50C, the characters 4000a to 4000 are given at a rate of 20%.
000c is displayed, and 30 when the game ball is won in the fourth general winning opening 50C.
Any of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of%.

In this way, depending on the general winning award that the game ball has won, the ratio that the type of the specific effect that can be executed is notified and the ratio that the specific effect can be executed are different. It is possible to improve interest by focusing on whether a game ball enters.

Also, the game ball launched into the left game area 10A is easier to win the second general prize opening 50B than the first general prize opening 50A, and the game ball launched into the right game area 10B is the fourth general prize opening. 5
If it is configured so that it is easier to win the third general winning opening 50C than 0D, it is more difficult to win the general winning opening (if the normal state, the first general winning opening 50A, if the probability change state or the short time state) When a game ball wins the fourth general winning opening 50D), the ratio of executing the specific effect is high.

In addition, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B,
Either the “cut-in” character 4000a or the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b may be displayed, but the “chance” character 4000c is not displayed.
On the other hand, when a game ball has won the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D,
Either the “cut-in” character 4000a or the “chance eye” character 4000c may be displayed, but the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b is not displayed.

In this way, depending on the general winning opening where the game ball has won, the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different, so that the game ball enters any general winning port. You can pay attention to what you do and improve your interest.

Further, when the gaming state is the normal state, a gaming ball is fired to the left gaming area 10A, and when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the short time state, the gaming ball is fired to the right gaming area 10B. In a normal state where a game ball wins in 50A or the second general winning opening 50B,
The rate of displaying any of the characters 4000a to 4000c is higher than the probability change state or the short time state in which the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D, and the execution ratio of the specific effect is higher. It will be expensive.

Since the interest is likely to decrease when the gaming state is the normal state, the interest reduction is prevented by increasing the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which the specific performance is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, the player's interest is directed to the special game or the ordinary game. The characters 4000a-40
The rate at which 00c appears and the rate at which the specific performance is executed are set lower than in the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately change the interest of a game ball to win a general winning opening according to the game state.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 41A, when the gaming state is in the probable change state or in the short-time state, the ratio or the specific effect in which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear than in the normal state. The ratio may be increased. In contrast to the example shown in FIG.
When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D, the characters 40 are at a higher rate than when the gaming ball is won in the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B.
00a to 4000c may be displayed. In FIG. 41 (A), the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed only at the time of winning the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B, but similarly, the third general winning opening 50C. Or you may make it provide the specific production which can be performed only at the time of winning a prize to the 4th general winning opening 50D.

In addition to the example shown in FIG. 41 (A), as shown in FIG. 41 (B), a game ball won in each of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the game state at the time is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear or the rate at which the specific performance is executed is greater than the case where the game state when the game ball is won is a probability change state or a short time state. You may make it raise. Contrary to the example shown in FIG. 41 (B), when a game ball is won at each general winning opening in the normal state when a game ball is won at each general winning opening in the probability variation state or the short time state. The characters 4000a to 4000c may be displayed at a higher rate. Further, in FIG. 41B, a specific effect that can be executed only when the gaming state is the normal state may be provided, and the specific effect that can be executed only when the gaming state is the probability change state or the short-time state. May be provided.

In addition, according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state or the time-short state, not limited to the example in which the rate of displaying the characters 4000a to 4000c and the rate of executing the specific performance is different, For example, whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot gaming states (the number of consecutive = the end of the jackpot gaming state) Whether or not the number of consecutive big hit gaming states that are controlled to a probabilistic state or a short time state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, whether or not a variable display game whose display result is a lost combination has continued a predetermined number of times, The character 4000a depends on other conditions such as whether or not the variable display game of the variation pattern of “reach” (“losing without reach”) has continued a predetermined number of times, whether the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined number, or the like. Ratio and the specific effect that 4000c is displayed may be made different proportions to be executed.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 5]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be set as follows.
Hereinafter, the maximum width of an image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is (Y + 1) pixels. The coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen are (0, 0), and the coordinates of the pixel at the lower right corner of the display screen are (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 42A, a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1, 0) And a rectangular area defined with the coordinates (X, Y) as the vertices
It is defined as area β. There is no overlapping area between the first area α and the second area β.
In this example, the second area β is a larger area than the first area α.

In the first area α, prizes related to the number of prizes received at each prize opening, such as the number of prizes received at the general prize opening, the number of prizes received at the first start prize opening, and the number of prizes received at the second start prize opening, etc. Number information can be displayed. In the second area β, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), an error message display area 5E, fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and a start winning memory display area 5H. Is provided. In the example of FIGS. 42 and 43, the second
Although the background image can be visually recognized in the area β, the background image cannot be visually recognized in the first area α.

In this example, the overall image of the background image stored in the ROM 121 as effect data is
As shown in FIGS. 44B and 44C described later, the overall width is (X + 1) pixels, the overall height is (Y + 1) pixels, and the character D climbs near the top of the mountain. It is an image of a mode in which the character E climbs near the foot of the mountain. 42 (b) (c) and 43 (e)
In the example of (f), among the entire background image area [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices), an area [coordinate ( Only a rectangular area defined with a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices is visible to the player.
Of the entire background image area, the area corresponding to the first area α [coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a,
The rectangular area defined with Y) as the apex is invisible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 42B, 42C and 43E, 43F, the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area can be visually recognized, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is not visible.

42 (b) (c) and 43 (e) (f), in the first area α, (1) “Today's number of general winnings” which is the total number of winnings to the general winning opening on that day. (2) “Today's navel winning number” which is the total number of winnings at the first starting prize opening on that day, and (3) “Today's total number of winnings at the second starting winning prize opening” Three items of “Den-chu winning number” are displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 wins a game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D when a winning in the general winning opening occurs. When a general prize opening designation command is received to specify whether the game ball is won at the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening when a winning at the starting prize opening occurs, the starting prize is designated. A mouth designation command is received. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can individually count the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) “Today's general prize number” is 70, (2) “Today's navel prize number”
521, (3) “Today's electric chew winning number” is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of prizes received at the general prize opening and the number of prizes received at the start prize opening in a comparable manner, it is possible to relatively grasp the winning situation at each prize opening.

In the example of FIGS. 42B and 43E, the fourth symbol for the first special figure is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 5A in the second area β. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one hold information corresponding to one special figure game hold. The image of the fourth symbol during variable display, the image of the decorative symbol during variable display, and the image of the hold information are all displayed only in the second area β.

The fourth symbol display layer, the decorative symbol display layer, and the hold information display layer are all higher than the background image display layer. Here, when the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image, when a certain image and another image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the visibility of a certain image is reduced. This means that display control is given priority over the performance. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 42B, 42C, and 43E, 43F, the region where the images of the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information are displayed and one of the background images. In this case, with respect to the overlapping area, the 4th pattern, the decorative pattern, and the hold information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (player side).

In this embodiment, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative symbol display layer. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 43 (f), the area where the decorative symbols are displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap,
In this case, regarding the overlapping area, an error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative symbol is easily visible (including visible), while the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize (including invisible).
Display control is performed. Accordingly, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative design (player side).

As a display control for enabling the player to visually recognize only the area corresponding to the second area β among the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire background image is displayed in the background. An area corresponding to the first area α is set as the display layer of the image, and an area corresponding to the first area α is not set as the display layer of the background image (that is, [coordinate (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, (Rectangular area defined with Y) as the apex] may be used).

In addition, as another display control for allowing only the area corresponding to the second area β to be visible to the player among the entire area of the background image, the entire area of the background image is set as the display layer of the background image (that is, In the display layer higher than the display layer of the background image, the entire background image [using the image data of the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is used. By setting another background image (for example, a white, plain image) for winning number information in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be visually recognized. Anyway. In such a configuration, it is easy to see a predetermined transmittance (an image of a display layer below the display layer) on another background image (for example, a white and plain image) for winning number information. , The image of the lower display layer may be visible, and the background image of the lower display layer can be set by setting a predetermined transmittance. An area corresponding to the first area α can be visually recognized, and the character E can be visually recognized.

In addition, the display layer of the winning information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning information is not reduced by displaying other information in the first area α. In addition, the display layer of the winning information may be the same display layer as the error message in which the display area does not exist in the first area α, or may be a higher display layer than the error message. May be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer for the number-of-wins information is the highest among all the display layers, and is displayed in a display area for other information (displayed in the first area α or the second area β). Regardless, the visibility may not be lowered.

As shown in FIG. 42 (b), since the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are all performed in the second area β, these images are displayed. Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings to the general winning opening (“the number of general winnings of the day”) as the winning number information displayed in the first area α, the first start winnings The visibility of the number of winnings to the mouth ("Today's navel winning number") and the number of winnings to the second start winning opening ("Today's electric Chu winnings") are not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information.

When the image display device 5 is performing variable display of the fourth symbol, variable display of the decorative symbol, and display of the hold information, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, FIG.
As shown in d), based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the general prize opening designation command, the number of prizes received in the general prize opening displayed in the first area α (“the number of general prizes of today”).
) Is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are performed, the general winning displayed in the first area α is displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth is updated without impeding visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning information is updated is not hindered by the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result, the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

When the special symbol variable display ends and the display result is stopped and displayed, FIG.
As shown in c), the variable display of the 4th symbol for the first special figure is finished and the display result is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the decorative design is also finished and the display result is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the 4th symbol display area 5A is lit (displayed) in a display color that reminds of a disengagement (the display result is stopped and displayed). The off symbol that becomes “5, 3, 1” is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

Here, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the fourth symbol is displayed in a stopped state (in a state where the display result is derived and displayed) and is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed). Since all the decorative symbols (in the state) are displayed in the second area β, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α depending on the display of these images on the image display device 5. Information on the number of prizes received at the general prize opening ("Today's number of general prizes"), the number of prizes at the first start prize opening ("Number of navel prizes of today"), and the prize at the second start prize opening Visibility of the number ("Dai Chu Chu winnings today") is not hindered. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the number-of-wins information appropriately irrespective of the stop display of a 4th symbol, and the stop display of a decoration symbol.

Then, in the image display device 5, when a stop for the fourth symbol and a stop symbol for the decorative symbol are being displayed, if a winning in the general winning opening occurs, as shown in FIG. 42 (d). ,
Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the general prize opening designation command, the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“the number of general prizes of the day”) is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs when the stop display of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped, the number of winnings in the general winning slot displayed in the first area α is calculated. , Updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning information is updated is not hindered by the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result, the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

42B, 42C, and 42D, an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, but the first starting winning opening is shown. In the same way as in the case of the general winning opening, the winning in the first starting winning opening is performed regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol. The number is updated without impeding visibility. In addition, even when a winning to the second start winning a prize occurs, as in the case of the general winning a prize, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol, and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, The number of winnings in the second start winning opening is updated without impeding visibility.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (e) and 43 (f), when the production control CPU 120 receives an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred, an error message (in this example, “an error has occurred”) is displayed. Is displayed). As described above, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative symbol display layer. For this reason, when the decoration control CPU 120 receives an abnormality detection designation command when the decorative design is variably displayed or when the decorative design is stopped, an area for displaying the decorative design and an error are displayed. With respect to the overlapping range with the area where the message is displayed, display control is performed to make the error message easy to see (including visible) and make the decorative symbol difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 43B, when viewed from the player, the error message is closer to the player (side of the player) than the decorative symbol that is variably displayed (or the decorative symbol that is stopped). Looks like it is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 43 (f), since the error message is displayed in the second area β, the fact that the error message is displayed on the image display device 5 indicates that the error message is displayed in the first area α. As the number-of-wins information displayed on the screen, the number of winnings in the general winning opening ("Today's general winning number"), the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening ("Today's navel winning number"), The visibility of the number of winnings at the 2 start winning award (“Today's electric Chu winnings”) is not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

Then, in the image display device 5, when an error message is displayed, if a winning in the general winning opening occurs, as shown in FIG. 43 (g), the effect control CPU 1.
Based on the fact that 20 has received the general prize opening designation command, the number of winning prizes to the general prize opening displayed in the first area α (“the number of general prizes for today”) is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the error message is displayed, the visibility of the number of winning in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is not hindered. Updated. That is, depending on the display of the error message, the visibility when winning information is updated is not hindered. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result, the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

In the example of FIGS. 43 (f) and 43 (g), an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, but the winning in the first starting winning opening is shown. When it happens,
As in the case of the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, regardless of the display of the error message. In addition, even when a prize is awarded to the second starting prize opening, the visibility of the number of winnings to the second starting prize opening is hindered regardless of the display of an error message, as in the case of the general winning prize opening. Updated without any changes.

Further, in the example of FIG. 43 (f), the characters “An error has occurred” for notifying that an abnormality has occurred are displayed based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Not limited to this, different error messages may be displayed depending on the type of abnormality designated by the abnormality detection designation command. For example, when an abnormality detection designation command is received that specifies that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, the message “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed, and an abnormality detection designation command that specifies that a vibration abnormality has occurred is received. Sometimes the message “Vibration error has occurred” may be displayed, and when an error detection designation command is received that specifies that a radio wave error has occurred, the message “A radio wave error has occurred” may be displayed. .

In this example, as shown in FIG. 42A, a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1) are defined. , 0) and coordinates (X,
Y) is defined as the second area β, the rectangular area defined as the apex is defined as the second area β, but the first area that can display the number-of-wins information as well as the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, the hold information, and the error message can be displayed. The second area is not limited to a rectangular area, and may be any area that does not overlap each other on the screen.

(Display / Hide setting for winning information)
As described with reference to FIG. 4, the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is operated by opening the glass door frame 3a forward (operating by a game hall clerk but not by a player). Position), and on the player setting screen (see FIG. 5), when the setting for displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening is made by the player's operation, The number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings is to be displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed in this way, and when the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed. In the first area α, not only the number of winning in the general winning opening, but also the number of winning in the first starting winning opening (so-called “Hesso”) and winning in the second starting winning opening (so-called “Den Chu”). The number is also displayed. In other words, according to the operation of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings at the first start winning opening and the number of winnings at the second starting winning opening.

Here, as described in FIG. 4, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the non-display setting (
In the case of the first position, the number of winning information (the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) is indicated by the operation button 30. ) Is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 regardless of whether or not the setting for displaying () is made. Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), when the setting for displaying the winning information is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of non-display setting) ) Is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

The example shown in FIGS. 44B and 44C is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed in this way, and the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed. In this case, the first area α is not displayed in the first area α, and the first start winning opening (
The number of winnings in the so-called “Hesso”) and the number of winnings in the second start winning opening (so-called “Den Chu”) are also not displayed.

Thus, according to the convenience of the game hall side, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning information according to the setting operation on the game hall side and according to the setting operation of the player side. ,Also,
The number-of-wins information can be displayed according to the player's decision.

As shown in FIGS. 44 (a), (b), and (c), when the setting for not displaying the winning number information is made, the error message display area 5E, compared with the setting for displaying the winning number information,
The fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the start winning memory display area 5H are common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are set to display the winning information and the number of winnings. It does not change with the setting that does not display information.
This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change for setting whether or not to display the winning number information.

On the other hand, when it is set not to display the winning number information, as shown in FIGS. 44A, 44B and 44C, it is set to display the winning number information (display examples in FIGS. 42 and 43). In contrast, the background image is visible in the first area α and the second area β. FIG. 44 (a) (
b) In the example of (c), among the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices], the area corresponding to the first area α [ A rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] and an area corresponding to the second area β [
Both the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices], that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

Therefore, in the example of FIGS. 44 (a), (b), and (c), the player determines the coordinates (a + 1) of the background image.
, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as a vertex, the character D included in the rectangular area can be visually recognized, and the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image are the vertices. The character E included in the rectangular area defined as is also visible.

Thus, regarding the display position and display range (size of the image) of a specific image (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. The control load is reduced by not changing (common) with the setting that does not, while the other images (background images) can be viewed with the setting that displays the winning information and the setting that does not display the winning information By making different ranges different, the interest in the case where winning information is not displayed is improved.

And as shown in FIG.44 (b), in the image display apparatus 5, the variable display of a 4th pattern,
As shown in FIG. 44 (d), when the variable display of the decorative design and the display of the hold information are performed, even when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the setting is made so that the winning number information is not displayed. As a result, the number of winnings in the general winning award is not displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 44 (d), in the image display device 5, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs when the stop display of the 4th symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are performed, as shown in FIG. Since the number information is not displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed.

In the example of FIGS. 44B, 44C, and 44D, an example in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed even when the winning in the general winning slot is generated is shown. In the case where the setting is not displayed, the number of winnings at the first starting winning opening is not displayed even when winning at the first starting winning opening occurs, and the winning at the second starting winning opening occurs. However, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is not displayed. In this manner, whether or not to display the number of winnings at each winning opening can be set according to the player's operation.

(Each item in the winning information)
FIG. 45 shows an example of items of winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. Note that FIG.
5 is an item related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening, but similarly, the item related to the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. Can be displayed in the first area α.

It is possible to display “today's number of general winnings (A1)”, which is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening since the power-on of the gaming machine. When the power is turned on, the production control CPU 120
The value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 is set to 0, and the value of the general winning number counter is incremented by 1 every time a general winning opening designation command is received, so that A1 can be totaled. Yes.

In addition, it is possible to display “today's general winning ratio (A2)”, which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the power-on of the gaming machine. The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the value of the out number counter every time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. By adding one by one, the total number of outs can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs, A2 can be tabulated.

In addition, it is possible to display “today's general award ball number (referred to as A3)”, which is the total number of award balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening since the power-on of the gaming machine. Further, it is possible to display “today's general prize ball ratio (A4)”, which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

The ROM 121 includes a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and first general winning openings 50A to 4th.
The number of winning balls determined for each of the general winning opening 50D and the large winning opening is stored. The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and the general prize opening designation command is designated every time a general prize opening designation command is received. By adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening to the value of the general winning ball number counter, A3 can be tabulated. Also, the production control CPU 120
When the power is turned on, the value of the winning ball counter stored in the RAM 122 is set to 0, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the winning prize to the big winning opening are designated. Each time a winning command is received, the total number of winning balls can be counted by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port specified by each command to the value of the winning ball counter.
A4 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of winning balls.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies whether the current gaming state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the gaming state by the gaming state designation command, and wins in the low base state The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be divided and tabulated.

Specifically, it is possible to display “the number of general winnings in the low base state (referred to as B1)” that is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state It is possible to display “the number of general winnings in the high base state (referred to as C1)”, which is the total value of the winning numbers.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets both the value of the low base medium general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 and the value of the high base medium general winning number counter to 0.
Shall be set. Then, during the period when the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, B1 is added by incrementing the value of the low base medium general winning number counter by 1 every time the general winning opening designation command is received. During the period when the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command is either the probability change state or the short time state, the value of the high base medium general winning number counter is received every time a general winning mouth designation command is received. By adding one by one, C1 can be tabulated.

In addition, it is possible to display the “low base state general winning ratio (referred to as B2)” that is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state It is possible to display “a general winning ratio in a high base state (C2)”.

It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 sets both the low base medium out number counter value and the high base medium out number counter value stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And, in the normal state, the low base medium out number can be counted by adding the value of the low base medium out number counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received, B2 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of low base medium outs. On the other hand, in the probability variation state or the short time state, the high base medium out number can be counted by adding one value to the high base medium out number counter every time a detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received. It is possible to count C2 by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high base medium outs.

In addition, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the low base state (referred to as B3)”, which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the low base state. It is possible to display “the number of general winning balls in the high base state (referred to as C3)”, which is the total value of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the state.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets both the value of the low base medium general prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0.
Shall be set. Then, during the period in which the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning mouth designated by the received general winning mouth designation command is displayed as a low base medium general winning ball number counter. B3 (“the number of general prize balls in the low base state”) can be counted by adding to the value of the game state, and the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is either the probability variation state or the short-time state. The period is determined by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening specified by the received general prize designation command to the value of the high base medium general prize ball counter, so that C3 ("the number of general prize balls in the high base state"") Can be tabulated.

In addition, it is possible to display “a ratio of the general prize ball in the low base state (referred to as B4)” that is a ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state. C
It is possible to display a “high base state general prize ball ratio (denoted as C4)” that is a ratio of 3.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on. . In the normal state, each time the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the large winning mouth prize command are received, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is reduced to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the ball counter, the number of low base medium award balls can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of low base medium award balls, B4 (“low base state General prize ball ratio ") can be tabulated. On the other hand, in the probability change state or the short-time state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is increased every time the start winning mouth designation command, the general winning mouth designation command, and the large winning prize designation command are received. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball number counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls, C4 (“high It is possible to tabulate the general award ball ratio in the base state.

As described above, information related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be tabulated for each gaming state, so that the player can grasp information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is the low base state (normal state), focus on the items B1 to B4, and when the gaming state is the high base state (probability change state or short time state), focus on the items C1 to C4. Become.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α when the gaming state is in the low base state, while not displaying the items C1 to C4, and when the gaming state is in the high base state. The items C1 to C4 may be displayed in the first area α, while the items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. In addition, items B1 to B4 and C1 regardless of the gaming state
Although items C to C4 are displayed in the first area α, in the low base state, the items B1 to B4 are displayed in a manner that is easier to visually recognize (for example, larger) than the items C1 to C4, and in the high base state May display the items C1 to C4 in a manner that is easier to visually recognize (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4.

(Aggregation of winning information during the set period)
In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can count the number-of-wins information in the period set by the player, and the “total number of winnings in the set period ( D1) ”can be displayed in the first area α.

When the aggregation period corresponding to the player's operation shown in FIG. 46 described later is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 and the aggregation. The timer value is set to a set period (total period according to the player's operation), and the total timer is started. Each time a general prize opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is incremented by 1 during the set period, and the general prize is received during the set period when the total timer times out (when the set total period has elapsed). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

In addition, while the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period since the detection signal was last received from the out-sphere detector), the counting timer is updated while the number of outs is not increasing (for example, After a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection signal was last received from the out-ball detector, the counting timer may be stopped without updating. In this way, a period during which the game ball is not being launched into the game area 10 may be excluded from the counting period.

When the counting timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set to the setting period (player's The counting timer is set again at the counting period according to the operation). The value of the general prize counter during the set period is added every time a general prize opening designation command is received, and the general prize counter during the set period when the total timer times out again (when the set total period elapses again). Is displayed in the first area α as D1. Thus, D1 corresponding to the counting period is displayed for each counting period set by the player.

Further, it is possible to display a “general winning ratio (set as D2) for the set period” that is a ratio of D1 to the number of outs of gaming machines in the set period. The effect control CPU 120 is a RAM 12.
When the value of the general winning number counter during the setting period stored in 2 is set to 0, the value of the out number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 122 is set to 0 together with this, Each time the detection signal output from the out-sphere detector is received, the number of outs in the set period can be counted by adding one out value counter value during the set period. D2 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of all D1.

In addition, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the set period (denoted as D3)” which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on winning in each general prize opening in the set period. Further, it is possible to display “general prize ball ratio (D4) in the set period” which is a ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period.

When the aggregation period corresponding to the player's operation shown in FIG. 46, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0, and The value of the total timer is set to a set period (total period according to the player's operation), and the total timer is started. Each time a general winning award designation command is received, the total number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning prize designated by the general winning award designation command is added to the value of the general prize winning number counter during the set period, and the counting timer The value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period when time-out occurs (when the set counting period elapses) is displayed in the first area α as D3.

When the counting timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set to the setting period (player). The counting timer is restarted, and the counting timer starts again. Then, every time a general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general prize ball counter during the set period is added, and the general prize ball during the set period when the total timer times out again (when the set total period elapses again). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. Thus, D3 corresponding to the total period is displayed for each total period set by the player.

When the value of the general prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 122 is set to 0, the effect control CPU 120 also sets the prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 122. Is set to 0, and each time a winning prize designation command is specified, each time a start prize designation command, a general prize designation command, or a big prize entry command specifying a prize to the big prize opening is received. Is added to the value of the prize ball number counter during the set period, so that the number of prize balls in the set period can be tabulated, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period D4 can be tabulated by calculating.

It should be noted that the general prize opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 is to designate which general prize opening the game ball has won, so that the effect control CPU 120 has the first general prize opening 50A to No. 4 Total number of winnings to the general winning opening 50D is individually counted, and items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4 and D1 to D4 are counted for each general winning opening,
The total value can be displayed in the first area α.

Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the items is displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the gaming state or the like. For example, the items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first start winning opening to be described later, and
Of the items related to the number of winnings at the second start winning opening, which of the items to display in the first area α is an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30). Or may be selectable by an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 30).

In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the CPU 120 for effect control checks whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the total value does not reach the reference value As shown in FIG. 46 (4), which will be described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has not reached the reference value of the item. . Thereby, the player grasps whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value as compared with the reference value of the item, and selects the gaming machine. For (whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine)
It can be used as a judgment material.

Next, a method for setting the aggregation period will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the totaling period setting screen in FIG. 46 sets the totaling period when selection is made to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the selection screen in FIG. This is a screen that is displayed when the selection screen for selecting whether or not is selected and the selection to set the aggregation period is made on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed) And

In the setting screen of FIG. 46 (1), a message “Please set the total period” is displayed, and an image simulating the operation button 30 is displayed below the message. On the settings screen,
An icon including the characters “10 minutes”, an icon including the characters “30 minutes”, and an icon including the characters “60 minutes” are displayed, and a message “Decide button after selecting with the jog dial” is displayed. Furthermore, an arrow that prompts the user to press the operation button 30 (jog dial) after rotating it is displayed.

When setting the total period to 10 minutes, when the operation button 30 is pressed while the icon including the characters “10 minutes” is selected by rotating the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the left, the “setting” The message “The period is 10 minutes” is displayed, and the total period is 10
Set to minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. Also, when the total period is set to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 46 (1), when the operation button 30 is pressed while an icon including the characters “30 minutes” is selected, FIG. 46 (2). As shown in the above, “the set period is 3
0 minutes. Is displayed, and the total period is set to 30 minutes. That is, D1
The set period of .about.D4 is 30 minutes. Further, when setting the total period to 60 minutes, when the operation button 30 is pressed while the icon including the characters “60 minutes” is selected by rotating the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the right, The message “Setting period is 60 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

Thus, it is possible to set a desired total period according to the player's operation. In the example of FIG. 46, 30 minutes is set as the total period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (3), in the first area α, the number of winnings in the general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as “the number of winnings in the set period (D1)”. In the example of FIG. 46 (3), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is Since it is 37, the total value exceeds the reference value. Accordingly, there is no notification that the total value has not reached the reference value.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG.
Although 0 is stored, since the total value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is 29, the total value does not reach the reference value. Therefore, a notification that the total value has not reached the reference value (display of a message “below the reference value (30 times / 30 minutes)”) is made.

(Items related to the number of prizes received at the start prize opening)
The production control CPU 120 receives a start winning port designation command for designating which one of the first start winning port and the second starting winning port is won when a winning to the start winning port occurs. By the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general winning opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general winning openings, the “number of wins to the first starting winning opening of today (in A1 “Equivalent)”, “award ratio to today's first start winning opening (corresponding to A2)”, “the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning to the first start winning opening today (corresponding to A3)”, And “Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's first winning prize opening with respect to today's total prize balls (
"Equivalent to A4)", "Today's number of winnings at the second starting prize opening (corresponding to A1)", "Today's winning ratio at the second starting prize opening (corresponding to A2)", "Today's 2 The number of prize balls awarded based on winning at the starting prize opening (corresponding to A3) "
The ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning at the start winning opening (equivalent to A4) "
It can be displayed in the first area α.

Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)”, “the number of winning in the low base state” The number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the 1st prize opening (corresponding to B3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the low base condition to the first starting prize opening in the low base state "Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winning (corresponding to B4)", "Number of winnings in second starting winning opening in low base state (corresponding to B1)", "Second starting in low base state" Winning ratio to the winning opening (equivalent to B2) "," Number of winning balls awarded based on winning at the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B3) ", and" Low base state " In the low base state for the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to B4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)”, “the number of winning in the high base state” The number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the 1st start prize opening (corresponding to C3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the high base state to the first start prize opening in the high base state “Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winning (corresponding to C4)”, “Number of winnings in second starting winning opening in high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “Second starting in high base state “Award ratio to the winning opening (corresponding to C2)”, “Number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C3)”, and “Awarding in the high base state” In a high base state for the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to C4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

In addition, “the number of winnings in the first start winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)”, “the first starting winning in the setting period” Awarded based on the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the mouth (corresponding to D3), and “based on winning in the first start winning mouth in the setting period with respect to the number of winning balls given in the setting period” "Percentage of winning balls (corresponding to D4)", "Number of winnings in the second start winning opening during the setting period (corresponding to D1)", "Winning ratio for the second starting winning opening during the setting period ( Equivalent to D2) ",
“Number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the second start winning opening during the set period (corresponding to D3)
And “the ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the second start winning opening in the setting period relative to the number of prize balls awarded in the setting period (corresponding to D4)” Can be displayed in the first area α.

(Role (running ratio), ratio display)
Further, in the gaming machine 1, each of the winning ports (large winning port, second starting winning port, first starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports, etc.) is also included in the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. , Also called “entry area”). Further, in the gaming machine 1, predetermined information such as a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio can be displayed on the display monitor 29 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 provided on the main board 11.

As described above, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is normal to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test).
Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is performed and, as a result of the adjustment, whether the game medium has entered the general winning area as frequently as designed. Therefore, in a gaming machine according to an embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made in a gaming machine having a general winning area. Less than,
A description will be given of the display of a ratio of an accessory. Hereinafter, the display of the total of game balls on the main board 11 and the ratio of the objects will be described.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 49 is a board that performs control related to the game. The main board 11 is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1A, the display monitor 29 is enclosed in a substrate case 201, and a display monitor 29 is arranged at the center on the back side of the main substrate 11. The display monitor 29 is disposed in front of the main board 11 when visually recognized. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the glass door frame 3a is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the glass door frame 3a is opened. It is the front of the game and is different from the front of the gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the gaming machine 1 may be common.

The main board 11 has information related to game winning, for example, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (electrical chew), and the large winning opening ( attacker)
The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls are input and aggregated, and the display monitor 29 displays the combination of winning balls (attack) that is the percentage of winning balls in the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. %) (%
), Of the total number of prize balls, the ratio of the number of prize balls for winning the 2nd starting prize opening (Den Chu) and the percentage of winning balls for winning the big prize opening (attacker) is displayed (%) It is supposed to be. A combination (ream ratio) is a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls (the number of consecutive winning characters below) by winning a winning prize (attacker). The ratio is the number of winning balls in the 2nd starting winning entrance (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the big winning entrance (attacker) (the number of winning balls below) Is the proportion occupied. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below)
Number of winning balls for winning the winning prize opening (Attacker), number of winning balls for winning the 2nd starting winning opening (Denchu), and other than the big winning opening (Attacker) and 2nd starting winning opening (Den Chu) And the total number of winning balls by winning the first winning prize opening (the first starting prize opening, the general winning prize opening). In addition, the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electrical chew) are variable roles, and the winning percentage of the game ball is changed due to the change of the passable width of the game ball. is there. Also, the big prize opening (
The winning holes other than the attacker and the second starting prize opening (Den Chu) (first starting prize opening, general winning prize opening) are fixed objects, and the passing width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning ratio is a fixed character.

As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winnings, the first in 6000 winning balls
Number of award balls (general award ball number) for winning at the starting opening (heso) and general winning opening (sode), and the number of winning balls for winning at the second starting award opening (electric chew) Number (number of electric chew award balls), number of special electoral award balls (attacker award number)
Are counted. The total is one set, 10 sets, that is, 60000 roles (
Calculate the ratio (%) and the ratio (%). In addition, the number of award balls (general award ball number), the number of ordinary electric award balls (the number of electric chew award balls),
The number of special electric prize balls (attacker ball number) is recorded in the ring buffer, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set.
Furthermore, the memory of 11 sets of 66,000 pieces is stored in a corresponding quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative combination (connection ratio) (%) and combination ratio (%) within the range of those numerical values are stored. Can be calculated.

The display monitor 29 displays 60,000 items in a series (unit ratio) (%), a unit ratio (%), and a total unit group (unit ratio) (%) and a unit ratio (%) for a predetermined time (for example, 30). Can be switched every second). That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of award balls won by winning at the first starting hole (hews) counted by the progress of the game, winning at the second starting winning hole (electric chew) The number of award balls due to, and the number of award balls due to winning a prize winner (attacker) will change. Then,
For example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying 60,000 consecutive games (run ratio) (%) is reflected in the 60,000 displayed role ratios (%), 60000 games will be displayed. The religion (
There is a risk of a discrepancy between the ratio (%) and the ratio (%) of 60000 pieces.
Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), the number of winning balls by winning at the large winning opening (attacker), the total number of winning balls The number is input and the total is a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, 60,000 consecutive roles (run ratio) (%)
Such a discrepancy can be prevented if it is performed at the display timing.

As an example of the calculation method, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning mouth (Den Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the big winning mouth (attacker) A method for calculating the ratio of the winning combinations (ratio (%)) in the case where the total number of acquired winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. In addition, the number of winning balls acquired means the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutively-acquired balls acquired is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker. For this reason, the combination (running ratio) can be obtained by the following equation (1). The role is
It can obtain | require by following (2) Formula.
Association (ream ratio) = [Number of consecutive feature acquisition balls / total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)
Ratio = [(number of consecutive feature winning balls + number of winning balls) / total winning number] × 100 (2)

When the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the bonus rate is obtained by dividing 42000 by 60000 and rounding down to 3 decimal places after 0.70.
However, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform the arithmetic operation after the decimal point, the operation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is 1
00 times to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60000.
As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when calculating the calculation result to 3 digits after the decimal point 1
It may be multiplied by 000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is 10
Divide by 0 to get 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%.
That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-term bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, the number of winning balls is 3
00A410h is stored in the byte storage area.

Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation with the microcomputer used in the gaming machine, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down from the total number of prize balls 00EA60h, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh.
That is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, as in the second calculation method, the total number of winning balls is divided by 100 (273/100)
2 is calculated. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

In the third calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in a gaming machine is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls is 10 times is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and approximates the original value.

The substrate case 201 is made of a light-transmitting material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electrical components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who wants to visually recognize the main board 11.

The board case 201 is provided with a seal for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main board 11. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, the first part (
For example, when the display monitor 29 is arranged in the central part of the main board 11, other electrical components are arranged in a second part (for example, a peripheral part of the main board 11) different from the first part in the main board 11. A hole, a heat radiating hole, and a seal may be disposed in a portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11. In particular, the heat radiating hole is preferably provided in the vicinity of the display monitor 29 in order to release heat generated by the display monitor 29. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiating hole is disposed at a position not directly in front of the display monitor 29. According to this, the visibility on the display monitor 29 is not hindered, so that it is easy to confirm information related to winning.

Further, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap with the portion of the substrate case 201 corresponding to the second part of the main substrate 11. Specifically, the portion of the substrate case 201 corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11 does not overlap the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. To. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being hindered by the wiring.

The main board 11 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine. In order to avoid misidentification with the 7-segment of the display monitor 29, the main board 11 is separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them with a gap between them. The other electronic components here are preferably large control components such as a CPU.

Storage area for storing information related to game winning (ring buffer, 10 set total buffer (total of information related to game winning stored in ring buffer having 10 counters of 2 bytes at maximum), prize ball The total number buffer) may not be initialized when the reset button is operated, but may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be further described later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, the initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of winning balls stored,
When an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning characters is larger than the value of the winning character number An initialization process may be performed. Further, the abnormality count error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the abnormality count error display or warning display may be performed or may be performed after the initialization process. Abnormal count error display and warning display will be further described later.

For example, in calculating the ratio (%), the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired roles is 19876.
Assuming that the number is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor and the ratio is calculated.
1987/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When calculation is performed in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with a decimal point must be avoided, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following. 198
In the division of 76/34321, 34321 of the denominator is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio is 57% (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799 respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is + 0.3%.
Error. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, the correct value is 69.9%.
When the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% →
It is possible that an error of 1% on the display is displayed at 70%, but the role (%) (or the role (%)) with a very small error on the display of 1% error. Can be displayed.

In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100. Therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Further, the error gradually increases even when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, the total number of acquired balls more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is a minimum value of 16 bits).
) Are counted by the counter until the display monitor 29 has a ratio (%), a combination (continuous ratio) (%
) Is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, there is a possibility that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, flashing the displayed value May be.

Further, the display monitor 29 displays the ratio (%) and the combination (link ratio) (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value at predetermined intervals (for example, every 30 seconds). indicate.
In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to
If it is displayed as a value of (combined ratio) (%), there is a possibility that the value of the combined ratio (%) and the combined function (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable to sequentially display the values calculated and calculated in the same interrupt for the role ratio (%) and the role combination (ream ratio) (%).

In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when two 7 segments are provided), it becomes impossible to display 100% as 100. In this case 10
99 may be displayed instead of 0. In the display monitor 29 shown in FIGS. 50 and 51A, numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, numerical values may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under specific conditions.

In addition, in the above calculation method, an example is shown in which the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls, and the number of consecutive winning balls are counted in a counter. It is detected that a game medium has been won by a sensor provided, and the number of winning balls is counted separately based on the detection result. The value to be aggregated may be calculated. Further, based on the detection result, a sensor provided individually for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passage through which the game media winning the attacker and the game media winning the electric chew are discharged are joined. Thus, a value to be added to the counter for the number of winning balls for the winning combination and the counter for the number of winning balls for the consecutive winning points may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the combination (ream) ratio will be described in detail. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which it is detected that a game medium has been won by a sensor provided in each of an attacker and an electric chew, and the number of each winning ball is individually counted based on the detection result.

A display monitor 29 is connected to the main board 11 in the gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 1, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 (see FIG. 1) provided in the gaming machine frame 3 as shown in FIG. On the back side of the game board 2 is a main board 11.
In addition to these, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided. The main board 11 is the main board 11
It is arrange | positioned in the position which does not overlap with each peripheral board | substrate other than. The main board 11 may overlap with each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main substrate 11 may overlap so as to be on the upper side of each peripheral substrate.

The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a large winning number counter are provided.

The first gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of times that the first gate switch 21A has detected a game ball. The second gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 21B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second starting prize counter is
This is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B.

The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning port switch 24A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning port switch 24B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 24C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. The big prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

A clear switch is connected to the main board 11. The clear switch is arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate. By operating the clear switch, the combination (relation ratio) and data used for the combination stored in the RAM 102 described later are cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when it is necessary to redo the calculation of the association (relation ratio) or ratio, such as when an obstacle occurs in the calculation of the association (relation ratio) or ratio. It is. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal combination (run ratio) or a combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing data.

The main substrate 11 is provided with an RTC 106. The main board 11 is the RTC 106
Can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

The main board 11 is accommodated in a board case 201 as shown in FIG. Caulking pins 11B are attached to the substrate case 201. Since the caulking pins 11B are provided, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and illegal acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 201 is a caulked substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. In addition, a seal seal 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The seal seal 11S is pasted across, for example, the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The seal seal 11S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and the display monitor 29
It is arrange | positioned in the position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is interrupted | blocked, such as just in front. Thus, the display monitor 29 is disposed at a position that is not hidden by the seal seal 11S.

The display monitor 29 includes a four-digit display unit of a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. The first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D
All of them are composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments for drawing the character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display parts 2
9A-4th display part 29D can be lighted and blinked by various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc., respectively. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

Each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. The aggregation period is displayed on the first display portion 29A and the second display portion 29B with the upper two digits, and the third digit with the lower two digits.
Numerical values are displayed as percentages on the display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. In display No1,
Short-term roles (running ratio) are displayed, and in display No2, short-term roles are displayed. Display No3
Then, the total cumulative combination (run ratio) is displayed, and the display No. 2 displays the total cumulative combination.

The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) was 60000. The period for which the total is calculated means the total period after starting the calculation of the consecutive (relation ratio) and ratio, or the total period after temporarily resetting the calculation of the consecutive (link ratio) and ratio. To do.

In the above example, the combination (run ratio) and the combination ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the combination of consecutive balls (ream ratio) may be the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state in the total number of prize balls. In addition, the winning ratio is the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the total number of winning balls. It is good also as a ratio which the number of prize balls by winning a prize occupies.

When the short-term role combination (run ratio) of the display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the short-term role ratio of the display No2 is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. In addition, when the short-term combination (linkage ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term combination (linkage ratio) is displayed as a percentage (displayed in%) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed,
The first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B display the short-term role ratio as a percentage (% display).

When the total accumulated combination of display No. 3 (run ratio) is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the total accumulated combination of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, “A7.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. In addition, when the total accumulated combination of display No. 3 is displayed, the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D
When the total cumulative combination (run ratio) is displayed in percentage (% display) and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed, the total display combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. Is displayed as a percentage (%).

When the main board 11 calculates the combination (ream ratio) and the combination ratio, the game ball that has entered the fourth general winning opening from the attacker, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening The number of intrusions is counted. The CPU 103 performs the first gate switch 21A in the main process.
And the second gate switch 21B, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port switch 22
B, a state confirmation process for confirming the state of each switch (the presence or absence of a detection signal) of the count switch 23 and the first general winning opening switch 24A to the fourth general winning opening switch 24D.

In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When detection signals are output from the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the first start port switch 22A, Second
When a detection signal is output from the start port switch 22B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, a large winning is obtained. When the value of the number counter is added and a detection signal is output from the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24D, By adding the values of the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number counter, and the fourth general winning number counter, the number of game balls entering each entry area (to each winning opening) The number of game balls won). The value of each counter is R
It is stored in AM102.

In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together in a series of processes for checking the switch state corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch state check process). ) Without running a separate counting program, that is,
The number of game balls entering each entry area can be tabulated without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in execution programs.

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning mouth based on the total number of winning game balls to each winning mouth, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning mouth. Let The number of winning balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls to be paid out by one winning with respect to the winning opening and the number of winning times to the winning opening. The number of winning balls for winning game balls is
It is determined in advance for each winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 52, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth divided here is the general winning mouth winning ball (first
General winning award to the 4th general winning award (sode) winning ball), the first starting winning award ball (first
This is the number of winning balls for the starting prize opening (heso), ordinary electric award ball (awarding ball for electric Chu), special electric award ball (awarding ball for attacker) . RAM 10
2 also stores the total number of winning balls. The CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting opening, but the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the first starting opening are counted. The number of winning game balls to may be summed up. In addition, although the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first start mouth prize ball are calculated separately, May be calculated together.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls. The ring buffer includes 10 first storage areas to 10th storage areas, each of which has a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). The active buffer also includes a 0th storage area composed of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth that increases as the game progresses is added. 0th
Eleven storage areas from the storage area to the tenth storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total for each winning opening. The storage area for the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter with a maximum of 3 bytes.
Data of 56 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin.

In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a role combination (relation ratio) role storage area for storing role ratios and role combinations (ream ratios) of 10 sets and totals. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the ratios of the ten sets and the total cumulative and the combination of the totals (running ratio) based on the number of winning balls based on the number of game balls won in each of the ten sets and the total cumulative winning holes. 10 sets and total accumulated role ratios and role combinations (ream ratios) are stored in a role combination (ream ratio) role storage area. Each of the 10 sets and the total accumulated role ratios and role combinations (ream ratios) are stored in counters of up to 1 byte. For example, in the case of storing the set ratio and the combined run (run ratio) of 10 sets and the total cumulative number as an integer, the counter can be stored with a margin with a maximum of 1 byte.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 includes the above-described built-in register,
A memory space for accessing the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like is provided. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 53, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is
16 of 0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number; the same applies hereinafter) in the memory space.
Allocated to the built-in ROM area in the K-byte area. The CPU 103 performs various control processes in the built-in ROM area.

The address / data signal lines of the built-in registers are FE00H to F in the memory space.
Allocated to the built-in register area of the EBFH. The CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and writes data to the register through the built-in register area.

Further, the address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are F000H to FF in the memory space.
It is assigned to the 3FFH RWM area (built-in RAM area). The CPU 103 designates the RWM area and reads data from the RAM 102 or writes data to the RAM 102. Note that other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFF in this embodiment)
FH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are non-use areas.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, a use area program area, a use area data area, a non-use area program area, and a non-use area data area are allocated to the built-in ROM area. A free area is allocated between the use area program area and the use area data area. Similarly, free areas are also allocated between the use area data area and the non-use area program area, and between the non-use area program area and the non-use area data area. The CPU 103 designates this built-in ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101.

Among these, the use area program area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The game-related program data relating to the progress of is stored. The game-related programs stored in the use area program area include a game control program that is a program for controlling a game, and a special symbol display output program that is a program for displaying a special figure, a general figure, etc. Yes.
These game control programs and special symbol display output programs are stored in the use area program area. The game control program is a program related to the progress of the game,
This is a program that performs control related to the progress of the game, such as a lottery lottery program for lottery with respect to the transition to the big hit game state.

The non-use area program area is composed of the CPU 103's combination data (operating ratio), instruction data (opcode) for calculating the combination ratio, and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data of the association (relation ratio) and the program for calculating and displaying the association ratio (hereinafter also referred to as the association (interaction ratio) association ratio related program) are stored. The role-related (relationship) ratio-related programs include a role-relationship (relationship) ratio calculation program for calculating the role-relationship (relationship ratio) and ratio, and a monitor that displays the role-relationship (relation ratio) and ratio. 29, a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio display output program is displayed. In the non-use area program area, a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio calculation program and a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio display output program are stored. The combination (relation ratio) combination calculation program is a program different from the progress of the game.

Here, the use area program area and the non-use area program area will be further described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a configuration of a use area program area and a non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area. As shown in FIG. 55, in the use area program area, “switch input process”, “digit output process 1”, “jump process to non-use area (digit output process 2)”, “error detection process” as game related programs. "Random number update process""Special figure process""Common figure process""Information output process""Prize ball process""Test terminal process""Solenoidprocess""Memory display process""Error notification process" Each program of “jump processing to ratio calculation processing” is stored. In the unused program area,
Respective ratios) “digit output process 2”, “jump process to use area (error detection process)”, and “ratio calculation process” are stored. In the CPU 103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common and executed in one interrupt process. In the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2, the first special symbol display device 4A is activated by dynamic lighting.
LED in second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display 20, and display monitor 29
Is displayed. However, static lighting may be used instead of dynamic lighting.

Among these processes, the program that performs “digit output process 1” corresponds to a special symbol display output program, and the program that performs “digit output process 2” corresponds to a combination (ratio) ratio display output program. . In addition, from “error detection processing” to “error notification processing” (hereinafter,
It is also called “game progress control process”. ) Corresponds to the game control program, and the program for performing the “role ratio calculation process” corresponds to the role (ratio) role ratio calculation program. In the role association (relation ratio) ratio calculation program, the role association (relation ratio) and the role ratio are calculated, and the display pattern when displaying the calculated role association (relation ratio) and the role ratio on the display monitor 29, in other words, When,
The light emission patterns of the plurality of LEDs (first segment SG1 to seventh segment SG7 and dot SG8 shown in FIG. 67) in the display monitor 29 are determined.

In the use area data area, reference data (for example, the above-described various lottery data) referred to by the control program stored in the use program area is stored. In addition, in the non-use area data area, data used for displaying a combination (connection ratio) and a combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the non-use area data area is provided with a storage area for storing the total cumulative number of winning balls for each winning opening and a total cumulative combination (relation ratio) ratio storage area. The non-use area data area includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a first storage area to a first storage area.
A ring buffer having 0 storage area, a storage area for the total number of winning balls (for 10 sets) for each winning opening, and a 10-set consecutive (relation ratio) role ratio storage area are provided.

In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-described data (command data, supplemental data, reference data) is stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), RA corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area.
In the storage area of M102, each byte is divided and stored.

In addition, there are a use area program area in which a special symbol display output program and a game control program are stored in the built-in ROM area of the CPU 103, a role combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program, and a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio calculation program. Different upper addresses (head addresses) are set in the stored unused area program areas.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56, the upper address of the subroutine in the use area program area in which the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored is “00”.
It is. The high-order address of the subroutine in the non-use area program area in which the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program and the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program are stored is “01”.
It is said that. Thus, the upper address of the program stored in the non-use area program area is different from the upper address of the program stored in the use area program area.

“CALLF” and “CALLmn” are used for the programs stored in the use area program area as calling instructions for these programs. For the program stored in the non-use area program area, only “CALLmn” is used, and “CALLF” is not used. The special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area program area are “CALLF” or “
Called with “CALLmn”, but here called with “CALLF”. In addition, it is possible to display a combination display (Ratio) combination display output program stored in the non-use area program area and a combination (
The ratio calculation program is called by “CALLmn” and is not called by “CALLF”. When these call instructions are compared, “CALLF” is “CALL”.
Compared with “mn”, it is a call instruction with a short tone and light capacity.

The CPU 103 includes a Q register. The Q register is a dedicated register for storing the upper address in the built-in ROM area as a fixed value. By providing the Q register, it is possible to call a program without the upper address. A fixed value corresponding to the upper address is set in the Q register. For example, when calling a program stored in the use area program area, a fixed value “00” is set, and when calling a program stored in the non-use area program area, a fixed value “01” is set. The As described above, the Q register may set a fixed value at the upper address of the non-use area program area after executing a program in the non-use area program area after setting a fixed value at the upper address of the use area program area. Is possible.

Next, the program execution order in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 will be described. In principle, the CPU 103 executes the programs in the order of addresses. Therefore, referring to FIG. 55, when executing the program, the CPU 103 first executes “switch input processing” in the use area program area, and then performs “digit output processing 1” corresponding to the special symbol display output program. Run. When interrupt processing is started, a fixed value “00” is set in the Q register. In “digit output processing 1”, the CPU 103
A process of outputting the digit signal for the special symbol or the general symbol obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20 or the like is executed.

After executing “digit output process 1”, the CPU 103 jumps from the use area program area to the non-use area program area and executes “digit output process 2” corresponding to the combination (relationship) ratio display output program. . When jumping from the use area program area to the non-use area program area, a fixed value “01” is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal regarding the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination ratio obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 29. Therefore, “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” are executed in succession.

After performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 jumps from the non-use area program area to the use area program area and performs a process according to the game control program. When jumping from the non-use area program area to the use area program area, a fixed value “00” is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In the process according to the game control program, the CPU 103 performs “error detection process”, “random number update process”, “special chart process”, “general map process”, “information output process”, “prize ball process”, “test terminal process”, “solenoid process”. The “memory display process” and the “error notification process” are sequentially executed. The CPU 103 generates a digit signal for a special drawing, a general drawing, or the like by processing according to these game control programs.

When the CPU 103 executes the “error notification process” and completes the process corresponding to the third program, the CPU 103 jumps from the use area program to the non-use area program, The ratio calculation process ”is executed. CPU 103 performs “ratio calculation processing”
In this way, the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio are calculated, and digit signals for the combination (reconnection ratio) and combination ratio are generated. Thus, the interrupt process in the CPU 103 is completed.

As described above, the CPU 103 executes “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” in one interrupt process, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B,
The display of the special figure and the common figure on the normal symbol display 20 and the display of the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio on the display monitor 29 are executed.

Next, the configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing another configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area. In this example, FIG.
7, the use area program area includes “switch input process”, “error detection process”, “random number update process”, “special chart process”, “general map process”, “information output process”, “prize ball process”, “test” Terminal processing, Solenoid processing, Memory display processing, Error notification processing, Digit output processing 1
"Are stored. In the unused program area, “digit output process 2” and “ratio calculation process” programs are stored.

Next, the program execution order in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 in this example will be described. Referring to FIG. 57, when executing the program, the CPU 103 first executes “switch input processing” in the use area program area,
Processing according to the third program is performed. In the process according to the game control program, the CPU 103 performs “error detection process”, “random number update process”, “special figure process”, “common figure process”, and “information output process”.
“Prize ball processing” “Test terminal processing” “Solenoid processing” “Memory display processing” “Error notification processing”
Are executed sequentially. The CPU 103 generates a digit signal for a special drawing, a general drawing, or the like by processing according to these game control programs.

CPU 130 then continues to “digit output process 1” according to the special symbol display output program.
Execute. In the “digit output process 1”, the CPU 103 uses the first special symbol display device 4 </ b> A, the second special symbol display device 4 </ b> B, and the normal symbol display device 20 to display the digit signal for the special symbol or ordinary diagram obtained in the previous routine. Execute the process to output to. However, a digit signal for a special figure or ordinary figure obtained in this routine may be output.

Then, the CPU 103 shifts to the non-use area program area as it is, and executes “digit output processing 2” corresponding to the combination (continuation ratio) combination ratio display output program. CPU103
In the digit output process 2, a process of outputting a digit signal about the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 29 is executed. Therefore, “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” are executed in succession.

After that, when the digit output process 2 is performed, the CPU 103 executes a “role calculation process” in accordance with the role (run ratio) role ratio calculation program. The CPU 103 calculates the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio by the “computation ratio calculation process”, and generates a digit signal regarding the combination (interconnection ratio), the combination ratio, and the like. Thus, the interrupt process in the CPU 103 is completed.

As described above, the CPU 103 executes “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” in one interrupt process, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B,
The display of the special figure and the common figure on the normal symbol display 20 and the display of the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio on the display monitor 29 are executed.

For example, regarding the configurations of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area, the configuration shown in FIG. 55 is the area configuration pattern A, and the configuration shown in FIG. The configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 55 except for the jump processing between the use area program area and the non-use area program area. C.

In this case, in the area configuration pattern A, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), in one cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 103, a special symbol display output program → combined (combined) role display display program → game control program → The process is executed in the order of the combination (ream) combination ratio calculation program. In the area configuration pattern B, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), in the interrupt processing in the CPU 103, a game control program → special symbol display output program → competition (combined ratio) ratio display output program → combined ( The processing is executed in the order of the connection ratio calculation program.
Further, in the area configuration pattern C, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), a special symbol display output program → game control program → community (combined ratio) ratio display output program → complex (combined ratio) ratio calculation program Processing is executed in the order of. In the following, the interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (A) is referred to as a first interrupt process, the interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (B) is referred to as a second interrupt process, and the interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (C) is shown. The process is referred to as a third interrupt process.

Next, a description will be given of the control (display ratio) and control for displaying the ratio of the main board 11 to the display monitor 29. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items related to the role combination (ream ratio) and the role ratio. FIG. 59A is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the display monitor. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), when the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term combination (connection ratio) of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term combination (run ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term service group (run ratio) of the display No. 1, FIG.
B-1), the letter “y” is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the second display portion 29B is displayed.
The character “6.” is displayed. Further, the short-term combination (continuity ratio) is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term service group (run ratio) is 41%, the third display unit 2
The characters “4.” are displayed on 9C, and the characters “1.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

When the display of display No1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. Display N
The display of o2 short-term roles (running ratio) is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-2), the letter “y” is displayed on the first display section 29A, and the letter “7.” is displayed on the second display section 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29
In D, the short-term role ratio is displayed. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “3.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination (connection ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total accumulated combination series (run ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination (run ratio) of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-3), the letter “A” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and “6” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. . "Is displayed. The third display unit 2
9C and the fourth display unit 29D display the total cumulative combination (running ratio). For example, when the total cumulative combination (run ratio) is 58%, the characters “5.” are displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the fourth display unit 2
The characters “8.” are displayed on 9D.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative roles of display No. 4,
As shown in FIG. 59 (B-4), the character “A” is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character “7.” is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Also, the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D
Displays the total cumulative ratio. For example, if the total cumulative ratio is 68%, the third display unit 29C
The character “6.” is displayed on the screen, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

When the display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-5), the display No. 1
The short-term service group (run ratio) is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the short-term combination (connection ratio) of display No1 to the total cumulative combination of display No4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. In addition, as for the display color, only the short-term combination of the display No1 (run ratio) is green, and the short-term combination of the display No2 to the total cumulative combination of the display No4 is red. As described above, the display monitor 29 switches the short-term combination (ream), the short-term combination, the total accumulated combination (ream), and the total accumulated combination every 30 seconds.

Further, the content displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the above content and can be determined as appropriate. For example, in the above example, characters such as “y” and “A” are displayed on the first display unit 29A, and numerical values are displayed on the second display unit 29B to the fourth display unit 29D.
Characters are displayed on the display unit 29B, and the first display unit 29A, the third display unit 29C, and the fourth display unit 2 are displayed.
Numerical values may be displayed on 9D.

In addition, numerical values may be displayed on all of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D, and a predetermined ratio, division, and the like may be indicated only by the numerical values. Or 2 of the 1st display part 29A-the 4th display part 29D
Characters may be displayed in places, and numerical values may be displayed in the other two places. Alternatively, a numerical range of characters may be set so that only the characters are displayed on the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D. For example, “0” to “30” may be displayed as “P”, “31” to “60” as “Q”, and “61” to “100” as “R”. The characters to be displayed are not limited to English characters, but may be hiragana, katakana, kanji, or the like. Further, not a character but a symbol having no meaning may be displayed.

Further, when displaying numerical values or the like on the display monitor 29, the display may be performed by changing the color or display mode according to the displayed numerical values. For example, when displaying the role ratio,
When the displayed role ratio is less than the specified value, it is displayed in “blue”, and when it exceeds the specified value, “red” is displayed.
You may make it display with. Further, when the displayed role ratio is less than or equal to a predetermined value, it may be lit and displayed when it exceeds the predetermined value. In blinking display, the first
Any display among the display units 29A to 29D may be blinked. For example, the entirety of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D may be blinked, two of the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, or the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. These two may be blinked. About the display part which is not blinking, it may be made to light and may be made to light-extinguish.

On the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the sum and total of 10 sets is updated, and the storage of the combination (relation ratio) role ratio storage area for storing the ratio of 10 sets and the total of the total accumulation and the combination (relation ratio) is updated respectively. .

For updates in the active buffer and ring buffer, the 0th of the active buffer
The numerical value stored in the storage area is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, the number of winning balls of the general winning opening in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36”, respectively.
It is assumed that “225” “87” “66” “117” “45” “21”. At this time,
When the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is “27”, “81”, “1”, respectively.
20 ”,“ 36 ”,“ 225 ”,“ 87 ”,“ 66 ”,“ 117 ”,“ 45 ”, and“ 21 ”. Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

When the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the number of prize balls stored may be temporarily deleted and a new number of prize balls may be stored. Or you may memorize | store a new number of prize balls in the form overwritten on the number of prize balls stored.

Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 shown in FIG. 49 includes a door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a. Opening the glass door frame 3a does not correspond to an abnormality when performed by an employee, but often corresponds to an abnormality when performed by a person other than the employee. For this reason, in this embodiment, the door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a is used as the abnormality detection sensor group 2.
6 The door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 11 when detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a.

The door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 3a by an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a by a person other than the employee. Here, detection of door opening is performed assuming abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a. Further, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 3a and the glass door frame 3a is opened normally, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes the opening of the glass door frame 3a. Because there are many, special problems can be avoided.

Next, the control related to the display of the combination (relation ratio) and the combination performed on the main board 11 will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 102 are cleared. For this reason, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the combination (relation ratio) and the combination stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 102 is maintained without being cleared. The RAM10
The data used for displaying the combination (connection ratio) and the combination stored in the non-use area 2 and other areas is cleared by operating the clear switch. Also, register setting of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. After initial setting, the CPU 10
3 can execute timer interrupt processing periodically. The role association (ream ratio) and role ratio related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing. In addition, among the association (association) / association-related processing, the association (association) association ratio display output program is executed in the display switching control process (step S209 in FIG. 64), and the association ( The ratio ratio calculation program is executed. The role ratio calculation processing in the role association (ream ratio) role ratio calculation program includes other processes for calculating the role association (ream ratio) and the role ratio. However, in the ratio calculation process, the calculation of the combination (link ratio) and ratio is performed, and a program corresponding to the other processes in the combination (link ratio) ratio calculation program may be prepared separately. Good.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a combination (relation ratio) / ratio related process. Main board 1
1, as shown in FIG. 61, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected in the combination (relationship) / combination-related processing (step S <b> 101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

As a result, when a clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S101; YES), warning display preparation is performed (step S102), and step S102 is performed.
Proceed to 103. If no clear switch operation signal is transmitted and no abnormal operation is detected (step S101; NO), winning information is acquired (step S103).
As for the winning information, a game ball is detected by any of the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D. Obtained by.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within business hours (step S104). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured by the RTC 106 and determined. As a result, when the current time is within business hours (step S104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105). Whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105; YES), the game ball wins the predetermined number of balls or more per unit time. It is determined whether or not (step S106). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a normal game cannot be won. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls that can be fired is 100 per minute, for example, 100 balls can be appropriately determined as an upper limit per minute. More specifically, when the unit time is 1 second, the predetermined number of balls is 5
When the unit time is 10 seconds, the predetermined number is 30 or the like. Unit time is R
It is measured by TC106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

As a result, if the game balls have not won more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time (
In step S106; NO), a winning ball number addition process is performed to add the number of winning balls according to the winning information acquired in step S103 (step S107). The award ball number adding process is performed when warning display preparation is not performed. Here, when warning display preparation is performed, the combination (relation ratio) / ratio related processing is ended as it is. In the award ball number addition process, the 0th number shown in FIG.
General winning entrance (sode), general winning entrance (heso), ordinary electric role award ball (electric chew) in memory area
, The number of each special electoral award (attacker) award ball is added.

In addition, in the prize ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), the general winning opening (heso), the ordinary electric winning ball (electric chew), and the special electric winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. The total number of prize balls for each of the prize balls is calculated. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move. Also,
The numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. Further, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is deleted.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has expired (calculation timer = 0) (step S108). As a result, when the calculation timer has not expired (step S108)
; NO), the role association (ream ratio) / ratio related processing is terminated as it is. If the calculation timer is up (step S108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S109).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (the prize ball total) obtained by addition in step S107 is the number of calculation executions (step S110). The calculation execution number can be an appropriate number, for example, a reference for moving numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the first storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. A total of 600 prize balls
The number may be slightly less than 0, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the calculation execution number is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum payout ball number from 6000.

As a result, when the number of winning balls (the winning ball total) is not the calculated execution number (step S11)
0: NO), the combination process (comparison ratio) / composition ratio related process is terminated. When the number of winning balls is the number of executions for calculation (step S110; YES), a combination of consecutive (continuous ratio) and a combined ratio is calculated (step S111). Here, short-term officers (running ratio), short-term roles, cumulative officers (running ratio) (
Calculate the total cumulative roles (total ratio)) and cumulative ratios (total cumulative ratio). For this reason, the short-term service group (run ratio), the short-term role ratio, the cumulative service group (run ratio), and the cumulative role ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, preparations for displaying the combination (relation ratio) / ratio are performed (step S112), and the processing related to the combination (relation ratio) / ratio ends.

If it is determined in step S104 that it is not within business hours (step S104; NO)
), When it is determined in step S105 that the door frame is not closed (step S105; NO)
In step S106, when it is determined that a predetermined number or more of game balls are won by the attacker per unit time (step S106; YES), preparation for abnormal count error display is performed (step S113).

Next, a role combination (ream ratio) / ratio display control process will be described. Fig. 62 shows the roles (running ratio)
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a ratio display control process. As shown in FIG. 62, in the combination (relation) / ratio display control process, it is determined whether preparation for the combination (relation) / ratio display has been completed (step S201). If it is determined that the combination (continuation ratio) / ratio display preparation processing has not been completed (step S201; NO), it is determined whether or not preparation for displaying an abnormal count error has been completed (step S202).

As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal count error display preparation is completed (step S20)
2; YES), an abnormal count error display is performed (step S203). Abnormal count error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, “E” and “R” are displayed in the upper 2 digits of the display monitor 29.
”And“ 0 ”and“ 1 ”can be displayed in the lower two digits. When performing an abnormal count error display, other display devices such as the image display device 5 and the first special symbol display device 4A
A predetermined abnormal count error display may be performed on the second special symbol display device 4B or the like, or the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Or speaker 8L,
A predetermined warning sound may be generated from 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of a gaming machine provided on the main board 11. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

When the abnormal count error display is performed, the role combination (ream ratio) / ratio display control processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S202 that it is not determined whether or not the abnormal count error display preparation is completed (step S202; NO), it is determined whether or not warning display preparation is completed (step S204).

As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S204; YES), a warning display is performed (step S205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29 and “0” and “6” can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 29 may be blinked or displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 29 in order to indicate that a warning is being given. Or you may display by raising the brightness of the display of the display monitor 29. FIG. In this way, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays. In addition, after performing an abnormal count error display, the process may proceed to determination (step S204) as to whether or not warning preparation has been completed. Here, when it is determined that warning preparation has been completed (step S204; YES), an abnormal count error display and a warning display are performed. In order to perform the abnormal count error display and the warning display on the display monitor 29, for example, the abnormal count error display and the warning display may be repeated for several seconds, for example, at intervals of 5 seconds. Moreover, you may display by another display method.

In addition, when a warning is displayed, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device such as the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. The effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, speakers 8L and 8
A predetermined warning sound may be generated from R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of a gaming machine provided on the main board 11. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

When the warning is displayed, the combination (relation ratio) / ratio control process is terminated. Step S20
If it is determined in 4 that the warning display preparation has not been completed (step S204; NO), the combination (continuity ratio) / ratio control processing is also terminated.

In addition, when it is determined that preparations for role combinations (relation ratios) and role ratios have been completed (step S201;
YES), a display restriction confirmation process is performed (step S206). In the display restriction confirmation process,
A process of determining whether or not to limit the display of the role combination (ream ratio) and the role ratio is executed. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the display restriction confirmation process.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the display restriction confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not a door opening error is detected (step S301). The door opening required error is an error that requires opening the gaming machine frame 3 forward from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. Except for the abnormal count error, errors that occur in the gaming machine 1 include various errors shown in FIG. 65, for example. Each of these errors will be briefly described.

Error 1: Magnet error A magnet error (magnetic error) is an error caused by detecting a magnetic abnormality. When a magnet error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The magnet error is canceled by turning off the power switch. Also,
The security information is output until the power switch is turned off.
Error 2: Prize ball abnormality error The prize ball abnormality error is an error due to detection of a predetermined number, for example, 2000 or more abnormal prize balls. An abnormal prize ball is, for example, a prize ball that is paid out when a game ball is won beyond the number of counts of the big prize opening. The prize ball abnormality error is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 3: Prize ball error The prize ball error is an error that occurs when a prize ball is not paid out while detecting the winning of a game ball to the prize opening. The prize ball error is an error that occurs when a payout switch abnormality is detected or when a payout case abnormality is detected. The prize ball error is canceled by eliminating the generated error, such as by canceling the error.
Error 4: Out-of-ball error The out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when the out-of-ball is detected and the game ball to be paid out is not on the back side of the game board 2 when the winning of the game ball into the winning opening is detected. The ball-out error is an error that is canceled when the supply of the game ball is started.
Error 5: Radio wave error error The radio wave error is an error due to detection of a radio wave error. Radio wave error is
This error is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 6: Main board communication failure error The main board communication failure error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 11 and the payout control board. The main board communication failure error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 11 and the payout control board is recovered.
Error 7: Card unit error The card unit error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 11 and the card unit. The card unit error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 11 and the card unit is recovered.
Error 8: Full tank error The full tank error is an error that occurs when the tray (upper or lower tray) from which the game balls are paid out becomes full and the game balls cannot be paid out. The full tank error is canceled when the game ball is removed from the tray from which the game ball is paid out and is not in a full state.
Error 9: first-time-start-of-function error The first-time-start-up error of an accessory is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected when the accessory is activated for the first time. The first-time startup error of the accessory is canceled by pressing the operation button 30.
Error 10: Unauthorized Winning Error Unauthorized winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball enters a large winning opening other than in operation. In the gaming machine 1, the special prize winning device is only the special variable winning ball device 7, so that an illegal winning error is not detected, and is an error that occurs in a gaming machine having two or more big winning prizes.
When an illegal winning error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The illegal winning error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 3 minutes has elapsed since the output of the security information.
Error 11: RTC-SRAM error An RTC-SRAM error is an error that occurs when an RTC error is detected when a power switch is turned on, or when a backup failure is detected. The RTC-SRAM abnormality error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds elapses from the occurrence.
Error 12: RAM clear error The RAM clear error is an error that results in a cold start when the power is turned on.
When a RAM clear error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The time for which the security information is output is, for example, 30 seconds. The RAM clear error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 31 seconds has elapsed since the occurrence.
Error 13: Vibration detection device abnormality error The vibration detection device abnormality error is an error that is detected when vibration occurs in the gaming machine.
The vibration detection device abnormality error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds has elapsed since the occurrence.
Error 14: Door opening error The door opening error is an error that occurs when the glass door frame 3a is opened from the gaming machine frame 3 or when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. The door opening error is canceled when the opened glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 is closed.

Among these errors, errors 1 to 7 are door opening required errors that require opening the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to cancel the errors. On the other hand, error 8 to error 13 are errors that do not require opening of the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error, and are not door opening required errors. Since the error 14 is a door opening error, the gaming machine frame 3
It is an unnecessary error to determine whether it is necessary to release the.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 63, it is determined whether or not an error requiring opening of the door has been detected, in other words, whether any of the errors requiring opening of the door from error 1 to error 7 has been detected (step S3).
01). When the door opening required error is detected (step S301; YES), it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S302).

Here, when the door opening required error flag is not set (step S302; N
O), a door opening required error flag is set (step S303). If the door opening required error flag is set (step S302; YES), step S30 is performed as it is.
Proceed to 4.

Next, it is determined whether or not a measurement timer is set (step S304). The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time during which the restriction on the combination (relation ratio) ratio display is continued after the door opening error is canceled. The measurement timer is a timer that measures time in a set state, and is a timer that does not measure time in a reset state.

The time for which the restriction of the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio display after the door opening required error is released can be, for example, a time required for releasing the door opening required error or a time longer than that time. Specifically, it may be 1 minute or 2 minutes, or 5 minutes or 10 minutes. Moreover, it is good also as long time of 30 minutes or more. Further, the time required for releasing the door opening required error may be uniform or set according to the type of the door opening required error. For example, errors 1, 2, 5, etc. that are cleared by turning off the power switch shorten the time required to clear the door opening error, and error 3 prize ball error that needs to be resolved May increase the time required to cancel the door opening error.

If it is determined in step S304 that the measurement timer is set (step S304; YES), the measurement timer is reset (step S305). If it is determined that the measurement timer is not set (step S304; NO), the process directly proceeds to step S306. The state in which the measurement timer is set when the door opening required error is detected is a state in which the door opening required error occurs again after the door opening required error is once reset. For this reason, by resetting the measurement timer in step S305, if the door opening required error is detected again during the time measurement by the measurement timer, the door opening required error detected later is released. Time can be measured with a measurement timer.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S30).
6). As a result, when the door required error flag is set (step S306; Y
ES), a combination (relation ratio) combination ratio display restriction is executed (step S307), and the display restriction confirmation process is terminated. Further, when the door opening required error flag is not set (step S30).
6; NO), the display restriction confirmation process is terminated as it is. As the combination (relation ratio) ratio display restriction, for example, the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio is stopped.

If it is determined in step S301 that the door opening required error is not detected (step S301; NO), it is determined whether the door opening required error flag is set (step S308). As a result, when it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S308; NO), the process proceeds to step S306.

If it is determined in step S308 that the door opening required error flag is set (step S308; YES), the door opening required error is once detected and then the door opening required error is released. (Step S309). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a measurement timer is set (step S310).

When the measurement timer is not set (step S310; NO), it is immediately after the door opening error is canceled. In other words, this flow is in a state that flows only after the door opening error is canceled. At this time, the measurement time t (measurement timer = t) is set in the measurement timer (step S311). The measurement time t corresponds to the time for which the restriction of the combination (ream) ratio display is continued after the door opening error is canceled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is up (t = 0) (step S).
312). If the measurement timer is set in step S310 (step S3
10; YES), it is determined whether or not the measurement timer has expired (t = 0) (step S312).

In the case of passing through step S311, the measurement timer is not 0 (time is not up) (step S312; NO), and the process proceeds to step S306 as it is. After the measurement timer is set, it is determined in step S310 that the measurement timer is set (step S310; YES). In this case, the measurement time decreases with the flow loop, and when the time t elapses after the measurement timer is set, it is determined that the measurement timer is up.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is up (t = 0) (step S).
312). Here, when the measurement timer is up (step S312; YES)
), The measurement timer and the door opening required error flag are cleared (step S313). If the measurement timer has not expired (step S312; NO), the process proceeds to step S306 without clearing the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag.

If the process does not go through step S313, the door opening required error flag is not cleared, and therefore it is determined in step S306 that the door opening required error flag is set (
Step S306: YES). Therefore, the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio display restriction is executed. Further, when the process passes through step S313, the door opening required error flag is cleared, and therefore it is determined in step S306 that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S306; NO). Therefore, the combination display (relation ratio) combination display restriction is not executed. In this way, in the display restriction confirmation process, it is determined whether or not to execute the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio display restriction. In summary, in the display restriction confirmation process, the detection time (= time for continuing the restriction of the combination (relation) ratio display) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening required error and the release of the door opening required error. During this time, the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio is limited, and the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio is not limited at other times.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 62, based on the determination made in the display restriction confirmation processing shown in step S206, it is determined whether or not display restriction is to be executed (step S207). as a result,
When executing display restriction (step S207; YES), display restriction is executed (step S207).
208), the display of the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio is limited. Then, the role combination (ream ratio) / ratio display control process is terminated.

If the display restriction is not executed (step S207; NO), the display switching control process is executed (step S209), and the combination (continuation ratio) / ratio display control process is terminated. The display switching control process is executed according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the display switching control process. As shown in FIG. 64, in the display switching control process, first, the display monitor 2
In step S401, it is determined whether or not a short-term combination (running ratio) display is performed in step 9 (step S401). When the short-term combination (relation ratio) display is performed (step S401; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term combination (relation ratio) display. (Step S4
02). The predetermined time here can be set to any time, for example, 30 seconds (30000 ms)
It can be. The predetermined time may be a time shorter than 30 seconds such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, or may be a time longer than 30 seconds such as 1 minute (60 seconds) or 10 minutes (600 seconds).

If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S402; NO),
The display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term combination (continuous ratio) display continues. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S402; YES)
), Short-term role ratio display control is performed (step S403), and the display switching control process is terminated.
In the short-term role ratio display control, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the short-term role ratio display is started is set.

If it is determined in step S401 that the short-term combination display (continuation ratio) is not displayed (step S401; NO), it is determined whether the short-term combination display is performed (step S404). . If the short-term role ratio display is being performed (step S404; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term role ratio display (step S405).

If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S405; NO),
The display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term role ratio display continues. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S404; YES),
Cumulative combination (running ratio) display control is performed (step S406), and the display switching control process is terminated.
In the cumulative combination display (relation ratio) display control, the cumulative combination display (connection ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the start of the cumulative combination display (relation ratio) display is set. .

When it is determined in step S404 that the short-term role ratio display is not performed (step S404; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative role display (continuous ratio) display is performed (step S407). . In the case where the cumulative combination display (connection ratio) is displayed (step S407; YE)
In S), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the cumulative combination (running ratio) display (step S408).

Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S408; NO),
The display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination display (continuous ratio) display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S408; YES)
), The cumulative ratio display control is performed (step S409), and the display switching control process is terminated.
In the cumulative ratio display control, the cumulative ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the cumulative ratio display is started is set.

If it is determined in step S407 that the cumulative combination display (connection ratio) is not displayed (step S407; NO), it is determined whether the cumulative combination display is performed (step S410). . If the cumulative role display is being performed (step S410; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the cumulative role display (step S411).

If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S411; NO),
The display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination display (continuous ratio) display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S411; YES)
), Short-term combination (running ratio) display control is performed (step S412), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term service group (run ratio) display control, the short-term service group (run ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the start of the short-term service group (run ratio) display is set. . Thus, the display switching control process ends.

In the short-term role ratio display control in the above step S403, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed. Similarly, the cumulative combination display (interaction ratio) display control in step S406, the cumulative combination display display control in step S409, and the short-term combination (step S412)
Also in the display ratio control, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed.

In the above gaming machine 1, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared,
The digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are executed in one cycle of the interrupt process in the CPU 103. One cycle of the interrupt process in the CPU 103 is about 4 ms, and the time required for the game progress control process (game control program) is, for example, about 2 ms.

FIG. 66A is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor and the like, and FIG. 66B is the signal flow when the first interrupt process is executed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between display states, such as a monitor. Here, in the first cycle, a symbol (character) corresponding to “0” and “y” is displayed on the display monitor 29 (SEG2) on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1), and in the second cycle, the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1). Assume that the symbol (character) corresponding to “1” on the symbol display device 4A and “6.” on the display monitor 29 is to be displayed.

In the third interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (C), a game progress process (a special symbol display output program) and a digit output process 2 (combined (combined) ratio display output program) A game control program is executed. For this reason, a difference of about 2 ms occurs between the digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output processing 2 (combined (combined) role ratio display output program), as shown in FIG. 66 (A). Thus, there is a delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first cycle, the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1) clearly has “0”.
However, the display monitor 29 (SEG2) has a display failure. The trouble about the example which tried to display the character corresponding to “y” on the display monitor 29
Specifically: First display unit 29A to fourth display unit 2 in display monitor 29
9D shows 8 LEDs arranged in 7 segments and the lower right dot as shown in FIG.
It has. If these LEDs are a first segment SG1, a second segment SG2, a third segment SG3, a fourth segment SG4, a fifth segment SG5, a sixth segment SG6, a seventh segment SG7, and a dot SG8, the second segment SG2, the second segment SG2, 3 segment SG3, 4th segment SG4, 6th segment SG6, 7th segment SG
7 is a thin display. This defect occurs because, for example, control that does not turn on the display monitor 29 in the period before the first period has penetrated to the first period. For the characters corresponding to “6.” displayed in the second period, the second segment SG2, the fourth segment SG4, the sixth segment SG6, and the seventh segment SG7 are clearly displayed. SG1, 5th Seg
G5 and dot SG8 are thinly displayed. This defect also occurs because, for example, the control that turned on the LED of the character corresponding to “y” on the display monitor 29 in the first cycle has penetrated to the second cycle.

On the other hand, in the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 66 (B), the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) is executed following the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program). . For this reason, there is almost no difference between the digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output processing 2 (community (combined ratio) ratio display output program). FIG. 66 (B) As shown in FIG. 4, there is almost no delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first period, the symbol corresponding to “0” was clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1). In addition, the characters corresponding to “y” were clearly displayed on the display monitor 29 (SEG2). Thus, in the first interrupt process, the display monitor 29
It is possible to prevent display defects on the LEDs.

Thus, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the short-term combination (ream), the short-term combination, the accumulated combination (ream), and the accumulated combination are displayed by the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11. . The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 for controlling the game so that the visibility is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to game nails (fault nails), windmills and the like provided on the game board.

The display monitor 29 is disposed on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized. For this reason, it can prevent that the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 is prevented. The main substrate 11 is
The heat dissipation holes provided in the substrate case 201 are arranged at positions that are not directly in front. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being obscured by the heat radiating holes. Therefore, the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being hindered.

The main board 11 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being obscured by the peripheral board such as the effect control board 12. Therefore, the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being hindered.

In addition, the display monitor 29 displays a combination (ratio) and a ratio regarding the relationship between a prize ball paid out by passing an electric chew or an attacker and a prize ball paid out by passing a general winning opening. can do. In addition, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term combination (ream) and a cumulative combination (ream) for each predetermined period. For this reason, there is no need to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

In addition, since the display monitor 29 displays the combination (relation ratio) (short-term combination (relation ratio)) and combination ratio (short-term combination) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6000, the total prize balls It is possible to easily recognize the numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit, for example, the number is 6000. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10,000 may be used. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

In addition, the display monitor 29 has a combination (relation ratio) (short-term combination (
)) And roles (short-term roles) as well as the cumulative roles (run ratio) and cumulative ratios. For this reason, it is possible to easily compare the short-term combination (ream ratio) or short-term combination for each predetermined unit with the accumulated combination (ream) or the accumulated combination ratio. The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 accommodated in the caulked board case. For this reason, it can contribute to prevention of fraud such as tampering with the display on the display monitor 29.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 includes a detection unit that detects and detects fraud in which appropriate predetermined information cannot be displayed. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours of the game hall, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is opened, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of prizes. Game machine 1
Are operated within the business hours of the amusement hall, and the counting of prize balls at times other than business hours is likely to be fraudulent. In addition, the gaming machine 1 plays a game with the door frame closed, and the counting of prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be an illegal act.

Further, during the game of the gaming machine 1, the game ball cannot be fired beyond a certain speed.
For example, game balls are fired at a maximum of 100 shots per minute. For this reason, the upper limit of the number of winning game balls per minute is approximately 100. So, for example, 100 per minute, or 12
If a winning of more than 20 gaming balls per second is detected, the probability that an illegal act has occurred is extremely high.

In the gaming machine 1, in order to detect fraud, when it is not within business hours, when the glass door frame 3a is not closed, a prize ball when a game ball wins a predetermined number of balls or more per unit time Eliminates the addition of numbers. Therefore, it is possible to suppress tampering of the role association (ream ratio), information on the role ratio, and the like due to these frauds. It should be noted that fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time, instead of the number of prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are won by the attacker per unit time.

In the gaming machine 1 described above, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 102 reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is deleted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from becoming insufficient in capacity.

The ring buffer is provided with the first storage area to the tenth storage area. When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area is Erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity. Further, it is possible to increase the data that remains without being erased.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the ninth storage area may be overwritten on the data in the tenth storage area. Even in this case, a lack of ring buffer capacity can be prevented.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased in the ring buffer. For this reason, since the data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity, and it is possible to calculate the combination (connection ratio) and the combination ratio with a large amount of data.

When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area but also all of the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area may be erased. Good. In this case, insufficient capacity of the ring buffer can be prevented more suitably. Further, some or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all data in the ring buffer may be erased, and thereafter, part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

In the above example, data movement in the ring buffer is described.
For data other than the ring buffer, for example, a storage area for storing the total total, a part or all of the data may be deleted.

In the gaming machine 1 described above, the data of the short-term combination (ream ratio), the short-term combination, the accumulated combination (ream), and the accumulated combination are displayed every 30 seconds. For this reason, each data can be compared easily. Note that the period for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be every hour. In addition, the data displayed are short-term executives (run ratio), short-term executives, cumulative executives (run),
It may be data other than the cumulative ratio data, or only a part of these data.

In addition, when displaying each data of short-term officers (running ratio), short-term officers ratio, cumulative officers (running ratio), and cumulative officers ratio every 30 seconds, The display is different from the data of. Specifically, the short-term service group (run ratio) is displayed in red, and the other data is displayed in green. For this reason, it is possible to recognize that new data is displayed from the short-term service group (run ratio).

In the gaming machine 1 described above, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation when the clear switch is operated. The clear switch is an emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the combination (link ratio) or the combination ratio. When this switch is operated, it is possible to tamper with the combination data (relation ratio) and the data of the combination ratio, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. Since the gaming machine 1 can warn of this abnormal operation by a warning display, fraud such as data tampering can be suppressed.

In the above gaming machine 1, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B,
Count switch 23, first general prize port switch 24A, second general prize port switch 24B
Based on the number of winning balls obtained based on the detection signals from the third general winning opening switch 24C and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio are calculated. For example, a sensor (count switch 23) provided individually for an attacker and a sensor provided after a discharge passage through which a game medium won by an attacker and a game medium won by an electric chew merge are used, Based on the result of detection, when calculating the combination (relation ratio) and ratio by counting up the counter for winning the number of winning characters and the counter for acquiring the number of consecutive winning characters, specify which winning opening is to be paid out. It is difficult to calculate the ratio and the combination (link ratio). This point, the first
Start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23, first general winning port switch 24A, second general winning port switch 24B, third general winning port switch 24C,
By detecting that the game medium has been won by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D and calculating the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result, each winning opening is obtained. The number of winning balls can be determined based on the winnings. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination ratio, and to calculate with high accuracy.

Further, when a door opening required error occurs, it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the main board 11 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 becomes visible from the outside of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is
For example, a player who is located outside the gaming machine 1 can also visually recognize.

Here, in the gaming machine 1 described above, when the door opening required error occurs, the display of the role combination (relation ratio) ratio on the display monitor 29 is limited. For this reason, even if the door opening required error occurs and the display monitor 29 becomes visible from the outside of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the role combination (relationship) ratio.

In addition, the limitation of the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio on the display monitor 29 is executed when a door opening required error occurs. For this reason, it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 due to the occurrence of the door opening required error, so that even when the player can visually recognize the display monitor 29 from the outside of the gaming machine 1, It is possible to prevent the display of the role combination (ream) ratio display.

In the gaming machine 1 described above, when the door opening required error occurs, the display of the role (relation ratio) role ratio on the display monitor 29 is executed, but after the door opening required error occurs, the game When the machine frame 3 is opened, the display of the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio on the display monitor 29 may be executed. Even after the door opening required error has occurred, when the display of the role (relation ratio) ratio on the display monitor 29 is executed when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the player is also connected to the ream (ream). Ratio) It is possible to prevent the display of the ratio display.

In addition, the limitation of display of the role (running ratio) ratio on the display monitor 29 is measured by a measurement timer for a predetermined time after the door opening required error is released, specifically, after the door opening required error is released. It is executed until the continuation time elapses. For this reason, immediately after the door opening required error is released, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, even though the door opening required error is released. At this time, a player or the like can visually recognize the display monitor 29 from the outside of the gaming machine 1. In this regard, by continuing the restriction of the role combination display until the duration time measured by the measurement timer elapses after the door opening error is canceled, It is possible to prevent the display of the role combination (ream) ratio display.

In the gaming machine 1 described above, the duration is measured after the door opening required error is released. However, after the door opening required error is released, the gaming machine frame 3 is closed and the duration is increased. You may measure. The continuation time in this case may be uniform regardless of the type of door opening required error, or may be set according to the type of door opening required error. Moreover, it is good also as time shorter than the continuation time measured after a door opening required error is cancelled | released.

The above door opening required error is an example, and other modes may be adopted. For example, if the error canceling method is different and errors 1 to 7 can be canceled without opening the gaming machine frame 3, these may be errors other than the door opening required error. Conversely, if errors 8 to 13 are errors that cannot be canceled unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, these may be door opening required errors. Also, errors other than those shown in FIG. 65, such as an error that prevents the game ball from being launched from the ball striking device, an error that makes it impossible to lend the ball, an error that causes the game board to move, etc., are released by the release procedure. An error may be required. Further, even if it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 to cancel the error, an error that is often detected outside the business hours of the amusement hall, for example, a display abnormality of the image display device 5 In the case of an error that normally requires repair outside of business hours, such as an error that becomes a check error, a ROM check screen error, or an electric chew or a big prize opening not opening, it may be treated as an error other than the door opening required error.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the display restriction mode is set to stop display, but the display limit may be set to another mode. For example, the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio may be thinned or made smaller, or the display monitor 29 may display different from the combination (relation ratio) ratio. As the display different from the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio, an error display may be displayed, for example, a display such as lighting all the segments may be used.

In the above gaming machine 1, the main board 11 and the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 are provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3, so that when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened ( Although the display of the connection ratio) role ratio is limited, other modes may be used. For example, the main board 11 may be provided on the surface of the game board 2 at a position where the glass door frame 3a is not visible from the outside of the gaming machine 1 when the glass door frame 3a is closed. In this case, the display monitor 29 is also the surface of the game board 2, and when the glass door frame 3a is closed, the glass door frame 3a
May be provided at a position where it cannot be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 1. In the gaming machine of this mode, instead of the mode of restricting the display of the role (running ratio) role ratio when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the role (when the glass door frame 3a is opened) The ratio display may be limited. In addition, regarding the continuation of the limitation of the display of the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio, etc.
Instead of opening / closing the glass door frame 3a, the glass door frame 3a may be opened / closed.

In the above gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 stores the special symbol display output program and the game control program in the use area program area in the built-in ROM area, and the combination (relationship) ratio display output program in the non-use area program area. In addition, a role combination (ream ratio) role ratio display program is stored. In this way, by storing the special symbol display output program and the game control program, the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program, and the combination (relation ratio) role display program separately in different areas, This makes it easier to test a program related to a game. In the CPU 103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common and executed in one interrupt process. For this reason, the digit output process can be simplified.

Further, when the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are continuously executed. Specifically, FIG.
As shown in (A), in the first interrupt process, a special symbol display output program → a combination (continuous ratio)
The programs are executed in the order of role display output program → game control program → community (run ratio) role calculation program. In the second interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), a game control program → a special symbol display output program → an association (relation ratio) ratio display output program → an association (relation ratio) ratio calculation program. The program is executed in the order. For this reason, in both the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, the special symbol display output program (first interrupt process) and the combination (relationship) ratio display output program (second interrupt process) A game control program (game progress control process) or a combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program (an association (relation ratio) ratio calculation process) is not sandwiched. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent delays in the digit output processing 2 and the like, there is a problem in LED display in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the display monitor 29. It is possible to prevent the pattern and characters from being displayed clearly.

When digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common, FIG.
The execution procedure of the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 or the second interrupt process shown in FIG. For example, an arbitrary program may be executed before or after the execution order of the first interrupt process or the second interrupt process.

Further, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, after executing the game control program, the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program is executed. For this reason, before the calculation of the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio, processing related to the main part of the game such as lottery for the transition to the big hit gaming state is executed. Therefore, game delay can be suppressed.

Further, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program is executed after the special symbol display output program is executed. In addition, after the special symbol display output program is executed, a specific program such as a game control program or a combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program is executed until the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program is executed. Does not run. For this reason, the malfunction of the LED display in the display monitor 29 can be prevented.

Further, the special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area are called using “CALLF” having a short tone. On the other hand, a call using “CALLmn” is made to the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program and the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program stored in the non-use area, and the tone is changed. Calls using the short “CALLF” are never made. For this reason, progress of a game can be performed smoothly.

Further, the combination (relation ratio) ratio displayed on the display monitor 29 is determined by the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation process in the non-use area. Role play (running ratio) role calculation program and role playing (running ratio)
The role display output program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game. Since “CALLmn” having a relatively long tone is used for a program that is not related to the progress of the game, waste in the processing of the program can be reduced.

In the non-use area, a call with “CALLmn” having a relatively long tone is performed. Therefore, in the use area, a call with “CALLF” having a short tone can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to use a highly versatile instruction such as “CALLF” with a short tone for a program related to game control executed in the use area.

In addition, since the CPU 103 includes a Q register and calls a program using the Q register, the program can be called without specifying an upper address. However, since the upper address is set as a fixed value, for example, even if it can be used in the use area program area, it may not be used in the non-use area program area.
There was a possibility that versatility would be lowered.

In this regard, the upper address of the use area program area in the CPU 103 is “00”, the upper address of the non-use area program area is “01”, and the upper address of the non-use area program area is the upper address of the use area program area. It is different from the address. Further, when a program stored in the use area program area is called, the Q register is set to a fixed value “00”. For this reason, since the Q register can be used when calling a program stored in the use area program area, the program stored in the use area program area can be called only by specifying a lower address. Further, since the upper address of the non-use area program area is different from the upper address of the use area program area, the program stored in the non-use area program area by the Q register is prevented from being called. When a program stored in the non-use area program area is called, the Q register is set to a fixed value “01”. Therefore, since the Q register can be used also in the non-use area program area, the Q register can be used also in the non-use area program area while ensuring the versatility of the Q register.

In the above gaming machine 1, the display monitor 29 is located at the center of the back side of the main board 11.
Although it is arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing, a display monitor may be arranged so that it can be easily seen from an oblique direction. Hereinafter, a plurality of examples will be specifically described with respect to an aspect (hereinafter referred to as “display monitor arrangement aspect”) in which the display monitor is disposed so as to be easily viewed from an oblique direction.

The first display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a first display monitor arrangement mode, the second display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a second display monitor arrangement mode, and the nth display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as an nth display monitor arrangement mode. A main substrate 11 similar to the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 51A is used in each display monitor arrangement mode, and all the main substrates 11 have the same structure. Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 51A, the main substrate 11 is accommodated in the substrate case 202. Further, in the description of the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the left and right are based on the direction when the main board 11 is viewed from the front. Therefore, the side where the gaming machine frame 3 opens from the outer frame is the left side.

[First display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode.
As shown in FIG. 68, in the first display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 1 is placed on the back surface side of the main board 11.
29A is provided, and the display monitor 130A is provided on the base member 129A.
The display monitor 130 </ b> A is housed in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129 </ b> A and the main substrate 11.

The base member 129A has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface is a right triangle, and is arranged such that the height direction thereof is along the vertical direction. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side forming the right angle portion of the right triangle on the bottom surface of the triangular prism formed by the base member 129A is overlapped with the back surface of the main substrate 11, and other sides forming the right angle portion in the right triangle are formed. A side surface of the triangular prism including one side extends in a direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main substrate 11. A side surface (hereinafter referred to as an “inclined surface”) of a triangular prism including a side facing a right-angled portion in a right triangle is arranged in an inclined direction with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 11.

The display monitor 130A is provided on the inclined surface of the base member 129A. The direction of the display monitor 130 </ b> A is arranged to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main board 11. FIG.
It is a perspective view which shows the state which the frame for game machines to which the main board | substrate was attached open | released from the outer frame. FIG. 69
As shown in FIG. 3, the display monitor 130A has an open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 3 to which the main board 11 is attached is released from the outer frame 3A. It is arranged to face the front as seen from the top.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130A arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as viewed from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when a clerk or the like conducts a confirmation work of a role ratio (relation ratio), the clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Second Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 70A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 70A, in the second display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129B is provided on the back side of the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130B is provided on the base member 129B. The display monitor 130 </ b> B is housed in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129 </ b> B and the main substrate 11.

As shown in FIG. 50, the main board 11 is a gaming board 2 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 (see FIG. 2).
It is attached to the back side. The base member 129 </ b> B has a plate shape and is erected on the back surface of the main substrate 11. The main board 11 and the base member 129B are substantially orthogonal to each other. The display monitor 130B is provided on the side surface of the base member 129B. For this reason, the display monitor 130B is arranged so that the surface on the opening portion side of the door frame in the standing portion standing on the main board 11 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 faces the opening portion of the door frame. Has been placed. Further, the display monitor 130 </ b> B is disposed at a position protruding from the back surface of the main substrate 11.

The display monitor 130 </ b> B arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode is arranged facing the direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main substrate 11 at a position protruding from the back surface of the main substrate 11.
The main board 11 is attached to the back surface of the game board 2 provided in the gaming machine frame 3.
For this reason, when a clerk or the like conducts a confirmation work of a role ratio (relation ratio), the clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

In the first and second display monitor arrangement modes, the base members 129A and 129B are accommodated in the substrate case 202, but the base members 129A and 129B may be formed so as to protrude to the outside of the substrate case 202. Good.

[Third display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 70B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 70B, in the third display monitor arrangement mode, an embedded inclined surface 11 </ b> K is formed on the back surface of the main substrate 11. The embedded inclined surface 11 </ b> K is formed to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 11.

The embedded inclined surface 11 </ b> K is formed as a part of the print base material on the main substrate 11.
A display monitor 130 </ b> C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 11 </ b> K of the main substrate 11. Since the display monitor 130C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 11K, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130C is viewed from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is arranged to face. The main board 11 and the display monitor 130 </ b> C are accommodated in the case 202.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130C arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when a clerk or the like conducts a confirmation work of a role ratio (relation ratio), the clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Fourth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 71A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 71 (A), in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 129D from the first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 are provided on the back surface of the main substrate 11. Each of the first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 is provided with a first display monitor 130D1 to a fourth display monitor 130D4. A display monitor 130D is formed by the first display monitor 130D1 to the fourth display monitor 130D4. The display monitor 130 </ b> D is accommodated in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129 and the main substrate 11.

The first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 have a common shape. This shape will be described using the first base member 129D1. The first base member 129D1 has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface is a right triangle. This first base member 12
9D1 has the same shape as the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode, but is smaller than the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode.

Specifically, the inclined surface of the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement form has a size equivalent to the size of four 7 segments and the lower right dot (see FIG. 51A). On the other hand, the inclined surface of the first base member 129D1 has a size equivalent to the size of one 7 segment and the lower right dot. On the first display monitor 130D1 provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 129D1, one 7 segment and the lower right dot can be displayed.

The first base member 129 </ b> D <b> 1 is disposed at a position slightly to the left of the substantially central position in the height direction of the back surface of the main substrate 11. The second base member 129D2 is disposed on the right side of the first base member 129D1, and the third base member 129D3 is on the right side of the second base member 129D2 opposite to the left side on which the first base member 129D1 is disposed. Is arranged. The fourth base member 129D4 is disposed on the right side opposite to the left side on which the second base member 129D2 is disposed in the third base member 129D3. Thus, the first base member 1
29D1-fourth base member 129D4 is arranged in parallel along the substantially horizontal direction.

A second display monitor 130D2 is provided on the inclined surface of the second base member 129D2. Similarly, a third display monitor 130D3 and a fourth display monitor 130D4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the third base member 129D3 and the fourth base member 129D4. On the first display monitor 130D1 provided on the first base member 129D1, contents corresponding to the first display portion 29A of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51A are displayed.

The second display monitor 130D2 provided on the second base member 129D2 has a structure shown in FIG.
The content corresponding to the second display portion 29B of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. On the third display monitor 130D3 provided on the third base member 129D3, contents corresponding to the third display portion 29C of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51A are displayed. On the fourth display monitor 130D4 provided on the fourth base member 129D4, contents corresponding to the fourth display unit 29D of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51A are displayed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130D arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as viewed from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when a clerk or the like conducts a confirmation work of a role ratio (relation ratio), the clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Fifth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 71B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 71B, in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 129E from the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are provided on the back surface of the main substrate 11. A first display monitor 130E1 to a fourth display monitor 130E4 are provided on each of the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4. A display monitor 130E is formed by the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4. The display monitor 130 </ b> E is housed in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129 and the main substrate 11.

Each of the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 has a shape common to the first base member 129D1 to the first base member 129D4 in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. The first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 are the first display monitor 130D provided on the first base member 129D1 to the first fourth base member 129D4.
Similarly to the first to fourth display monitors 130D4, the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are provided.

The first base member 129E1 is disposed above a substantially central position in the width direction on the back surface of the main substrate 11. The second base member 129E2 is disposed below the first base member 129E1, and the third base member 129E3 is disposed below the second base member 129E2. The fourth base member 129E4 is disposed below the third base member 129E3. Thus,
The first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged side by side along a substantially vertical direction. Thus, the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction.

A first display monitor 130E1 is provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 129E1. Similarly, on the inclined surfaces of the second base member 129E2, the third base member 129E3, and the fourth base member 129E4, the second display monitor 130E2 and the third display monitor 130E3.
, And a fourth display monitor 130E4 are provided. First base member 129E1
First display monitor 130E1 to fourth display monitor 1 provided on the fourth base member 129E4
30E4 includes first display portion 29A to fourth display portion 29 of display monitor 29 shown in FIG.
The contents corresponding to D are displayed. Further, since the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction, the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display member.
The display monitor 130E4 is also arranged in the vertical direction. Therefore, the first display monitor 130E1
The 4-digit display on the fourth display monitor 130E4 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130E arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as viewed from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when a clerk or the like conducts a confirmation work of a role ratio (relation ratio), the clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Sixth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 72A is a perspective view of a main board on which display monitors are arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 72A, in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129F is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 that accommodates the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130F is provided on the upper surface of the base member 129F. Yes. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130F is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130F may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

The base member 129F has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In addition, the display monitor 130F provided on the upper surface of the base member 129F includes four seven segments and a lower right dot (FIG. 51).
(See (A)). The substrate case 202 includes a substrate case main body 202A and a lid 202.
B. The base member 129F is a substrate case body 202A of the substrate case 202.
And the lid 202B are provided on the substrate case 202.

The display monitor 130F arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 and arranged along the left-right direction. For this reason, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 3 can be seen from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs a check operation of the role ratio (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role ratio (relation ratio) ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

[Seventh display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 72B, in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129G is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 that accommodates the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130G is provided on the upper surface of the base member 129G. Yes. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130G is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130G may be arranged in the horizontal direction. Similarly to the base member 129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 129G straddles the substrate case body 202A and the lid body 202B of the substrate case 202, and the substrate case 2
02.

The base member 129 </ b> G has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and the height direction of the base member 129 </ b> G is arranged along the depth direction of the gaming machine 1. A right-angle portion of a right-angled triangle that forms the bottom surface of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side that is the opposite side of the left side that is the side on which the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. Therefore, the upper surface of the base member 129G is an inclined surface that descends from the side (left side) opposite to the side (left side) where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened toward the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. A display monitor 130G is provided on the inclined surface.

The display monitor 130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 and arranged along the left-right direction. For this reason, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 3 can be seen from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs a check operation of the role ratio (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role ratio (relation ratio) ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

Further, the upper surface of the base member 129G provided with the display monitor 130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is directed from the side opposite to the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened to the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is an inclined surface that descends. For this reason, when the display monitor 130G is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the display monitor 130G can be easily viewed. Therefore, it is possible to more easily check the role combination (relation ratio) ratio.

[Eighth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 73A, in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129H is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 202 that accommodates the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130H is provided on the left side surface of the base member 129H. It has been. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130H is
They are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130H may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

The base member 129H has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Further, the display monitor 130H provided on the left side surface of the base member 129H has four seven segments and a lower right dot (FIG. 5).
1 (A)). The substrate case 202 includes a substrate case main body 202A and a lid 20.
2B. The base member 129H is formed of the substrate case body 202 of the substrate case 202.
The board case 202 is provided across the cover A and the lid 202B.

The display monitor 130 </ b> H arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 202 and is arranged along the vertical direction. For this reason, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130 is displayed from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3.
The entire H is visible. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs a check operation of the role ratio (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role ratio (relation ratio) ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

[Ninth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 73 (B), in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129I is provided on the right regular surface of the substrate case 202 that accommodates the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130I is provided on the right side surface of the base member 129I. Is provided. The base member 129I is similar to the base member 129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and the substrate case main body 202A and the lid 2 of the substrate case 202.
02B is provided on the substrate case 202 across the board.

The base member 129 </ b> I has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and the height direction of the base member 129 </ b> I is arranged along the depth direction of the gaming machine 1. The right angle portion of the right triangle that forms the bottom surface of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side. For this reason, the left side surface of the base member 129I is an inclined surface that approaches the right side as it goes downward from above. A display monitor 130I is provided on this inclined surface. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130I is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130I may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

The display monitor 130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 202 and arranged along the vertical direction. For this reason, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130 is displayed from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3.
The entire I is visible. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs a check operation of the role ratio (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role ratio (relation ratio) ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

In addition, the left side surface of the base member 129I provided with the display monitor 130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is an inclined surface that approaches the right side as it descends. For this reason, when the display monitor 130I is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the display monitor 130I can be easily viewed. Therefore, it is possible to more easily check the role combination (relation ratio) ratio.

Further, the display monitor 13 arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode.
Any of 0A to 130I may be provided in an adjustment unit that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. The adjusting means includes, for example, a fixing portion fixed to the base members 129A to 129I or the embedded inclined surface 11K, and an attachment portion that is movable with respect to the fixing portion. Any one may be attached. The adjusting means may be a manually operated type that allows a store clerk to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 3, or an electric type that operates a motor or actuator provided in the adjusting means. But you can. In the case of an electric type, a person who can operate from an office or the like via a communication device or the like may be used.

The range in which the attachment portion can be moved may be, for example, a movement range associated with movement in the up / down / left / right directions, or a movement range associated with rotational movement around an arbitrary rotation axis. Moreover, the movement range which combined the movement range accompanying these movements may be sufficient. The display monitor 130 is an adjustment unit that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame.
By providing A to 130I, it is possible to perform adjustment according to the desire of the game hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in said 1st display monitor arrangement | positioning aspect-9th display monitor arrangement | positioning aspect, although the arrangement | positioning of the display monitor was shown, respectively, you may combine these arrangement | positioning aspects. For example, the display monitor may be arranged from the upper surface of the substrate case 202 to the left side by combining the eighth display monitor arrangement mode and the ninth display monitor arrangement mode.

[A gaming machine with a blade-type variable winning ball device]
In the above example, a variable display game (special game) that performs variable display is executed, and the so-called big hit game state is controlled when the display result of variable display in the variable display game (special game) is a big hit. A digital pachislot machine was explained. On the other hand, as a so-called honey-type gaming machine in which the big hit gaming state is controlled by passing the gaming ball through a specific area (V area) provided inside the openable / closable blade-type variable winning ball apparatus. Good.
Hereinafter, an example in which the present invention is applied to a honey-type gaming machine will be described. Hereinafter, the differences between the game machine 1 and the game machine 1 will be mainly described, and common descriptions may be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a blade-type variable winning ball device, and FIG. 75 is a front view of the variable winning ball device provided on the game board as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 74, the pachinko gaming machine 501 has a glass door frame 502 formed in a frame shape. A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 503 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 502. At the bottom of the hitting ball supply tray 3, there is a hitting ball supply tray 503.
An extra ball receiving tray 504 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball, and a hitting ball operating handle (control knob) for adjusting the speed at which the hitting ball launching device launches the game ball (that is, the strength of the spring that plays the game ball)
505 is provided.

The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball striking device by rotating the operation knob 505. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 505 to the right, the speed of the game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device gradually increases. Enters the left area of the game area 507 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 505 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 507 from above. Therefore, by changing the rotation amount with the operation knob 505 rotated to the right, it is possible to adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball striking device, and to adjust the area where the game ball is to be shot. .

A game board is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 502. The game board is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board and various parts attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 507 partitioned by guide rails is formed on the front surface of the game board.

A wing-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 507. Below the blade-type variable winning ball device 520, a first winning winning port 511, a second starting winning port 512, and a variable winning ball device 515 that forms a third starting winning port 513 are provided. The winning ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 511 is detected by the first starting opening switch 511a, and the winning ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 512 is detected by the second starting opening switch 512a, respectively. Led to. Also, a winning ball that has entered the third starting winning opening 513 that can be awarded when the variable winning ball apparatus 515 is opened is detected by the third starting opening switch 513a and guided to the back of the game board. The variable winning ball device 515 is opened by a solenoid 515a. Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 511, the second starting winning opening 512, and the third
The start winning port 513 is collectively referred to as “start winning port”, or the start winning ports 511, 512, 51
3 may be expressed. Also, the first start port switch 511a and the second start port switch 512
a and the third start port switch 513a may be collectively referred to as “start port switch” or may be expressed as start port switches 511a, 512a, and 513a. When a game ball wins the start winning opening, a predetermined number, for example, 5 game balls are paid out as a prize ball. The number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a game ball at the start winning opening may be common or may be different for each starting winning opening. For example, the number of payout balls when a game ball is won at the first start prize port 511 and the second start prize port 512 is 5, and the number of prize balls when a game ball is won at the third start prize port 513 is The number of payouts may be two.

When the game ball wins the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, the blade type variable winning ball apparatus 520 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By opening / closing control, the left open door 576A on the left side moves leftward from the initial position, and the right open door 576B on the right side moves rightward from the initial position, whereby the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 is opened. , Left open door 57
6A and the right open door 576B return to the initial positions, and the blade-type variable winning ball device 520 is in a closed state. In this manner, the blade-type variable winning ball device 5 according to the winning detection of the start port switch.
The state where 20 performs the opening operation is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 may be referred to as an accessory. The game board is provided with various kinds of bonuses. Hereinafter, the bonus means a blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520.

On the back side inside the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, an effect display device 509 such as an LCD for effect display is provided. The effect display device 509 variably displays the effect symbol as identification information (variation display). In this embodiment, the effect display device 509 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

On the right side of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, a special symbol display 508 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided. The special symbol display 508 is configured by, for example, a 7-segment display.

Above the special symbol display 508, there is provided a special symbol start memory display 518 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls, that is, the starting memory number, in which a game ball has entered the starting winning opening. The special symbol start memory display 518 displays up to four start memory numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol start memory display 518 increments the number of lit LEDs by 1 each time there is an effective start winning in the start winning opening 511, 512, 513. Then, each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 508, the number of LEDs that are lit is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off).
In this example, the special symbol start memory display 518 shifts the lighting state every time variable display is started by the special symbol display 508. As will be described later, since the start memory number is also displayed on the effect display device 509, the special symbol start memory display 518 may not be provided.

On the left side of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, a normal symbol display 51 for variably displaying a normal symbol.
0 is provided. When a game ball passes through the gate 532 provided on the right side of the game area 507 and is detected by the gate switch 532a, the normal symbol (510)
In this example, variable display of numeric display (with 7-segment LED) is started. In this embodiment, “7” is stopped and displayed at the end of variable display in the case of winning, and “
Other than “7” is stopped and displayed. In the case of winning, the variable winning ball device 7 is opened for a predetermined number of times. Note that the normal symbol hit probability is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 510, a normal symbol start memory display 541 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of passing balls that have passed through the gate 532 is provided. Each time the gate 532 passes, the normal symbol start memory display 541 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 510 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

On the right side of the variable winning ball apparatus 515, there is provided a big winning opening through which the opening / closing plate 516 is opened by the solenoid 521 in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). Opening and closing plate 51
6 is a means for opening and closing the special winning opening. The winning ball that entered the big prize opening is the count switch 52
3 is detected. When game balls win the big prize opening, a predetermined number, for example, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Decorative lamps blinking and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 507, and an outlet 526 for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided at the bottom.

In addition, two speakers 527 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 507. On the outer periphery of the game area 507, there are a top frame lamp 528a and a left frame lamp 528b.
And a right frame lamp 528c. Further, each structure in the game area 507 (
A decorative LED is installed around the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 and the like. Ceiling lamp 5
The 28a, the left frame lamp 528b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

A game ball fired from the ball striking device enters the game area 507 through the hit ball rail, and then falls in the game area 507. If the hit ball enters the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, the special symbol will start variable display on the special symbol display 508 and the effect display device 509 will produce the effect symbol if variable symbol display can be started. Starts variable display. If it is not in a state in which the variable display of symbols can be started, the number of starting winning memories is increased by 1 when the number of starting winning memories which is the reserved storage of the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display 508 is not the upper limit. That is, the number of LEDs to be turned on in the special symbol start memory display 518 is increased by one.

The variable display of the special symbols (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 508 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. The special symbol at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (specific display result:
For example, “3”, “7”) shifts to a first big hit gaming state (a big hit gaming state that is started without going through the starting operation state) in the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the small hit symbol (specifically, “1”, “2”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “8”, “9”), it shifts to the starting operation state. To do. In the starting operation state, when a game ball wins a special area provided inside the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, the state shifts to a second big hit gaming state (a big hit gaming state started after passing through the starting operation state). . Note that the gaming state before the transition to the big hit gaming state is a normal state. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the normal state or the short time state (variable winning ball apparatus 5 by shortening the average variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol)
15 is a state in which 15 is easily opened. The short-time state is the variable winning ball device 515.
Can be continued for a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, and the variable winning ball device 515 is 10 times.
If the transition condition to the big hit gaming state is satisfied before it is released 0 times, the gaming state is
Transition from the short-time state to the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the variable winning ball apparatus 515 is released 100 times without satisfying the transition condition to the big hit gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the gate 532 is provided on the right side of the game area 507. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is controlled to the short-time state,
In order to pass the game ball to the gate 532, the game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the game area 507 (
So-called right-handed) is advantageous. In addition, as shown in FIG.
The big prize opening is provided on the right side of the game area 507. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the big hit game, in order to win the game ball in the big prize opening, the game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the game area (
So-called right-handed). On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is assumed that a game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming to the left of the game area 507 if the game is not in a short-time state or a big hit game (in a normal state).

A left gate 517 is provided on the left side of the game area 507, and a game ball that has passed through the left gate 517 is detected by the left gate switch 517a. Also, the game area 507
A right gate 519 is provided on the right side of, and a game ball passing through the right gate 519 is detected by a right gate switch 519a.

In this embodiment, when a transition of a predetermined gaming state is performed, control for shifting the gaming state is performed based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519.
Specifically, in this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is derived and displayed, or when a game ball wins a specific winning slot 566 in the blade type variable winning ball apparatus 520, the big hit game is started immediately. Instead, the big hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the gate.
In this embodiment, since the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 507 (right-handed during the big hit game), the big hit is based on the game ball passing through the right gate 519. A game is started. The big hit game is not started based on the game balls passing through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519, but when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, or in the specific winning in the blade type variable winning ball device 520 The big hit game may be started immediately when a game ball is won in the mouth 566, or the big hit game may be started after a predetermined time has passed.

Further, in this embodiment, even when the big hit game is finished, the state is shifted to a state where a new variation display can be started based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the normal state, it is left-handed and right-handed in the short-time state, so that when the game is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game, the game ball has passed through the left gate 517 Based on this, the state is shifted to a state where a new variation display can be started. Transition to a state where display can be started. Left gate 5
17 and the right gate 519 are not shifted to a state in which a new variable display can be started based on the passing of the game ball, but when the big hit game is finished or the big hit game is finished, a predetermined time is passed. You may make it transfer to the state which can start a new fluctuation | variation display when it passes.

Next, the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 will be described. Feather-type variable winning ball device (function)
When the left opening door 576A and the right opening door 576B are opened by driving the opening / closing motor 575, the game ball 520 can enter the game ball 520. The game ball that has entered the accessory 520 passes through the passage port 57 and the like and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 520. In FIG. 75, a state in which the left open door 576A and the right open door 576B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 520 (is difficult to enter) is indicated by a solid line, and the left open door 576A and the right open door A state where 576B is opened and the game ball can enter the accessory 520 (easy to enter) is indicated by a virtual line.

A left movable member 577 and a right movable member 578 are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the accessory 520. The moving part of the left movable member 577 is the left movable part 577A, and the right movable member 5
The moving part in 78 is the right movable part 578A. The left movable portion 577A is moved by the left movable portion drive solenoid 577B, and the right movable portion 578A is moved to the right movable portion drive solenoid 578B.
Moved by. The left movable portion 577A and the right movable portion 78A move in the vertical direction.

A special prize opening 566 that forms a specific area is provided at the bottom of the accessory 520. In addition, in the back of the position where the special winning opening 566 is provided in the accessory 520, there is provided an exit opening, and inside the accessory 520 there is a passage for distributing the game balls to the specific winning opening 566 or the exit opening. Is provided. The specific prize opening 566 is provided with a specific area switch 566A. A game ball that has won a prize in the specific prize opening 566 is detected by the specific area switch 566A, and a game ball that has won a prize is detected by the loss area switch. Is done. Special winning entrance 5
When a game ball wins at 66 and the outlier, a predetermined number, for example, 10 game balls are paid out as a prize ball. It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins at the specific prize opening 566 and the extra opening may be the same or different. For example,
The number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a game ball in the specific prize opening 566 may be 10, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins a prize may be three. Further, when a game ball enters the outlet, no prize ball may be paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

A game ball that has entered the accessory 520 wins the specific prize opening 566 and the specific area switch 566.
On condition that it is detected at A, it becomes possible to shift to the second big hit gaming state. Also, 5
When a game ball that has entered 20 has won a winning slot, it is not possible to shift to the second big hit gaming state.

An example of how the game proceeds in the gaming machine 501 will be described. In the gaming machine 501, in a normal state, when a game ball wins any one of the first start winning opening 511, the second starting winning opening 512, and the third starting winning opening 513, one of the big win, the small win, and the off A lottery (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “hit lottery”) is executed. As a result of the big hit lottery, the big hit, the small hit or the out is determined. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 508.

If the jackpot lottery result is determined to be a jackpot, the special symbol indicator 508 displays a symbol (
After the symbol corresponding to the jackpot) is stopped and displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the normal state to the jackpot gaming state (first jackpot gaming state). In the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening by the opening and closing plate 16 is controlled to be opened and closed 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening allowance time is 29 seconds). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, any one of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, and 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like. If the jackpot lottery result is determined to be a jackpot,
The accessory 520 is not controlled to the open state. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the accessory 520 may be controlled to be in an open state.

When the result of the big win lottery is determined for the small win, the special symbol display 508 displays a symbol (
After the symbol corresponding to the small hit) is stopped and displayed, the accessory 520 is controlled to be in the open state and the starting operation is started. In the starting operation state, the accessory 520 is opened for 0.9 seconds. The number of times of opening (number of times of opening) is once, twice or three times. In the start-up operation state, when a game ball wins an accessory 520, and a game ball wins a specific winning slot 566 and is detected by the specific area switch 566A, a V winning is generated. When a V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state (second big hit gaming state). A game ball enters the outlet and V
If no winning occurs, the game does not enter the second big hit gaming state. In other words, they are disconnected and maintain the normal state.

If the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be out of place, the special symbol display 508 displays a symbol (
After the symbol corresponding to the disengagement is stopped and displayed, the accessory 520 is not controlled to the open state. In this case, the gaming state does not shift to the big hit gaming state, and the normal state is maintained.

There are two types of big hits: non-temporal and big hits. In any case, when the change of the special symbol is finished, the game goes directly to the 16-round big hit game state (first big hit game state) without going through the starting operation state. Later, the gaming state shifts to the short-time state (on the other hand, in the case of a non-time-saving big hit, the gaming state after the big hit game is a normal state).

There are three types of small hits, the first small hit to the third small hit. The first small hit is a small hit where the accessory 520 is opened once in the starting operation state, the second small hit is a small hit where the accessory 520 is opened twice, and the third small hit is an accessory. 520 is a small hit that opens 3 times. In addition, in the case of detachment, the accessory 520 does not perform the opening operation.

In addition, when the winning combination V 520 is performed in the first small hit or the second small hit, the second big hit is a non-temporary big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state is finished, Transition to the state. In addition, when the winning combination 520 is performed in the third small hit and the winning combination V is won, the second big hit is a short-time big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state is finished, the state shifts to the short-time state.

Further, the gaming machine 501 includes the main board 11 and the display monitor 29 provided in the gaming machine 1 described above.
A main board and a display monitor similar to the above are provided, and the main board calculates a role (a ratio) and a role ratio, and displays the calculated role on the display monitor. The display monitor is arranged in front of the main board on the main board so as not to hinder the visibility. This is the same as the gaming machine 1 described above. In addition, for the game machine 1 described above, the calculation procedure, display procedure, etc.
It is the same.

The combination (ream ratio) and the combination ratio in the gaming machine 501 can be obtained by the above expressions (1) and (2). The prize winning ball number in the gaming machine 501 is determined by the winning of the game ball with respect to the large winning opening provided with the variable winning ball device 515, the specific winning port 566 and the off hole in the blade type variable winning ball device 520, and the opening / closing plate 516. The total number of game balls to be paid out.

In addition, the number of consecutive prize winning balls in the gaming machine 501 is the number of game balls paid out by winning a game ball with respect to the big winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 516 when the first big hit game state is executed. Refers to the total number. When the second big hit gaming state is executed, the opening / closing plate 516
It may be the total number of game balls that have been paid out by winning a game ball (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “Big Winner Award”) for a grand prize opening comprising , Winning a game ball with respect to the specific winning opening 566 and the outlier in the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 at the time of the V winning that became the trigger for the transition to the second big hit gaming state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the opportunity winning”) It may be the total number of game balls to be paid out.

The “when winning the V win that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state” in the opportunity win may be when the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 where the V win is generated or when the V win occurs. A series of opening due to winning at the start winning opening that triggered the opening of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus may be included. For example, the third start winning opening 5 in which the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 is opened three times.
The winning-type variable winning ball device 520 is opened by the winning of the game ball to 13, and when the V-winning is received at the time of opening, the opportunity winning is specified by the specification of the blade-type variable winning ball device 520 at the time of the opening of the three times. It is good also as a winning of the game ball with respect to the winning opening 566 and the outlier.

In addition, when the number of consecutive prize winning balls is the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning a grand prize winning and a winning prize, winning with respect to the specific winning slot 566 and the offending slot of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 becomes an opportunity prize. It depends on whether or not a V prize that triggers the transition to the second big hit gaming state occurs. For this reason, the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning for the specific winning slot 566 and the offending slot of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 (hereinafter referred to as “temporary memory opportunity winning ball number”) is temporarily stored, and the second big hit game When the V prize that triggers the transition to the state occurs, the temporary memory opportunity prize ball number may be added to the number of consecutive feature winning prize balls as the total number of game balls to be paid out by the opportunity prize. Good. The timing for adding the temporary storage opportunity winning ball to the number of consecutive winning character winning balls may be an appropriate timing. For example, the timing may be the timing of counting the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the grand prize winning game by shifting to the second big hit gaming state, or counting the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the big winning prize When starting, it is good also as a timing just before displaying a game combination (continuous ratio) on the display monitor 29 during or after counting the number of prize balls of the game ball paid out by the big prize opening prize.

In addition, after storing the temporary storage opportunity winning ball, when the V winning that triggers the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur, the temporary storage trigger winning ball may be deleted. When a game ball wins a specific winning opening 566, the V that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state
Since a winning has occurred, the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning a winning opening for the blade type variable winning ball device 520 may be temporarily stored. For example, the determination that the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur is, for example, that no V winning has occurred after a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the blade-type variable winning ball device 520. can do.

In addition, as with the gaming machine 1 described above, the short-term service group (ream ratio), the short-term service ratio, the cumulative service group (inter-ratio), and the cumulative service ratio are displayed on the display monitor. And so on. The display monitor may be attached to the main board in the same manner as the gaming machine 1 described above. Moreover, as an arrangement | positioning aspect of a display monitor, it is good also as the various arrangement | positioning aspect demonstrated with the attachment aspect with respect to the game machine 1. FIG.

The gaming machine 501 described above is a gaming machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device 520. In a gaming machine equipped with such a blade-type variable winning ball device 520, a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio are displayed on the main board. The display monitor is provided on the main board for controlling the game so that the visibility is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to game nails (fault nails), windmills and the like provided on the game board.

In addition, in the gaming machine 501 provided with the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, the role combination (continuity ratio) and the role ratio are calculated in a manner different from that of the gaming machine 1. Also in the gaming machine 501 provided with such a blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, it is possible to calculate a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio and display them on a display monitor attached to the main board.

Also, in the gaming machine 501, among the start winning openings for opening and closing the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520,
Although the variable winning ball device 515 is used as the third starting winning port 513, the starting winning port is only one that is not provided with variable winning ball devices such as the first starting winning port 511 and the second starting winning port 512. It may be. Further, the start winning opening may be only a variable winning ball apparatus such as the third starting winning opening 513.

Note that the number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball at the third start prize opening 513 is added to the number of winning prizes used for calculating the ratio, but the first start prize slot 511 and second The number of winning balls paid out by winning a game ball at the start winning opening 512 is not added to the number of winning winning balls and the number of winning winning consecutive consecutive winning characters.

Further, in the gaming machine 501, a big hit lottery is executed by winning a game ball at the start winning opening.
It is good also as an aspect in which 0 open operation is performed. Further, instead of the big hit lottery, a lottery for the number of times the variable winning ball device 520 is opened may be performed, or the big hit lottery and the variable winning ball device 520.
You may make it perform both with the lottery of the open | release number of. In the lottery for the number of times to open,
In addition to lottery such as 2 times and 3 times, 0 may be included as an object of the number of times of opening.

Further, the gaming machine 501 is set to a big hit gaming state (a first big hit gaming state and a second big hit gaming state).
And a grand prize winning opening provided. On the other hand, it is good also as an aspect with which only the blade | wing type variable winning ball apparatus was provided, without providing a big winning opening, while having set the big hit game state. In this case, in the big hit gaming state, the blade-type variable winning ball device opens and closes,
The opening operation may be performed for a certain time.

Further, in an aspect in which only the blade-type variable winning ball device is provided, V winning may be set as the continuation condition of the big hit gaming state. For example, when shifting to the big hit gaming state, the continuation of the next round may be determined when the highest continuation round is set and a V prize is awarded during one round.

(Modification regarding display control of winning information and display items)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, an item related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 41A and 41B, a pass gate designation command for designating which gate the game ball has passed through is sent to the main board 11
Production control board 12 (production control CPU 1) from (game control microcomputer 100)
20), the effect control CPU 120 can count the number of times that the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B and display it in the first area α.

For example, the number of times the gate has passed today (corresponding to A1), today's gate, by the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general prize opening designation command designating which of the first to fourth general prize openings has been won Gate pass ratio (corresponding to A2), low base state gate pass count (corresponding to B1), low base state gate pass ratio (corresponding to B2), high base state gate pass count (corresponding to B1)
C1), the high base state gate passage ratio (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages in the set period (corresponding to D1), and the gate pass ratio in the set period (corresponding to D2) It can be displayed in area α. Moreover, these items can be totaled for each gate (with respect to each of the gates 41A and 41B) and displayed in the first area α.

(2) In addition, the production control CPU 120 receives the prize winning prize command from the game control microcomputer 100, so that the number of prizes awarded to the prize winning opening can be tabulated.
The number of awarded balls based on winning in the big winning opening can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

For example, by the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general prize openings has been won, “the number of prizes (A
1) ”,“ Today ’s winning prize ratio (corresponding to A2) ”,“ Today's winning ball number (corresponding to A3) ”,“ Today The ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on today's winning award to the total number of winning balls (corresponding to A4) "," the number of winning a prize winning in the set period (corresponding to D1) ) ”,“ Percentage of winning prizes in the set period (
Equivalent to D2), “Number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the big prize opening during the set period (D
3) ”and“ ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the big prize opening in the setting period relative to the number of prize balls given in the setting period (corresponding to D4) ” The first
It can be displayed in area α.

Here, “the ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize winnings with respect to today's total prize balls (corresponding to A4)” or “the prize balls awarded during the set period” When the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning a prize winning in the set period with respect to the number (corresponding to D4) is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), the fact is notified. You may make it do. For example, a message such as “the prize winning ball ratio exceeding the reference value (60%)” may be displayed in the first area α.

In addition, the number of prize balls given based on winning in the second starting prize opening controlled to be opened / closed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the opening / closing control by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 with respect to the total number of winning balls. The total ratio with the number of winning balls awarded based on winning the winning prize is a predetermined ratio (for example, 7
If it is higher than 0%), that fact may be notified. For example, the first area α
In addition, a message such as “the ratio of the prize winning ball exceeds the reference value (70%)” may be displayed.

(3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side, the effect control CPU 120 receives each command received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the game ball enters each entry area. The example in which the number of game balls entering each entry area is tabulated has been described, but the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side is described.
In the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side, the number of game balls entered into each entry area is counted, or the effect control CPU 120 is a game control microcomputer when the game ball enters each entry area. Based on each command received from 100, it is also possible to add up the number of game balls entering each entry area.

Note that the game control microcomputer 100 or the effect control CPU 1 on the main board 11 side.
The number of game balls entering the respective entry areas (counter values corresponding to the switches) counted in 20 is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 and can be displayed on the image display device 5. For example, by outputting a command designating the total number of entries to each entry area from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can enter each entry area based on the command. The number of approaches can be specified and displayed in the first area α.

It should be noted that the display devices provided on the main board 11 such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B indicate the number of entry into each entry area counted on the game control microcomputer 100 side. You may make it display on. Further, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of winnings to the start winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B You may make it alert | report by performing the specific display different from the display result of the variable display of a special symbol. Note that the display device provided on the main board 11 on which the aggregated results are displayed is not limited to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like, and displays the aggregated results. It may be a display device provided exclusively for. Further, the display device may be in any form such as a lamp, LED, 7 segment, liquid crystal display device, EL panel, light guide plate.

The value of each counter (number of entries into each entry area) stored in the RAM 102 is, for example,
A reset operation for resetting a game state flag (a flag according to a game state for enabling the game control microcomputer 100 to specify a probable change state, a short time state, etc.) stored in the RAM 102 is performed on the game hall side ( For example, when it is performed by a store clerk), it is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, or is output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12 and displayed as an image. You may make it display on the apparatus 5 for a fixed period. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 11. The reset button is provided on the back side (game island side) of the game board 2 and rotates the game board 2 forward with respect to the game machine frame 3 using the hinge mechanism of the game machine frame 3. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back side of the game board 2 can be operated.

(4) In the above embodiment, the number-of-wins information (D1 to D in the counting period set by the player)
4) has been described as an example that can be displayed in the first area α, but the total period is set in advance in the gaming machine regardless of the player's operation (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored) Or is set by an operation on the game hall side), and the number-of-wins information (corresponding to D1 to D4) in the set counting period may be displayed in the first area α. . For example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes). In that case, you may make it alert | report that.

(5) In addition, when a winning at a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the fact may be notified to the first area α. For example, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening has not occurred for 10 minutes, a message “No general winning for 10 minutes” may be displayed in the first area α. The predetermined period may be set by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30), and an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 30). It may be possible to set by.

(6) It should be noted that the above embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine including a sorting device in which the winning ratio to the start winning opening and the general winning opening is a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). The number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings at each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-2014
The gaming machine disclosed in 117434 has a configuration in which game balls received by the sorting device are alternately distributed to the first start winning port and the second starting winning port. By providing such a sorting device, It is also possible to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distribution device to the start winning opening and the general winning opening. The above embodiment is also applied to the gaming machine having a configuration in which the distribution device alternately distributes the game balls to the start winning opening and the general winning opening, and the first winning amount information related to the winning numbers to each winning opening is applied. It can be displayed in area α. However, since the number of wins to the general prize opening is automatically determined according to the number of wins to the start prize opening, the ratio of the number of wins to the general prize opening to the number of wins to the start prize opening is displayed as described above. There is no need to let them.

(7) In FIG. 46, the counting period can be set according to the player's operation, but the winning number information is reset according to the player's operation, and the counting of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do it. For example, when the player performs an operation for starting counting, the first area α
The number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed on is reset to 0, and thereafter, the CPU 1 for effect control
Each time 20 receives a general prize opening designation command, the number of winning prizes to the general prize opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by one.

Further, the aggregation period once set may be changed according to the player's operation before the set period elapses. For example, although the aggregation period is initially set to 30 minutes, in order to quickly know the aggregation result, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses to shorten the aggregation period to 10 minutes. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation results for a longer period, the player performs a resetting operation before the set period elapses and extends the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Also good. Further, the set aggregation period may be extended in accordance with the player's operation after the set period has elapsed. For example, after 10 minutes, which is the set counting period, has elapsed and the counting results for 10 minutes have been displayed once, the player performs an extension operation to grasp the counting results for a longer counting period, The aggregation period is extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both the 10-minute aggregation result and the 60-minute aggregation result including the 10-minute period are obtained)
You may do it.

(8) In the first area α in the demonstration screen displayed on the image display device 5 or in the state where the game is being performed (the state where the game end determination is not made and the demonstration screen is not displayed). The image explaining whether each winning opening provided on the game board surface is the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, or the general winning opening may be displayed. In addition, the number of winning balls at each winning opening may be notified.

(9) In the above embodiment, the game hall setting has priority over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may have priority over the game hall setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. As shown in FIG.
When the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where the icon including the characters “display” is selected on the selection screen of (), the winning number information is displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control of FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). When the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2), the winning information is not displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control of FIG. 44 is executed). You may do it.

In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not to display the winning information according to the order of the accepted setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting being the same priority. In other words, it may be determined whether or not the winning number information is displayed with priority given to the setting operation (last setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. When set, the winning information is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). Moreover, even if it is a setting which does not display winning number information on the player setting screen of FIG. 5 (1)-(3), the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to a 2nd position (display position) after that. In such a case, the number-of-wins information is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the setting for not displaying the winning number information on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) thereafter. In such a case, the winning information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 44 is executed). In addition, FIG.
Even if it is set to display the number-of-wins information on the player setting screen in (3), if the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) after that, The numerical information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 44 is executed).

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by operating the display changeover switch 32 by the store clerk of the game hall, and the player can select the operation button 30. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number-of-wins information on the image display device 5 by operating, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and by operating the display changeover switch 32, While it is possible to set whether or not to display winning number information on the image display device 5, the player cannot set whether or not to display winning number information on the image display device 5 (for example, FIG. 5 (1) to FIG. 5). (There is no setting screen on the player side as shown in (3)). Thus, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 only on the game hall side.

On the contrary, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by operating the operation button 30 by the player (and the store clerk of the game hall). There may be no means (for example, the display changeover switch 32 is not provided) that allows only the side to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible for the player and the game shop clerk to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 30). . Thus, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation for the player and the game hall.

(10) It should be noted that the winning number information relating to the number of winnings received at each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described with reference to FIG. A game in which the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the non-display position (first position) so that it is displayed on the image display device 5 only in the maintenance mode in which is the display position (second position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 5. That is, it may be handled in the same way as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG.

As described above, the number-of-wins information relating to the number of winnings received at each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described with reference to FIG. It may be information that can be displayed on the image display device 5 only when it is performed and that the player cannot normally see. For example, a state where a player can play a game (for example, a state where a demo screen is displayed), a state where a game end determination is not performed (a state where a special game is being executed, a general game, etc.) In the state where the game is executed and the jackpot gaming state, etc., are information that is not displayed on the image display device 5, and for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute from the start of the power supply of the gaming machine, the demonstration screen is displayed. Display only before a game is performed), or when a manipulation for stopping the power supply of the gaming machine is performed, the display can be performed only for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). good.

(11) In addition, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described in FIG. In this mode, display on the image display device 5 may be possible. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the number-of-wins information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only in the first area α. The winning number information may be displayed. That is, the display area of the number-of-wins information may be different between a period in which no game is played and a period in which a game may be played.

Also, in the maintenance mode, the total number of winning information is displayed for all items, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the operation of the game hall or the player, or Information on the number of winnings in a predetermined main item) may be displayed.
That is, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which the game is not performed and the period in which the game may be performed.

(12) In the game mode, during the period in which the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game end determination being performed, the number-of-wins information can be displayed in the entire first area α and second area β. On the other hand, the number-of-wins information may be displayed only in the first area α during the period in which the game end determination is not performed and the game is determined to be in progress. In other words, the display area of the winning information may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not being performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

In addition, during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game end determination being performed, the total number of winning information is displayed for all items, whereas the game end determination is not performed and the game is not performed. During the period determined to be medium, the winning information of some items (items set by the operation of the game hall or the player or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which it is determined that no game is being performed and the period in which it is determined that a game is being performed.

(13) In the above embodiment, a specific image (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol,
And the display position and display range (image size) of the hold information) are not changed between the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIGS. 42 and 43) and the setting for not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 44) ( On the other hand, for other images (background images), the visible range is different between the setting for displaying the winning information and the setting for not displaying the winning information. Not limited to the form, as shown in FIG. 47, the setting for displaying the winning information (FIG. 47A).
And the setting not to display the winning number information (FIG. 47B), the display positions and display ranges (sizes of images) of all images including the background image other than the winning number information may be made common. good. Thereby, the control burden by the display / non-display setting of the winning number information can be reduced.

(14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (size of the image) of the decorative pattern are
Settings for displaying winning information (FIGS. 42 and 43) and settings for not displaying winning information (FIG. 44)
However, the display position and display range of the decorative symbols may be made different according to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, the decorative symbol display area 5 in the setting for displaying the number-of-wins information (FIG. 48A).
In the setting (FIG. 48 (b)) in which the winning number information is not displayed than the interval of L, 5C, 5R,
The intervals between the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display of decorative symbols may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, the decorative symbol display area 5L when the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. Thus, when not displaying the number-of-wins information,
You may make it accept | permit the variable display or stop display of the decorative design in the area (alpha). Thus, you may make it raise interest by performing an effect using the whole screen.

(15) In the above embodiment, as the gaming machine error, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality are exemplified, but not limited to these, the gaming machine error includes front door opening abnormality and payout mechanism abnormality. (Prize ball abnormality, etc.), incorrect prize winning at the prize winning opening (abnormality in which winning at the prize winning opening is detected even though the prize winning opening is not open), or malfunction of various members of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Etc.

[Other variations]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In addition,
You may make it combine arbitrarily the control and structure of the gaming machine shown by each said production | formation form, and it was shown by the following modification and control and structure of the gaming machine shown by each said production | presentation form. You may make it combine arbitrarily the control and structure of a gaming machine.

In the above embodiment, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 41B due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the flow direction of the game balls are placed in the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D. It shall be possible to win any one. With this configuration,
Even when the game ball does not pass through the gate 41B in the probability variation state or the short time state, it is possible to expect a winning to a general winning opening provided on the downstream side of the gate 41B. In addition, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 41B may win a prize in either the third general winning port 50C or the fourth general winning port 50D at a higher rate than the game balls that have passed through the gate 41B. . By adopting such a configuration, even when the frequency of game balls passing through the gate 41B is low in the probability variation state or the short-time state, it is possible to expect winning in a general winning opening provided on the downstream side. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. Furthermore, a specific production | presentation is performed based on the winning to a general winning opening, and a game entertainment interest can be raised more.

In the above embodiment, executing a specific effect at a different rate depending on the gaming state includes executing the specific effect only in a certain gaming state, and not executing the specific effect in other gaming states. . In the above embodiment, the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game period in order to execute the specific effect at a different rate depending on the game period.
It also includes not performing a specific effect during other game periods.

In the above embodiment, in the first state, it is possible to execute the effect only in the first state in order to execute the effect at a higher rate than in the second state different from the first state. In the second state, not including an effect is also included. Here, the classification between the first state and the second state includes the classification according to the number of reserved memories, the classification according to the execution period of the special figure game (the special figure game), in addition to the classification according to the gaming state described above. Whether or not variable display is being executed), according to the type of variation pattern (for example, whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect, or , Whether the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effect),
Classification according to specific performance timing (for example, classification of whether the reach state is before or after establishment of the reach state in the variation pattern with reach production, or before execution of the pseudo-series production in the variation pattern with pseudo-series production) Or after execution).

In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, the specific effect may be executable only in any one of (1) the normal state and (2) the probability variation state or the short time state. For example, (1
) The specific effect can be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the probability variation state or the short time state. In the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, any one of (1) a period after the reach state is established in reach change and (2) a period outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in reach change. The specific effect may be executable only in one case. For example, (1) The specific effect can be executed only in the period after the reach state is established in the reach change, and (2) In the case of the period outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change The production may not be executed.

In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, depending on whether the gaming state is (1) the normal state, or (2) the probability variation state or the short time state, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the execution state is executed. Although the type of the specific effect is different, when the big hit game state is controlled, whether or not the specific effect is executed and whether the specific effect to be executed is based on the same effect execution conditions as when the game state is the normal state. The type may be determined, and the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the common effect execution condition when the probability variation state or the time saving state is in effect. . In addition, the game state classification is not limited to (1) normal state, (2) probability variation state or time-short state, for example, (1) high base state, (2)
It may be a category of whether it is a high base state, (1) whether it is a big hit gaming state,
(2) It may be a category of whether it is a big hit gaming state.

In the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, the game period is (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change, or (2) outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change. Depending on whether it is a period, the presence or absence of execution of a specific effect and the type of specific effect to be executed are determined, but not limited to such a game period category, for example,
(1) Whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or less, (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 2 or more,
Or (1) whether or not the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed,
(2) It may be a section indicating whether or not the decorative symbol variable display is not executed.

Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good.

In the first to fourth effect forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect forms, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect. May be executable. That is, when the winning condition is established, one of the change result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect that matches a predetermined condition is executed (for example, the change result notice effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less). In the case where the number of stored memories is 2 or more, a pre-reading notice effect may be executed), or both of them may be executed simultaneously. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect is an effect that changes the mode of the display information (display part) corresponding to the hold storage, the above-described change result notice effect (sound effect only, or sound effect and accessory effect) The pre-reading notice effect can be executed simultaneously, and the player can grasp that both the change result notice effect and the pre-reading notice effect have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, the change result notice effect is preferentially executed, and the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied If there is a hold memory that is determined to be a big hit in the determination at the time of starting winning, although it is a symbol that is off, it is preferable to preferentially execute the pre-reading notice effect.

In the embodiment described above, it is set whether or not the number of winnings is displayed by the operation button 30 only in the period determined as the non-game state by the effect control CPU 120 (only when the demonstration screen is displayed). Although the example which becomes possible was demonstrated, it is not restricted to such a form, it does not depend on a game state (for example, a normal state, a probability change state, a time-short state, a big hit game state), and the execution state (special symbol) of a special game Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memories of special figure games), the execution status of ordinary figure games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of reserved memories of ordinary figure games) Regardless of whether the winning number is displayed by the operation button 30 or not. That is, whether or not to display the winning number by the operation button 30 even during a period in which the game is performed, for example, a period in which the decorative symbol variable display is performed or a period in which the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. It may be settable. In such a configuration, when it is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, regardless of the gaming state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot gaming state) Game execution status (
Whether the special symbol variable display is being executed, the special figure game hold memory count, the normal game execution status (whether the normal symbol variable display is being executed, The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the stored number).

In the above embodiment, there is no restriction on the period during which the display changeover switch 32 can be operated. Therefore, if the glass door frame 3a can be opened on the game hall side, the display changeover switch 32 is operated. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. Not only in such a form, you may make it restrict | limit the period in which setting operation in the game hall side is possible. For example, as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 32 is not provided, when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the game hall side, in the setting screens shown in FIGS. It is assumed that selection and determination are performed by the operation button 30. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot game state), or the execution status of a special figure game (whether or not a special symbol variable display is executed) 5 (1) to 5 (1) to FIG. 5 (b) depending on the number of stored special figure games) and the execution status of ordinary games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed or the number of stored memories of ordinary games). The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period during which the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the period during which the probability change state or the short-time state is controlled, the period during which the special figure game is being executed, the period during which the number of reserved memories in the special figure game is not 0, etc. The setting screen shown in 5 (1) to (3) may not be displayed, and the setting operation on the game hall side may be prohibited.

In the above-described embodiment, only when the game hall side displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening by setting the display changeover switch 32 that cannot be operated by the player (the operation unit is set to the second position). The setting screen (FIGS. 5 (1) to (3)) for enabling the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed. Not only in the form, but as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 32 that can be operated only on the game hall side is not provided, whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be set on both the player side and the game hall side Common setting screen (similar to FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3)), for selecting and deciding whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by operating the operation buttons 30. Screen) may be displayed. In the configuration in which such a common setting screen is displayed, even if the game store clerk is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the player subsequently determines the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In the case of the setting to be displayed, the number received in the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 5 by applying the setting received later.

In addition, the display change switch 32 that can be operated only by the game hall side is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening (the operation unit is set to the second position), and the operation button 30 is operated in general. Common information (for example, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning slot stored in the display control table) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the number of winning prizes is set to be displayed. You may make it let it. In such a configuration, the display changeover switch 3
Even if the setting is made so that the common information is not displayed by switching between the two, if the setting is made so that the common information is displayed by the operation of the operation button 30 thereafter, the later accepted setting is applied. Thus, common information may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the above-described embodiment, a limit may be provided for a period (game state) in which the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, in the period during which the decorative symbol variable display is executed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from when the reach state is established until the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. . Further, in a predetermined gaming state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the game hall side determines whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening in any period (game state). It may be settable or may be settable by setting means (for example, the operation button 30) on the player side.

In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player inputs the player ID (for example, the ID of the recording medium owned by the player or the personal identification ID registered on the website) by the operation button 30. As a result, game data including the number of winnings in the general winning opening after the player ID is entered can be tabulated, and the operation button 30 is operated when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is finished. Thus, game data aggregated after the player ID is input may be output to the image display device 5 as a two-dimensional code. The player captures the two-dimensional code (information that can identify the player ID and the game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, so that the information management server connected to the information terminal and the Internet And the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code. The game data managed in is updated. The player
The information management server can be accessed from the information terminal and the stored game data (game data associated with the player ID) can be confirmed. As a result, the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be grasped. It becomes. In such a form, regarding whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 5, setting means on the game hall side (for example, the display changeover switch 32).
), Or may be set by setting means (for example, the operation button 30) on the player side.

In the case of such a form, a privilege may be given to the player according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example,
When the number of winnings in the general winning opening exceeds a predetermined number, a background image that can be used on the information terminal, application software, or the like may be given as a privilege to the player with that player ID. . In addition, points corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening may be given to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. Then, the player may be able to exchange part or all of the possession points for benefits.

In the above embodiment, the example in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been described. You may alert | report that it did. For example, a winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a winning notification sound effect or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Anyway. In the case of such a configuration, as in the above embodiment, whether or not to notify that the game ball has won the general winning opening is set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the game hall side. It may be possible, or may be set by setting means (for example, operation button 30) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning situation at the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 5 receives the number of winnings and the winning frequency for each general winning opening (the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls fired to the game area, or the general winnings per hour). (The number of winning prizes to the mouth) may be displayed, or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed according to the number of winning prizes to the general winning mouth and the winning frequency. In addition, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the winning in the general winning opening may be notified by voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. By using such voice notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency at the general winning opening. Further, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the hitting operation handle, the operation button 30 or the like may be vibrated. By using such a bodily sensation notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency at the general winning opening.

The number of winnings and the winning frequency at each general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 5 and also output to a management device such as a hall computer that is communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to manage the number of prizes received at each general prize opening for each machine. This information can be used for maintenance of the gaming machine, for example.

(2) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a sound effect may be output when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a sound effect different from when winning in another winning opening such as a start winning opening Should be output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be made different for each general winning opening. Further, in such a configuration, the sound effect may not be output when a specific general winning opening is won.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution ratio and the production mode of the notice effect may be changed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general prize opening. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning opening,
It is preferable that the execution ratio and the production mode after the change are continued until the execution ratio and the production mode of the notice production change and a predetermined number of times, for example, a predetermined variable display count is executed.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning opening, and a predetermined variable display number, for example, is executed for a predetermined period. Until then, it is better to continue the music after the change. In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning award reaches a predetermined value, a specific music piece (for example, a big hit music piece) may be output. Also, based on the fact that a game ball has won the general prize opening or that the number of winning game balls to the general prize opening has reached a predetermined number, the player reproduces from a plurality of songs (BGM). The music (BGM) may be selectable.

Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the music being played may be continuously output. For example, when the game is controlled in the big hit game state, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the music in the big hit game may be continuously output even after the big hit game state is finished. Moreover, based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening, a stage change that changes the background image of the decorative design and the music (BGM) may be executed. Note that the stage (background image and music) of the transfer destination may be made different depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won.

(5) In the above embodiment, the specific effect executed based on the winning to the general winning opening is described as an example of the change result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect related to the display result of the special figure game. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, an effect may be provided in which a general winning opening where a game ball is not winning among a plurality of general winning openings is displayed, and a character appears when a gaming ball wins the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, despite the game balls being launched into the game area,
When a game ball does not win the general winning opening for a predetermined period, or when the winning frequency of the general winning opening is less than the threshold value, it is displayed on the image display device 5 that no winning has occurred in the general winning opening. A specific notification such as performing may be executed. In addition, when a game ball is not fired only in a specific general winning slot among a plurality of general winning slots for a predetermined period, even though the game ball has been fired in the gaming area, or in a specific general winning slot When the frequency is less than the threshold value, a specific notification such as displaying that no winning for the specific general winning opening has occurred on the image display device 5 may be executed.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a simultaneous performance is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), depending on the number of prizes received in the general winning opening until the simultaneous performance is executed, or simultaneously You may make it perform a specific production | presentation according to the prize-winning to a general winning opening during a production period. Also,
The decorative design may change according to the winning in the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative design, the stop design may change, or a sliding effect may be executed.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, the image display device 5
The objects displayed on the screen may be increased one by one to make it easier to recognize the winnings and the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, only the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening. When the number reaches the predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying “100 breakthrough!” On the image display device 5 may be executed. In addition, when the timing when the number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number is a period in which a gaming machine error is reported based on fraud detection or failure detection, It is assumed that the notification of the gaming machine error is given priority over the specific effect, and the specific effect that has been put on hold after the notification of the gaming machine error is ended.

(9) In the pachinko machine 1, a winning sound is output every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, and during the notification of a gaming machine error, a notification sound of a gaming machine error is given rather than a winning sound. You may make it output preferentially. In addition, every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a winning display is performed on the image display device 5, and during the notification of a gaming machine error, the display of the gaming machine error is given priority over the winning display. You may make it let it.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening and the winning of the game ball to the general prize opening when being controlled to the big hit gaming state The number of award balls paid out based on the above may be added to be displayed on the image display device 5 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state]. In such a configuration,
When the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the prize winning of game balls to the big prize opening is added to [Number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state], the game to the general prize opening is also performed It is preferable to add the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the ball. That is, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be apparently increased. In addition, the [number of winning balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball at the winning jackpot, and [in the jackpot gaming state according to the winning timing of the game ball at the general winning mouth] The display may be updated according to the individual winning timing, such as updating the number of awarded balls.

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of prize balls may be varied according to the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B in the left gaming area 10A, ten winning balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening in the right gaming area 10B. When game balls win the 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D, five prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute an effect of hitting a game ball to win a general winning opening. For example, in a form in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings as in the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the fourteenth effect form, A general winning opening where a game ball has not won among the general winning holes is notified by the image display device 5, and an effect that suggests to the player to aim at the general winning opening where the game ball has not been won is executed. It is good to make it. Moreover, in the form in which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game balls have won in a specific order in the plurality of winning holes as in the eighth effect form and the sixteenth effect form, It is preferable to notify the player of the order of winning by the image display device 5 so that the player can grasp the order. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, “Aim at the first general winning opening!”
After confirming the winning at the general winning opening 50A, next, “Aim at the first starting winning opening!” Is displayed, and after confirming the winning at the first starting winning opening, "Aim for the general winning opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning to the second general winning opening 50B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) In addition, when the game area 10 is provided with a guide path for a game ball toward the general winning opening, and the entrance sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guide path. Based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the entry sensor, it is possible to execute an effect of informing in advance that the game ball will win the general winning opening. Thereby, the possibility that the player misses the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening can be reduced. In addition, a certain period is secured from the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening until the payout of the winning ball is executed,
An effect based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening may be executed within the period.

(14) When a stage on which the game ball can roll is provided below the image display device 5, a general winning opening and an entrance to a guiding path connected to the general winning opening are provided on the stage. It may be configured so that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening or the entrance to the guide route.

(15) You may make it perform the production | presentation in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display apparatus 5 is updated for every prize-winning to a general winning opening. For example, when the character grows up for each prize winning in the general winning opening and reaches a predetermined number of winnings (when the character grows up to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege etc.) is executed. You may do it. In addition, an effect that increases the gauge is executed every time a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, and when a predetermined number of winnings is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege) Etc.) may be executed. In this form of presentation, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. You may be made to do.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of specific effect (variation result notice effect, prefetch notice effect) to be executed differs depending on the gaming state when the winning condition is established, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the example in which the sound is different has been described, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be varied depending on the game state without being limited to such a form. In the probabilistic state and the short-time state, there are many cases where the effect by the game effect lamp 9 and the music to be played are flashy to improve the interest compared to the normal state. You may make it a flashy aspect which is easy to understand for a player.

(17) When a certain number of game balls are fired in the game area 10 but the number of winnings and the winning frequency at the general winning opening are less than the reference value, the player is usually informed. Information on gaming machines that are difficult to perform, such as a latent probability change state, a limiter, etc., may be notified.

(18) In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is satisfied has been described. However, the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory) If the winning condition is satisfied when the total number of the number and the number of the second reserved storage) is 0, neither the fluctuation result notice effect nor the prefetch notice effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game (for example, the appearance of a specific character or the reproduction of specific music) as the specific effect.

(19) In addition, when the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the winning condition is satisfied when the number of reserved memories (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is also 0 Alternatively, the execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and then the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed, or at the timing when the number of stored memories becomes 2 or more. In other words, the specific effect is not immediately executed based on the establishment of the winning condition, and the specific effect that has been suspended based on the start condition of the special game or the start condition of the special game is satisfied. You may make it perform.

(20) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the game ball is not won in the general winning opening (for example, “the number of winnings in the general winning opening is small. Message ”) may be displayed on the image display device 5. Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, only in the period when the information for the store clerk (winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is set to the maintenance mode in which the image display device 5 is displayed. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 that the game ball does not win at the winning opening. A game shop clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. Note that, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, when the number of winnings in the general winning award for a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the image display device 5 displays that the game ball does not win in the general winning award. Anyway. Similarly to the display control of the number of winnings to the general winning a prize, based on the setting by the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30, when the number of winnings to the general winning award in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, You may make it display on the image display apparatus 5 that a game ball does not win a winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, the game ball is excessively won in the general winning opening (for example, “ The message “There are too many winnings” may be displayed on the image display device 5. Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, only in the period when the information for the store clerk (winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is set to the maintenance mode in which the image display device 5 is displayed. It is good to display on the image display device 5 that the game ball has won too much in the winning opening. A game shop clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the winning information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 12 is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the gaming information management device that manages the gaming information, and the gaming information The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a general winning signal when the gaming control microcomputer 100 detects a winning of a game ball in the general winning opening (for example, outputs one pulse signal for each winning). By doing so, the game information management device may manage the number of winnings in the general winning opening for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device, as game information, the number of winnings in a general winning opening per predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) or the number of winnings in a general winning opening per predetermined number of balls (for example, 6000 shots). Alternatively, the winning rate for the general winning opening (the number of winnings for the general winning opening ÷ the number of shots) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, the production control CPU 120 has been described with respect to an example in which the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 5 is increased every time a general winning opening is won. You may make it the aspect of the object currently displayed on the image display apparatus 5 change for every winning prize to a winning opening. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning award). However, the present invention is not limited to such a form.
You may make it alert | report by the alerting | reporting by the sound using L * 8R, the game effect lamp 9, LED for decoration, and lighting / extinguishing control of 7 segments. Further, the present invention is not limited to the form of notifying all the information of the winning number management table, and only the information on winning mouths in which the number of payouts, winning ratios, etc. are not in a predetermined reference range (or within the reference range) is notified. You may do it.

(25) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information in the winning number management table is displayed as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning mouth) as shown in FIG. Although an example of notification (display) in a manner unrelated to the performance performed in the game has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the notification may be performed in a form according to the aspect of the performance performed in the game. good. By notifying in the mode according to the mode of production, it is only necessary to confirm the notification mode as to which type of model information compared to the case of notifying only by table data as shown in FIG. Can be easily grasped. The effect executed in the game may be any effect such as a demonstration screen effect, a notice effect, a reach effect, or a big hit effect, and is not limited to an effect displayed on the image display device 5, but a sound. Or an effect by a lamp. In addition, informing in a manner according to the production mode, for example, a character appearing during a notice production or reach production reads out information in the winning number management table, outputs a sound, Regardless, the resident character that is displayed on the image display device 5 and provides a notice or explanation of the game may read out the information in the winning number management table or output the sound. Further, the information in the winning number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game without being limited to the character image.

(26) In the above embodiment, information for store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning mouth)
Mode selector switch 31 operated to display information of the winning number management table as
However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the player and the game shop clerk are not limited to this form. It may not be operated, and may be provided at a position where only related persons such as an inspector, an inspector, and a manufacturer of the gaming machine can operate. Further, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated by a person other than the above-mentioned player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with 10 counters with a maximum of 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information related to game winning. However, a counter with a maximum of 3 bytes or a counter of 4 bytes at maximum Can also be provided. At this time, the above-mentioned role ratio (%) and role combination (continuity ratio) (%) are displayed on the above-described display monitor 29 based on the total number of acquired balls of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. The calculation method for this is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 76, by a counter composed of a maximum of 4 bytes,
When totaling the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls for winning a feature, and the number of winning balls for consecutive winnings, the top 16
Calculations may be performed using bits. By the way, if it is assumed that the number of acquired balls is 30,000 per day by a 4-byte counter, 4294826225 (4 bytes) / 30
000 (number of balls acquired per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075 /
365 days = about 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51A, the example in which the display monitor 29 is provided in the central portion on the main substrate 11 accommodated in the substrate case 201 has been described.
May be provided at other positions.

For example, as shown in FIG. 77A, a main substrate 11C not provided with a display monitor;
A display substrate 11D may be provided separately from the main substrate 11C, the main substrate 11C and the display substrate 11D may be connected by a harness 11E, and the display monitor 29 may be provided on the display substrate 11D. In this case, the main board 11 </ b> C receives the combination (relation ratio) displayed on the display monitor 29, the calculation of the combination ratio, and the reception of data for use in the calculation. The main board 11C sends the information about the calculated combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, and control for displaying them to the display board 11D in the harness 11E.
To send through. The display substrate 11D may display the combination (community ratio) and the combination ratio on the display monitor 29 based on the data transmitted from the main substrate 11C.

The main substrate 11C and the display substrate 11D are a substrate case 201 that is a caulking substrate case.
It is stored in A. Caulking pins 11B are attached to the substrate case 201A in the same manner as the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. Since the caulking pins 11B are provided, the main substrate 11C and the display substrate 11D are completely enclosed in the substrate case 201A, thereby preventing an illegal act on the main substrate 11C. Also in the substrate case 201A, as with the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 51A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29.

As shown in FIG. 77B, the display substrate 11D may be provided outside the substrate case 201B which is a caulking substrate case, and the main substrate 11C may be enclosed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display substrate 11D is connected to the main substrate 11C by a harness 11E.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77C, the display substrate 11D may be sealed in the substrate case 201C, and the main substrate 11C may be sealed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display substrate 11D is connected to the main substrate 11C by a harness 11E. The substrate case 20
Also in 1C, as in the case of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 51A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29. A substrate case 20 enclosing the display substrate 11D.
1C may not be a caulking board case, but may be a caulking board case.

As shown in FIG. 77 (D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 50 (A), and a caulking use record is written on the label 11R. Also good. Here, the label 11R may be disposed at a position where a part of the display monitor 29 is hidden. As described above, since a part of the display monitor 29 is hidden by the label 11R, for example, when the glass door frame 3a is opened, the player cannot easily visually recognize the combination (unit ratio) or the combination ratio. Can be. Even when the label 11R is pasted, it may be pasted at a position where the display monitor 29 is not hidden.

Moreover, in said embodiment, as a movable accessory, the big prize opening ((
Electric actors such as (Attacker) and 2nd start prize opening (electric Chu) are used, but instead of these electric actors, so-called mechanical accessories that open and close by the weight of the game ball are used as movable accessories. Also good. The display monitor 29 uses a 7-segment LED.
Instead of 7 segments, dot display, display screen, or the like may be used. Also, instead of LEDs,
A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided with a four-digit display unit of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D, but the number of digits is not limited to four digits, and may be another number of digits. For example, it may be 2 digits, or 8 digits or 10 digits.

In addition, as shown in the above-described embodiment, the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 is opened regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 29, for example, the display of the combination (continuity ratio) or the combination ratio. There is a case to deal with error cancellation. For example, a replenishment mechanism for replenishing game balls (supplement balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 2 in order to pay out game balls. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball clogging occurs, the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 may be opened to eliminate the ball clogging and perform error cancellation. When the error is released by opening the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the combination (relationship) or ratio of the display monitor 29 is not limited. Etc. may not be displayed.

In addition, at this time, in order to prevent the display monitor 29 from displaying the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, and the like, there is no error in the display of the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, etc. As a condition. The error with respect to the display of the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, etc. here is, for example, FIG.
3 for detecting an abnormal operation determined in step S101, acquiring winning information during business hours determined in step S104, and detecting a predetermined number of winnings per unit time or more determined in step S106. Good. As long as there is no error in the display of such associations (association ratios) and ratios,
It is possible to suppress the situation in which information such as the connection ratio and the role ratio is seen.

Also, regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 is opened to cancel the error. Alternatively, it may wait for a predetermined period of time, for example, 1 minute, until the ratio is displayed, and display it after the predetermined time has elapsed. After canceling the occurrence of an error, the cause of the error cannot be completely removed, and the same error often occurs. By displaying the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, etc. on the display monitor 29 after a predetermined time has elapsed, even when such an error occurs, the player can receive information such as the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, etc. The situation where it is seen can be suppressed. The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be a time longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or may be a time shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, a predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of a ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of a failure of the image display device 5, the predetermined period of the ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

The main board 11 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 29, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as “error display”) for displaying an error. This error indicator is preferably arranged at a position away from the display monitor 29. Specifically, the display monitor 29 is arranged at the position of 1/3 on the right side of the main board 11 and the error indicator is the main board 1.
1 may be arranged at a position 1/3 on the left side. In order to make the display monitor 29 easy to understand, the position of the display monitor 29 on the main board 11 may be printed on the board case 201 with characters, or a seal may be attached to the board case 201. You may keep it. The display monitor 29 may be provided on a payout control board that is a part of the main board 11.

(29) In the above embodiment,
We have explained that the ratio (%) and the combination (linkage) (%) are calculated and displayed on the display monitor using a pachinko machine as an example.
) Or a combination (link ratio) (%) may be calculated, and these values may be displayed on a display monitor provided in the slot machine. The display monitor can be provided on the main board of the slot machine, for example, similarly to the above gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1.

For example, the role ratio or the combination (interaction ratio) in the slot machine is a combination of a game value (game value, also referred to as “medal” hereinafter) paid out as the slot machine game progresses. It is calculated by whether or not the machine is in operation and whether or not the slot machine is equipped with an accessory other than the first type special accessory as an accessory.

For example, the first type special feature, the second type special feature, and the normal feature are set as the features.
If the slot machine is not equipped with a 1st type special character as a character and only other characters such as normal characters are loaded, the character ratio is the operation of the character relative to the total number of medals paid out. Calculated based on the number of medals paid out. In addition, if the slot machine is equipped with only the first type special character as a character and no character other than the first type special character is loaded, the combination of the medal is the total payout of medals. It is calculated by the number of medals to be paid out during the operation of the combination with respect to the number.

Hereinafter, an example of a method for calculating the combination (run ratio) (%) in the slot machine will be described. Here, an example will be described in which the first type special combination is in the special gaming state and only the first type special combination is mounted as the combination. The slot machine can start changing the symbol by setting the number of bets, and a winning occurs according to the result of the changing symbol. For winnings in slot machines, shift to a special game state that increases the probability of occurrence of a prize-winning with the addition of gaming value, a re-game winning that allows the change of symbols to be started without setting the number of bets, and a prize-winning There is a bonus prize. Here, the combination (%) of slots in the slot machine is the cumulative value of gaming value obtained by awarding a prize based on the result of the change in the symbol during the period in which the symbol is changed a predetermined number of times ( The total amount of gaming value obtained as a result of the awarding of winnings as a result of changes in symbols during the period of transition to the special gaming state (corresponding to the total number of balls acquired in the pachinko gaming machines mentioned above) It is expressed as a ratio of the number of consecutive winning balls in a pachinko machine). For example, in a period in which 6000 symbols are changed, if the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained in the period, is 16000, the prize is awarded in the period when the game state is shifted to the special gaming state. If the number of medals obtained by 9000 is 9000, 9000
0.56 obtained by dividing 1 by 16000 is the consecutive (running ratio) (%).

In addition, the main board in the slot machine is provided, for example, at the back of the outer frame. For this reason, when the main frame is viewed from the outside of the slot machine when the door frame (front door) of the slot machine is opened, the main board is different from the gaming machine 1. Since the reel and the like are stored in the outer frame of the slot machine, the outer frame of the slot machine is often larger than the pachinko gaming machine. Further, due to its structure, the main board in the slot machine is often attached to the back of the outer frame (the inner side surface of the back plate). For this reason, when the door frame of the slot machine is opened, there is a possibility that there is not enough light reaching the main board. Therefore, when a display monitor is attached to the main board, information displayed on the display monitor ( For numerical values and characters, it is preferable to display brightly with a large amount of light.

Further, in the slot machine, a display monitor is arranged so that it can be easily seen from an oblique direction with respect to the main board provided in the back of the outer frame. For example, when the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the arrangement that is easy to visually recognize from an oblique direction is an arrangement that faces the front as viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By arranging the display monitor in this way, salesclerks etc.
When performing the task of checking the ratio, the store clerk or the like can perform the task of checking the role ratio by simply opening the gaming machine frame 3 slightly. . Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

When the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the arrangement facing the front as viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame has an inclined surface like the base member 129A shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to set it as the aspect which attached the display monitor to the inclined surface of the base member in which the surface faced the open part between a door frame and an outer frame.
Alternatively, the inclined surface may be a buried inclined surface formed on the main substrate. In addition to these, a display monitor may be provided on a base member such as one of the base members 129A to 129I on which the display monitors 130A to 130I are provided. When a display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor may be provided directly on the main board so that the main board and the display monitor are accommodated in the board case, or the display monitor is provided outside the board case containing the main board. May be provided.

In addition, these display monitors may be provided in an adjustment unit that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By adjusting the display monitor to the adjustment means that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the open part between the door frame and the outer frame, it is possible to adjust according to the desire of the game hall where the slot machine is installed. It can be carried out. The adjusting means may be a manual type or an electric type.

The main board of the slot machine is provided at the back of the outer frame, but may be provided at other positions. For example, it may be provided on the right side as viewed from the player side inside the outer frame, or may be provided on the left side. When it is provided on the right side of the outer frame, it is provided on the side corresponding to the open part between the door frame and the outer frame. be able to.

Also, in the slot machine, a main board may be provided on the back side of the door frame as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine. However, there is no slot machine equivalent to the game board of a pachinko machine, and the door frame is provided with a visual window for visually recognizing the reel.
What is necessary is just to provide a main board | substrate in the position which avoided this visual recognition window. Also, in a pachinko gaming machine, instead of providing a main board on the back side of the game board, a main board may be provided in the back or left and right sides of the outer frame as in a slot machine.

In addition, although the example which displays on the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided in the main board | substrate was shown the calculated combination ratio (%) and continuous combination (continuous ratio) (%), not only this but payout control You may make it provide a display monitor in other board | substrates, such as a board | substrate, a game board surface, and the frame (base frame) for game machines. Further, the display device is not limited to a dedicated display monitor for displaying the role ratio (%) and the role combination (connection ratio) (%), but an existing display device (for example, the image display device 5 for displaying an error). 7-segment display, a credit display in a slot machine, a payout number display, etc.) may be used to display predetermined information such as a winning ratio (%) and a winning combination (continuous ratio) (%).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine described above, the predetermined information is a combination (ream) and a combination (cumulative combination (relation) and accumulated combination), but other information may be used. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the predetermined information may be the number of game balls to be paid out (= the number of prize balls). Also, in slot machines, machine discount (= (medal payout number / medal insertion number))
× 100) or the difference between the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals. Further, these numerical values may be information calculated for each predetermined number of games and each predetermined number of medals. In addition, predetermined information such as a role combination (continuity ratio), a role ratio, and a machine discount is stored for a predetermined period, for example, 400 games
It may be calculated during 00 games, and predetermined information for each number of these games may be displayed. In this case, the predetermined period may be displayed together.

Some slot machines have so-called settings. The setting is a numerical value obtained by dividing the probability in the slot machine according to the stage.
Stages are provided. Information such as the role (ratio) and role ratio displayed on the display monitor as the predetermined information may be displayed for each setting, or the settings may be displayed when displaying for each setting. Also good.

Some slot machines can execute one game with different numbers of inserted medals (number of bets). For example, the number of inserted sheets (number of bets) for executing one game is 1 to 3
One game can be executed by selecting one of the cards and inserting the selected number of medals. In such a slot machine, information such as a combination (competition ratio) and a combination ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each inserted number (number of bets). There are also slot machines in which the required number (the number of bets) varies depending on the game state. For example, there is a slot machine in which the required number of inserted cards is 2 when the gaming state is in bonus, and the required number of inserted cards is 3 when the gaming state is not in bonus. In such a slot machine, it is possible to display information such as a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information for each relationship between the gaming state and the number of inserted games.

Also, in the slot machine, as the predetermined information, in addition to the combination (combined ratio) and ratio calculated based on the normal bonus, special bonus, etc., for example, the slot machine gaming status is advantageous other than during bonus. When sections and unfavorable sections are set, the ratio between the number of medals paid out in these advantageous sections and the number of medals paid out in the advantageous sections and non-favorable sections is displayed. Also good. In addition, the display monitor includes, as predetermined information, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as “the number of advantageous section games”) and the number of games in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section, in addition to the combination ratio. A ratio (hereinafter referred to as “advantage / non-advantage ratio”) may be displayed.
The number of continuation games and the advantageous / non-advantage ratio of the advantageous section may be displayed on a dedicated display monitor different from the combination ratio (continuous ratio), or may be displayed with a time difference using a common display monitor. Good.
For example, using a common display monitor, the number of advantageous segment games-> advantageous / non-advantage ratio-> short-term roles (
Display ratio) → short-term combination ratio → cumulative combination series (interconnection ratio) → accumulated combination ratio → number of advantageous section games →...

Further, the number of advantageous section games may be the number of games in the advantageous section being continued during the advantageous section, or may be the predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000 G in the past. Or it is good also as the number of games of the advantageous section performed on the predetermined period, for example, that day. The advantageous / non-advantage ratio may be a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000 G in the past, or may be an advantageous / non-advantage ratio for a predetermined period, for example, that day.

Further, the ratio between the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the advantageous section and the ratio of the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the non-advantaged section may be displayed. In short, the ratio between medals paid out in the advantageous section and medals paid out in the non-favorable section may be calculated and displayed. There are various ways of thinking about the relationship between the advantageous section and the non-favorable section. By reducing the medal payout ratio in the advantageous section, fluctuations in increase / decrease in medals can be reduced. Further, in order to prevent the advantageous section from being too long, a predetermined restriction may be provided on the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined number of games, an upper limit of medals paid out in the advantageous section, a machine discount in the advantageous section, and the like. .

The advantageous section is a section in which the ratio of the number of paid-out medals to the number of inserted medals (machine discount) is higher than that of the non-favorable section. Since the machine discount is high, this is an advantageous section for the player. As an advantageous section, in addition to bonuses in which normal and special actors are operating, during replay time (RT), assist time (AT),
For example, during assist replay time (ART). Machine discount in the advantageous section often exceeds 100%, but may be less than 100% (so-called reduced RT
etc). If the machine discount in the advantageous section is less than 100%, the medals will be consumed as the game continues, but the player will be able to compete against the unfavorable section in that the medal consumption rate will be lower. It will be advantageous.

The term “during replay time” means, for example, a state in which the winning probability (winning probability) of replay is higher than in a state other than during the replay time. During the replay time, the replay probability is higher than during the non-replay time, so that the consumption of medals can be reduced, so that the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

During the assist time, for example, when a condition device that displays a winning combination on the active line when a predetermined condition such as a predetermined operation procedure is satisfied, the operation procedure is navigated. . The navigation of the operating procedure includes, for example, navigation of the stop order when stopping the three reels in a predetermined stop order, or navigating the pattern when stopping and displaying a predetermined pattern. There is. During the assist time, the operation procedure is not navigated in any state other than during the assist time, so it is uncertain whether or not the operation procedure is executed, but during the assist time, the operation procedure navigates. Therefore, as long as the player follows the navigation, the winning combination can be aligned with the active line. Therefore, the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

During the assist replay time is a state in which the replay time and the assist time are executed simultaneously. The slot machine is designed so that the game progresses by increasing / decreasing medals by combining these advantageous sections and non-advantage sections. Here, for each advantageous section such as during the bonus, during the replay time, during the assist time, and during the assist replay time, although there are advantages over the non-advantageous sections, there are cases where the degree of advantage is small.

The advantageous sections for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be all or part of them. For example, in a slot machine in which a plurality of advantageous sections are provided as the advantageous sections, the advantageous sections for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be only the advantageous sections in which the machine discount exceeds 100%. Moreover, even if it is an advantageous section of the same kind, you may make it change whether it is set as the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information by transition conditions. For example, in a slot machine that shifts during the replay time immediately after the bonus is ended and after a predetermined number of games, for example, 1000 games have elapsed since the bonus ended, the replay that has shifted immediately after the bonus is ended An advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed during the time as the predetermined information is used, and the ratio displayed as the predetermined information is calculated during the replay time after 1000 games have passed since the bonus period ended. For this reason, it may not be an advantageous section.

During the replay time shifted to immediately after the bonus is over, the player who has won many medals in the bonus is in a so-called chance replay time that gives him a chance to acquire further medals. On the other hand, during the replay time after 1000 games have passed since the bonus time ended, the player who lost many medals is given a relief replay time that gives relief of the lost medals. An advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information during such a chance replay time, and an advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information during the relief replay time You may make it not.

Further, when calculating other values such as a combination (continuity ratio), a combination ratio, or a machine discount in the slot machine, a predetermined number of medals, for example, three medals are inserted and one game is executed. The calculation may be performed on the assumption that three medals have been paid out. Or, regarding re-games, it is assumed that the game was not played, and the combination in the slot machine
Other numerical values such as a ratio, a machine ratio, etc. may be performed.

The ring buffer provided in the RAM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine has 600
The number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 0 winning balls is stored. On the other hand, the ring buffer in the slot machine may store, for example, the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section for each predetermined number of medals paid out. The number of medals to be paid out between the section and the non-advantage section may be stored. The predetermined number here is, for example, 50.
It may be 0 or 1000. Other appropriate numbers may be used. Further, the predetermined number of games may be 100 games or 400 games. If the maximum payout number of medals paid out in one game is 15, the maximum payout number of medals paid out in 400 games is 6000. Therefore, the maximum payout number in 400 games is 2
It can be stored with a margin in a byte storage area.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub-side) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one change is made when the change is started. Although an example in which a pattern designation command is transmitted has been shown, a variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) is so-called in the case where the first command is not reached (reach is not reached), such as presence / absence of quasi-continuity, presence / absence of sliding effect, etc. Before the second stop)
A command (e.g., a previous variation pattern designation command) indicating the variation time and variation mode (e.g., a previous variation pattern) is transmitted, and the second command has reached reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect ( If the reach is not reached, a command (for example, a post-variation pattern designation command) indicating a variation time or a variation mode (for example, a post-variation pattern) of a so-called second stop may be transmitted.

In this case, the effect control board may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing may be selected by the effect control board. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. Thus, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

Only one type of out-of-order symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “-”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. . Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various rendering operations including, etc. can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, it may be distributed in a pre-installed manner in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

Moreover, in the said Example, the 1st starting port (Jeso) and the general winning opening (Sode) which are totaled
The number of prize balls won by winning the prize (general prize ball number), ordinary electric role award ball number (electric chew prize ball number), and special electric role award ball number (attacker prize ball number) are recorded in the ring buffer. There is a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and each set is updated. However, instead of this format, only the total cumulative number as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. It can be a format with various types. Specifically, RWM10000 for total cumulative storage and RWM1000 for total cumulative storage
1 and the ratio (synonymous with “competition (relation ratio)” in the above embodiment), information on the game winning in order to display the ratio (first start port (heso) and general winning opening (so The number of award balls (general award ball number), ordinary electric role award ball number (electric chew award ball number), special electric role award ball number (attacker award ball number)) for RWM10000 and 10001 To remember. Furthermore, by deleting the information related to game winnings at a predetermined opportunity for the total cumulative storage RWM10000, the linkage ratio calculated based on the total from the erased timing to the present,
Roles can be displayed as short-term run ratio and short-term role ratio, RWM1000 for total cumulative storage
The run ratio and role ratio calculated based on the total of 1 can be displayed as a cumulative run ratio and a cumulative hand ratio. With this configuration, it is only necessary to have a plurality of storage areas for accumulating and storing information related to game winnings, and a process for storing and updating a certain amount of information like a ring buffer is unnecessary. This is preferable.

As a predetermined trigger, for example, power ON / OFF can be triggered.
According to this, it is possible to tabulate information related to winning a game from the power ON, that is, it is possible to display a daily run ratio and a role ratio as a short-term run ratio and a short-term role ratio. In this case, the cumulative value of the total cumulative storage RWM 10000 when erased is saved.
If the RWM 10002 is provided and the accumulated value of the RWM 10002 is displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term role ratio, it is possible to display the short-term continuous ratio and short-term role ratio for one day before the power is turned on. By using a real-time clock or the like as a predetermined opportunity, for example, one day,
It is also possible to accurately aggregate short-term consecutive ratios and short-term roles ratios such as one hour.

Moreover, as a predetermined opportunity, it can be set as the opportunity regarding a game, such as a setting change, a door opening, or a touch sensor detection of a handle | steering-wheel. According to this, even if it is not a period of one day as when the power is turned on, it is summarized (for example, between setting change and setting change or between door opening and door opening). It is preferable because the role ratio can be displayed. Further, the same effect can be obtained even if the predetermined trigger is triggered when the number of times the demo screen is displayed or the number of big hits reaches the predetermined number.
Instead of the configuration having two RWMs such as RWM10000 and 10001, two regions may be formed in the RWM region of the memory space.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 79 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, an area 20000 for collecting information related to game wins, an area B1 for storing cumulative results of information related to game wins for the 6000th game, and a cumulative result for the 12000th game are stored. Area B2, 1
8000 ... Area B1 for storing a cumulative result of information related to winning of the 60000th game
0 is provided. In the area 20000, information related to winning a game is added and updated, and on the condition that the number of award balls is 6000th, it is related to the winning of a game accumulated and stored in the area 20000. Information (the number of award balls (general award ball number) by winning a prize at the first start gate (heso) and the general prize opening (sode)) Number (attacker ball number)) is stored in the area B1. Furthermore, on the condition that the number of winning balls is 12000, the information stored in the area B1 is moved to the area B2,
Information related to the winning of the game accumulated and stored in the area 20000 is stored in the area B1. In this way, the information of the area 20000 is put into the area B1 every 6000th, and the information of the other areas is shifted. After the number of prize balls reaches 66000, the area B1
Control is performed so that the information related to the winning of the game stored in 0 is erased and the information in the area B9 is transferred to the area B10.

By configuring in this way, the connection ratio and role ratio calculated based on the total of the area 20000 can be displayed as the cumulative connection ratio and the cumulative role ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B10 from the area 20000, the latest 60000 pieces (that is, approximately 10 hours) can be displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term winning ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B1 from the area 20000, the most recent 6000 pieces (that is, approximately one hour) of the connection ratio and role ratio can be displayed as the short-term connection ratio and the short-term role ratio.

Further, instead of the configuration as shown in FIG. 79, only the region B10 may be provided as shown in FIG. According to this, it is not possible to obtain a detailed connection ratio and role ratio of about one hour, but since the latest 60000 pieces (approximately 10 hours) of short-term connection ratio and short-term role ratio can be displayed, the capacity is also increased. Less is preferable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 81 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it has a total cumulative storage RWM30000 and a total cumulative storage RWM30001, and displays information relating to game winnings in order to display the run ratio and role ratio (first
Number of award balls (general prize balls), prizes for ordinary electric roles (number of electric chew prizes), special electric prize balls (attacker prize) Number of balls)) RWM3000
Accumulate and store in 0, 30001.
The total cumulative storage RWM30000 accumulates and stores the number of prize balls from the first, whereas the total cumulative storage RWM30001 waits without storing the first to 60000 prize balls. In addition, the cumulative number of prize balls from the 60001th is stored. According to this, the difference between the total cumulative storage RWM30000 and the total cumulative storage RWM30001 is 60000.
By subtracting the total cumulative storage RWM 30001 from the total cumulative storage RWM 30000, the continuous ratio and role ratio for 60000 units can be displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term role ratio. Also, the connection ratio and role ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative storage RWM30000 are:
It can be displayed as a cumulative run ratio and a cumulative hand ratio.

In the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 82 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it includes a cumulative counter 40000, 40001, and a total cumulative counter 40002. In the total cumulative counter 40002, information on the winning of a game (the first start port and the general) in order to display the linkage ratio and the role ratio The number of award balls (general award balls), normal electric role award balls (electric chew award balls number), special electric role award balls (attacker award number))) Accumulate and store from the first number. Total counter 4
The run ratio and the role ratio calculated based on the total of 0002 can be displayed as the cumulative run ratio and the cumulative hand ratio.

On the other hand, the total counter 40000, 40001, 600
The run ratio and role ratio for 00 are displayed as the short-term run ratio and the short-term play ratio. More specifically, first, the cumulative counter 40000 starts counting from the first number of prize balls, and clears when the number of prize balls reaches 60000. On the other hand, the cumulative counter 40001 starts counting from the 30,000th and clears when the number of prize balls reaches the 90000th. Then, when trying to calculate the short-term run ratio and the short-term role ratio for 60000 pieces, for example, the 30001 to 60000 pieces are calculated based on the total of the cumulative counter 40000 and the 60001 to 9000 pieces.
In the 0th, the calculation is made based on the total of the cumulative counter 40001.
Thus, since the cumulative counters 40000 and 40001 are tabulated so that the number of prize balls is shifted by 30,000, when trying to display the short-term run ratio and the short-term role ratio, at least within 30000 pieces, That is, it is possible to display the short-term consecutive ratio and short-term role ratio within five hours. This is preferable because it is possible to suppress an increase in capacity and to display a relatively short-term continuous ratio and short-term role ratio.

(Performance display)
Further, in the gaming machine 1, performance information (described later) can be displayed instead of or in addition to the display of the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio. Hereinafter, displaying performance information is also referred to as performance display. In the gaming machine 1, for example, a display monitor provided on the main board 11 (the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110).
etc. The performance display is executed in (described later).

83 and 84 are explanatory diagrams related to performance information. FIG. 83A shows an example of performance information items displayed by the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 can display the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value as performance information, as shown in the item name column of FIG. The real-time base value of the item number “bL” is a base value (real-time value during measurement) for every 60000 outs in a normal state. More specifically, the real-time base value is the number of game balls used (launched) in a normal state up to 60000 (0 to 5).
9999), a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls being measured. The previous cumulative base value of the item number “b6” is a base value for every 60000 outs (cumulative value measured last time) in the normal state. More specifically, the previous cumulative base value is the number of game balls used (launched) in a normal state and is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the previously measured number of 60000 game balls. .

The normal state in the performance display is a state managed or controlled by the game state flag described above. Specifically, it is a state in which both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off (except that the round gaming flag is on). That is, in the performance display, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are off is referred to as a normal state. The probability variation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation state. The time reduction flag is a flag indicating whether or not the time reduction state is set. The round gaming flag will be described later.

In addition, although the normal state in the performance display has been described that the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are all off, other displays (the main board 11 side and the effect control board side 12
In the display related to the number of winning balls, etc.), the state when all of the probability variation flag, the hourly flag, and the round game flag are off may be set as the normal state. For example, FIG.
The items B1 to B4 may be tabulated when all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are in an off state. Further, for example, in connection with FIG. 51 (B), it has been described that the combination (run ratio) and the combination ratio may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. You may make it calculate and display a combination (continuity ratio) and a combination ratio in the case where all of the round gaming flags are off).

FIG. 83B shows values that are aggregated (updated) on the game control microcomputer 100 side for performance display. The base value shown in FIG. 83 (A) is calculated based on the value shown in FIG. 83 (B). Specifically, the base value is based on the number of winning balls for all winning holes (the number of winning balls by winning the first general winning opening 50A, the winning number of the second general winning opening 50B) with respect to the number of shots (60000). The number of winning balls, the number of winning balls by winning the third general winning opening 50C, the number of winning balls by winning the fourth general winning opening 50D, the number of winning balls by the first starting winning opening, the number of winning balls by the second starting winning opening, This is the ratio (%) of the number of winning balls from the big prize opening. That is, in the gaming machine 1, each value shown in FIG. 83B is totaled in the normal state, and the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value shown in FIG. Calculate and display.

FIG. 83C shows a display mode of performance information. In the gaming machine 1, performance information is displayed on the display monitor provided on the main board 11 in the display mode shown in FIG. Specifically, when displaying the real-time base value, the gaming machine 1 displays “bL.” Indicating that it is the real-time base value in the upper two digits out of all four digits (flashing or lighting). ,
Numbers (%) or “-” in the range of “00” to “99” are displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of all four digits. Of the 4 digits, the lower 2 digits are the original real-time base value.
In some cases, a real-time base value is displayed by displaying all four digits including digits. In addition, when displaying the previous cumulative base value, the gaming machine 1 displays “b6.” Indicating that it is the previous cumulative base value in the upper two digits among all four digits (flashing or lighting), Numbers (%) or “-” in the range of “00” to “99” are displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of all four digits. In addition,
The lower two digits of the total four digits are the original previous cumulative base value, but the previous cumulative base value may be displayed by displaying all four digits including the upper two digits.

FIG. 84 (A) shows sections (total section, evaluation section) corresponding to the total number of outs (total number of fired parts). The “factory shipment test section” in FIG. 84A is a section with a total number of outs of less than 300. The “first section” is the first section among the sections managed for each total out number of 60000 pieces (0 to 59999 pieces). The “second section” is the second section among the above sections. The “third section” is the third section among the above sections. In FIG. 84A, the subsequent sections are omitted.

84 (B) to 84 (F) show a display mode of performance information corresponding to each section (and the number in the section). In each of FIGS. 84 (B) to 84 (F), the display mode of the real-time base value is on the left side, the display mode of the previous cumulative base value is on the right side, It shows that it will be switched.

FIG. 84B shows a display mode of performance information displayed in the factory shipment test section shown in FIG. In the factory shipment test section, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), a real-time base value in which the upper two digits are “bL. (Flashing)” and the lower two digits are “-(lit)” The previous cumulative base value in which the two digits are “b6. (Flashing)” and the lower two digits are “-(lit)” is displayed alternately every 5 seconds. Note that the radial highlight shown in the upper two digits “bL.” On the left side and the upper two digits “b6.” On the right side in FIG. It shows that. 84 (C), 84 (D), 8
The same applies to 4 (E), FIG. 105, and FIG.

In FIG. 84C, the total number of outs is 0 to 599 in the first section shown in FIG.
The display mode of the performance information displayed when there are up to nine is shown. When the total number of outs is 0-5999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the upper 2 digits are “bL. (Flashing)” and the lower 2 digits are numerical values. Real-time base value that is lit (%) (“32 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 84C) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Flashing)”
”And the last cumulative base value in which the lower two digits are“-(lit) ”are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

FIG. 84D shows that the total number of outs in the first section shown in FIG.
The display mode of the performance information displayed when the number is up to 5,9999 is shown. In the first section, when the total number of outs is 6000 to 59999, FIG.
As shown in D), the upper two digits are “bL. (Lit)” and the lower two digits are numerical value (%) lit (“33 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 84D). The base value and the previous cumulative base value in which the upper 2 digits are “b6. (Flashing)” and the lower 2 digits are “-(lit)”
It is displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

In FIG. 84E, the total number of outs in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG.
The display mode of the performance information displayed when the number is up to 999 is shown. In the second and subsequent sections, when the total number of outs is 0 to 5999, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the upper 2 digits are “bL. Illumination of numerical value (%) (Fig. 84
In the example of (E), the real-time base value is “34 (lights up)” and the upper two digits are “b6.
(Lighting) "and the lower two digits are numerical values (%) (" 33 (Lighting) "in the example of FIG. 84E)
And the previous cumulative base value are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

FIG. 84 (F) shows that the total number of outs in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 84 (A) is 600.
A display mode of performance information displayed when the number is 0 to 59999 is shown. 2
In the section after the first time, when the total number of out is 6000 to 59999,
As shown in FIG. 84 (F), the upper 2 digits are “bL. (Lit)” and the lower 2 digits are numerical values (%
) Lighting (“34 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 84 (F)) and the upper 2 digits are “b6. (Lighting)” and the lower 2 digits are numerical values (%). The previous cumulative base value that is “33 (lights up” in the example of FIG. 84F) is displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 when performing performance display will be described. FIG. 85 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 86 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 when performing the performance display described above may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, for example.

In FIG. 85, reference numeral 700 in the vicinity of the tip end of the guide rail (near the exit of the game ball) is a shot ball detector including a shot detection sensor 700A (see FIG. 86). FIG. 85 shows an example in which the firing ball detector 700 is arranged near the exit of the guide rail. Position), a position closer to the guide rail hitting device (in the vicinity of the entrance), etc.) may be arranged. Although the game effect lamp 9 and the operation buttons 30 are partially different in appearance, FIG.
5, the same components as those in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 1, and the description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 1) is omitted.

In FIG. 86, reference numeral 1130 denotes a display monitor that displays performance information. Reference numeral 700
A is a launch detection sensor. 86, the same configuration as in FIG. 49 is shown in FIG.
The same reference numerals as those in FIG.

Subsequently, the operation of the gaming machine 1 in the case of performing performance display will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 94.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of special figure processing (also referred to as special symbol process). In the special drawing process shown in FIG. 87, the CPU 103 executes a state control process (step S1101A). The state control process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a start winning determination process (step S1102). In the start winning determination process, the CPU
103, for example, based on detection signals from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, determines the presence or absence of a start prize, determines the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice effect, etc. (Transmission number notification command, start prize determination result designation command, etc.) are set for transmission.

Following the start winning determination process in step S1102, the CPU 103 executes the RAM 102 (R
According to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit in the AM 102)
One of the processes in steps S1110 to S1117 is selected and executed.

The special symbol normal process in step S1110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal processing, the first is based on the presence / absence of holding data (holding storage).
It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result is set to “big hit” using the random number for determining the special figure display result, and if it is determined to be “big hit”, the random number for determining the big hit type is used. Which jackpot type is to be determined, and a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is determined. In the special symbol normal process, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 102) is set to the on state, and “big hit” is set. Then, when determined, the value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit in the RAM 102). In the special symbol normal process, for example, when a confirmed special symbol is determined, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”.

The variation pattern setting process of step S1111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In the variation pattern setting process, processing for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types using a random number for variation pattern determination is performed. In the variation pattern setting process, for example, when a variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

The special symbol variation process in step S1112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In the special symbol change process, a process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts changing, and the like are performed. . In the special symbol variation process, when the elapsed time since the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

The special symbol stop process in step S1113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop and display the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result for a predetermined time (special symbol fixed display time). Etc. are performed. In the special symbol stop process, when the special figure fixed display time has elapsed, the special figure process flag value is set to “0” or “4” with reference to the big hit flag.
Specifically, when the big hit flag is on (when the confirmed special symbol is a big hit symbol), the big hit flag is cleared and turned off, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “4”.
On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (when the confirmed special symbol is a missing symbol), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

The big hit release pre-processing in step S1114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit release pre-processing, a process of waiting until the end of the execution time of the fanfare effect (also called the big hit start time production) executed on the side of the production control board 12 elapses (the big hit start time production wait time) elapses. In addition, after the elapse of the big hit start production waiting time, the setting for making the big winning opening open is performed. In the pre-opening process for the big hit, when the setting is made to open the big winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

The big hit release process in step S1115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, a process for determining whether a condition for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state is established (elapse of the big prize opening opening upper limit time or the upper limit number of prizes),
After the condition is established, a setting for returning the special winning opening to the closed state is performed. If the setting for returning the big prize opening to the closed state is made in the big hit opening process, the value of the special figure process flag is set to “
Update to 6 ″.

The big hit release post-processing in step S1116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the post-hit opening process, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round for opening the big winning opening has reached a predetermined number is performed. In the processing after the big hit release, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the predetermined number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. Update to

The big hit end process in step S1117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a process of waiting until the end of the execution time of the ending effect (also referred to as a jackpot end effect) executed on the side of the effect control board 12 (a jackpot end effect waiting time) elapses. Is done. In the big hit end processing, when the big hit end presentation waiting time elapses, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the state control process executed in step S1101A of FIG. In the state control process shown in FIG. 88, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S2001). Step S2
When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 at 001 (step S2001; YES)
The CPU 103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 102) is on (step S2002). As described above, the round game flag is one of the flags that define the normal state. If the round game flag is on in step S2002 (step S2002; YES),
The state control process ends.

On the other hand, if the round game flag is OFF in step S2002 (step S20).
02; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 102) is on (step S20).
03). The state change switching waiting flag is a flag provided for setting the state change switching waiting time (described later) only once when the round game flag is off.

If the state change switching wait flag is off in step S2003 (step S2003).
NO), the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting time (step S2004).
Specifically, the CPU 103 is a RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102).
A predetermined state change switching waiting time is set as the timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer provided in the. Step S20
The state change switching waiting time set in the process of 04 is a time shorter than the big hit start production waiting time set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 89). Although details will be described later, time T1 in FIG. 95 is a big hit start production waiting time, and time T in FIG.
2 is a state change switching waiting time.

Subsequent to step S2004, the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting flag to an on state (step S2005). Then, the state control process ends.

If the state change switching wait flag is on in step S2003 (step S2003).
YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S2006). In the process of step S2006, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S2004 has timed out (whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). That's fine. Step S2006
If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed (step S2006; NO), the state control process is terminated.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S2006 (step S2006).
YES), the CPU 103 clears the state change switching waiting flag to turn it off (step S2007), and sets the round game flag to on (step S2008).
).

Subsequent to step S2008, the CPU 103 performs setting for ending the time reduction state or the probability variation state (step S2009). In the process of step S2009, the CPU 103
Processing such as clearing the time reduction flag or the probability variation flag to turn it off is executed. Further, in the process of step S2009, when a value (a value other than 0) is set to the probability variation count value which is a stored value of the probability variation counter provided in the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 102). May execute a process of initializing the probability variation count value to “0”.
Further, in the process of step S2009, when a value (a value other than 0) is set to the short-time count value that is the stored value of the short-time counter provided in the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 102). May execute a process of initializing the count value of time reduction to “0”. Note that the time reduction counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the remaining number of times) of a special game in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the remaining number of times) of the special figure game for which the probability variation control is performed.

Subsequent to step S2009, the CPU 103 starts from the main board 11 to the effect control board 1.
Settings for transmitting a game state designation command to 2 are performed (step S2015).
Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. Then, the state control process ends.

In the state control process shown in FIG. 88, the game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state has changed or not, but when the game state has changed (
For example, the gaming state designation command may be transmitted only in the case of a change from the short-time state or the probability changing state to the normal state. On the side of the effect control board 12, the current gaming state is specified based on the gaming state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but instead,
The current gaming state may be specified based on a hit start designation command or the like. The same applies to the state control process shown in FIG.

When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S2001 (step S20)
01; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (
Step S2010). If the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S2010 (step S2010; NO), the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S2010 (step S201)
0; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is ON (
Step S2011). If the round game flag is off in step S2011 (
Step S2002; NO), the state control process ends.

If the round game flag is on in step S2011 (step S2011;
YES), the CPU 103 clears the round gaming flag and turns it off (step S2013).

Subsequent to step S2013, the CPU 103 performs setting for starting the time reduction state or the probability variation state (step S2014). In the process of step S2014, the CPU 103
Depending on the jackpot type (value stored in the jackpot type buffer; jackpot type buffer value), the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and the initial value is set to the probability variation count value and the hourly count count value according to the jackpot type. Set. For example, in the case of a probabilistic big hit in which the probability change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit, after the end of the big hit, the probability change flag and the short time flag are set to the on state. Also, for example, after the end of the big hit, until the next big hit or 1
In the case of a probabilistic big hit where the probabilistic state and the short-time state continue until the special game of 00 times is completed, the probable variable flag and the short-time flag are set to the on state, and the initial value is set to 100 for the probable variable count value. , 100 is set as the initial value for the count value for time reduction. Also, for example, after the big hit, until the next big hit or until the 30th special drawing game is over, the probabilistic state and the short time state continue, and after the 31st special drawing game, until the next big hit 10
In the case of a probabilistic big hit where the short-time state continues until the special game is completed 0 times, the probable change flag and the short-time flag are set to ON, and the initial value is set to 30 as the probable change count value. The count value is set to 100 as an initial value. Also, for example, after the big hit, the time-short flag is set to ON in the case of a non-probable big hit where the time-saving state continues until the next big-hit or the 100-time special game is over. The count value is set to 100 as an initial value. Also, for example, after the big hit is completed, nothing is done in the case of a non-probable big hit that is neither in the probability variation state nor in the time reduction state (the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are not set to the ON state, and the probability variation count value is also shortened. No value is set for the count value).

Subsequent to step S2014, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S2015 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S1113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 89, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special figure fixed display flag provided in, for example, a game control flag setting unit is on (step S2291). Here, the special figure finalizing display flag corresponds to the fact that the finalized special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game is derived and displayed in step S22.
The ON state is set by the process of 95.

In step S2291, when the special figure confirmation display flag is OFF (step S22).
91; NO), the CPU 103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step S2292). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S2293). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a special figure fixed display time which is a fixed special symbol stop display time (step S2294).
Specifically, the CPU 103 is a RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102).
A predetermined special figure confirmation display time is set as a timer initial value of the special figure confirmation display time timer value which is a stored value of the special figure confirmation display time timer provided in FIG.

Subsequent to the process of step S2294, the CPU 103 sets the special figure confirmation display flag to the on state (step S2295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

In step S2291, when the special figure confirmation display flag is on (step S22).
91; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S2296).
. In the process of step S2296, for example, whether or not the special figure fixed display time timer in which the timer initial value is set in step S2294 has timed out (the special figure variable time timer value is 0).
Or not) may be determined. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S2296 (step S2296; NO), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S2296 (step S2296;
(YES) After clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S2297)
), It is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S2298). If the big hit flag is on (step S2298; YES), a big hit start production waiting time is set (step S2299). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets a timer initial value of the jackpot start presentation waiting time timer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot start presentation waiting time timer provided in the RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102), as a timer initial value. Set a predetermined big hit start production waiting time. Subsequent to the processing in step S2299, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S2300). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag to turn it off (step S2301), and sets the big hit start time flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 102) to the on state (step S2302). And
The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S2305), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the big hit flag is off in step S2298 (step S2298; N
O), it is determined whether or not to end the short-time state or the probability variation state (step S2306). In the process of step S2306, the CPU 103 updates each count value according to whether or not a value (a value other than 0) is set for the probability variation count value or the time variation count value, and displays the time variation state or the probability variation state. It is determined whether or not to end. For example, when a value is set in the short-time count value (for example, a special game that has been digested after the end of a non-probable big hit in which the short-time state continues until the next big hit or 100 times of special game is over. Is less than 100 times, etc.), the time count count value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated short time count value matches a short time end determination value (for example, “0”), and when the updated short time count value does not match the short time end determination value. Determines that the time-short state is not terminated. Also, for example, when the probability variation count value and the short time count count value are set (for example, the probability variation state where the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue until the next big hit or 100 special game games are completed. For example, when the special-figure game digested after the big hit is less than 100 times, etc., the probability variation count value is decremented by 1 and updated, and the short-time count count value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated probability variation count value matches the probability variation end determination value (for example, “0”), and when the updated probability variation count value does not match the probability variation end determination value. Is determined not to end the probability variation state, and if it matches, it is determined that the probability variation state is terminated, and the updated time count count value is the time termination determination value (
For example, it is determined whether or not the time reduction count value after the update does not match the time reduction end determination value, it is determined not to end the time reduction state. If the CPU 103 determines that the probability variation state is to be terminated, the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag to turn it off, and if it is determined to terminate the time variation state, the CPU 103 clears the time variation flag to turn it off.

Subsequent to the processing in step S2306, settings are made to transmit a game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S2307). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated (initialized) to “0” (step S23).
08), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

Note that, in the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 89, the game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state has changed or not, but when the game state has changed (for example, the time reduction state) The gaming state designation command may be transmitted only when the probability changing state changes to the normal state. On the side of the effect control board 12, the current game state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but instead of this, effect control is performed independently of the main board 11 side. The current gaming state may be specified by counting the number of executions of variable display on the substrate 12 side.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit release pre-processing executed in step S1114 of FIG. In the big hit release pre-processing shown in FIG. 90, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit start flag is on (step S2131). here,
The big hit start time flag is set to an on state in response to the big hit flag being on in the special symbol stop process (step S2302 in FIG. 89).

If the big hit start flag is not on in step S2131 (step S2131;
NO), a special winning opening determination process (see FIG. 92) is executed (step S220), and step S2
Go to 138. In this way, in addition to the big hit release process in step S1115,
Even in the post-hit opening process of 1114, by executing the big winning opening determination process, it is possible to suitably detect the winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value. For example, over-winning can be suitably detected while waiting for the next opening (during step S2138 (YES)). The special winning opening determination process will be described later.

Although it has been described that the addition of the number of winning balls when a game ball has won a predetermined number or more of winning balls per unit time has been won, over winning is not excluded. In other words, even if there is a winning exceeding the above-mentioned “winning upper limit judgment value”, if the number of winnings in the excess is within a range generally assumed as an over winning (for example, up to about +3), a winning ball (actual payout) , Reflected in performance information). Exclusion from the addition of the number of winning balls is due to fraud, and the excess winning number is outside the range generally assumed as an over winning.

If the big hit start flag is on in step S2131 (step S2131; Y
ES), it is determined whether or not the big hit start production waiting time has elapsed (step S2132).
. In the process of step S2132, for example, whether or not the jackpot start stage waiting time timer for which the timer initial value was set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process has timed out (the jackpot start stage waiting time timer value becomes 0). Whether or not) may be determined.

If the big hit start production waiting time has not passed (step S2132; NO), the big hit release pre-processing is terminated.

If the big hit start production waiting time has elapsed (step S2132; YES), the CPU
103 clears the big hit start flag (step S2134). CPU1
03 clears the special winning opening opening number counter (step S2135). In particular,
Initialize the grand prize opening opening count value to “1”. Subsequently, the CPU 103 reads the jackpot type buffer value (step S2136), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the read jackpot type buffer value (step S2137). That is, the opening control pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (big winning opening) is set according to the big hit type determined in the special symbol normal process. In the opening control pattern, for example, a big winning opening opening upper limit time for each round is set.

Following the process of step S2137 or the process of step S220, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is waiting for next opening (step S2138). That is, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval period until the next winning round is opened. Step S2
In the process of 138, for example, it is determined whether or not the round start waiting time timer in which the timer initial value is set in step S2366 of the big jackpot release processing has timed out (whether or not the round start waiting time timer value has become 0). What is necessary is just to judge. If it is waiting for the next opening (step S2138; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the big hit pre-release processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is not waiting for the next opening (step S2138; NO), that is, if the interval period has ended, the CPU 103 controls the opening of the big winning opening (step S).
2139). For example, the CPU 103 sets the opening time for opening the grand prize opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S2137 and the count value in the big prize opening number counter, and the big prize opening is in the open state. Set as follows. In particular,
In the process of step S2139, for example, the CPU 103 executes the RAM 102 (RAM 102
In the opening control pattern set in step S2137 as the timer initial value of the opening time timer value stored in the opening time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit) Set (upper limit time to open). Further, in the process of step S2139, a solenoid drive signal may be transmitted via the solenoid circuit 111, and so on, so that the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door may be set to be in the ON state. In the case of the first round (when the special jackpot release pre-processing is executed following the special symbol stop processing), since the round start waiting time (interval period) is not set (because it is zero), the step In the processing of S2138, it is immediately determined that the device is not waiting for the next opening.

Subsequent to the process of step S2139, the CPU 103 performs a setting for transmitting a large winning opening open notification command to the effect control board 12 (step S2140). And
The value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5” (step S2141), and the big hit release pre-processing is terminated.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit release process executed in step S1115 of FIG. In the big hit opening process shown in FIG. 91, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big winning opening opening upper limit time has elapsed (step S2121). If the big winning opening opening upper limit time has not elapsed (step S2121; NO), the big winning opening judgment processing is executed (step S220).

92 shows the big hit release pre-processing (step S1114) of FIG. 90, the big hit open processing (step S1115) of FIG. 91, the big hit release after processing (step S1116) of FIG.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big winning prize determination processing performed in the big hit end process (step S1117) of No. 4.

In the special winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, the CPU 103 first counts the count switch 2.
3 determines whether or not the detection signal transmitted from 3 is turned on (step S221).
If the count switch 23 is not on (step S221; NO), the big prize opening determination process is terminated.

When the count switch 23 is on (step S221; YES), transmission setting of a big prize opening prize notification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening is performed. (Step S222). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is “5”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release processing (step S223). If the value of the special figure process flag is not “5” corresponding to the big hit release process (step S223; NO), the big prize opening determination process is terminated.

If the value of the special figure process flag is “5” corresponding to the big hit release process (step S223; YES), the winning number counter stored in the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 102) is stored. The winning number count value, which is a value, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S224). Then, the special winning opening determination process is terminated. When the process of step S244 is performed in the special winning opening determination process, a prize ball payout process is executed in the prize ball process. Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag,
If any of the round game flags is in the off state, the number of winning balls by the special winning opening is updated in relation to the performance display. However, as shown in FIG. 88, at least during the period from the start of the first round (closing the big prize opening door → opening) to the end of the final round (opening the big prize opening door → closing)
Since the round game flag is in an on state instead of an off state, the number of winning balls by the special winning opening is not updated during the period.

Returning to FIG. Subsequent to the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, it is determined whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value (for example, “10”) (step S2).
126). If the winning upper limit determination value has not been reached (step S2126; NO), the big hit release process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big winning opening opening upper limit time has passed in step S2121 (step S2
121; YES), when the winning upper limit determination value is reached in step S2126 (step S2126; YES), the end of opening of the big winning opening is controlled (step S2127). That is, the CPU 103 determines that the current round game is to be ended, and sets the big prize opening to be closed. For example, what is necessary is just to set so that transmission of the drive signal with respect to the solenoid 82 may be stopped. Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the winning number counter and initializes the winning number count value to “0” (step 2128). Then the value of the special figure process flag is set to “6”.
"" (Step S2129), and the big hit release process is terminated.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit release post-processing executed in step S1116 of FIG. In the post-hit-opening processing shown in FIG. 93, the CPU 103 first executes the big winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 92 (step S220). In this way, in addition to the big hit opening process of step S1115, the big winning opening determination processing is also executed in the post-hit opening process of step S1116, thereby suitably detecting a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value. be able to.

After executing the big prize opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, the CPU 103 updates the value so that the special prize opening number-of-times count value is incremented by 1 (step S2364). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the updated winning prize opening number count value reaches the maximum value (step S2365).
.

In step S 2365, the “maximum value” to be compared with the updated winning prize opening number count value is a number obtained by adding 1 to the round upper limit number. In other words, the special winning opening opening count value compared with the “maximum value” is the updated value (step S2364).
), Because the initial value of the winning prize opening number count value is “1” (S2135 in FIG. 90),
The “maximum value” needs to be a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. For example, in the case of a big hit of 6 rounds (when the upper limit number of rounds is 6), the “maximum value” is “7”, and in the case of a big hit of 16 rounds (when the upper limit number of rounds is 16), The “maximum value” is “17”. It should be noted that instead of the updated large winning opening opening count value, it may be compared with the maximum winning opening opening count value before updating and the “maximum value”. In this case, the “maximum value” may be set as the upper limit number of rounds.

If the winning prize opening opening count value is other than the maximum value (step S2365; NO), a round start waiting time (interval time) is set (step S2366). Specifically, for example, the CPU 103 is a RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102).
A predetermined round start waiting time is set as a timer initial value of a round start waiting time timer value which is a stored value of a round start waiting time timer provided in FIG.

Subsequent to step S2366, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a notification command after opening the big prize opening to the effect control board 12 (step S2367). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (step S2368), and the processing after the big hit release is ended. In this way, until it is determined by the process of step S2365 that the updated winning prize opening number count value is the maximum value, steps S1114 to S1116 shown in FIG.
By repeatedly executing this process, it is possible to execute a plurality of rounds in which the big winning opening is opened in the big hit gaming state. Also, by setting the round start waiting time in the process of step S2366, until the round start waiting time elapses, FIG.
Since the next waiting for opening is performed in the process of step S114 shown in FIG.
2138; YES), the next round can be started after a desired interval period.

If it is determined in step S2365 that the winning prize opening number count value is the maximum value (step S2).
365; YES), an effect waiting time at the end of jackpot is set (step S2369). Specifically, for example, the CPU 103 sets the initial value of the big hit end presentation waiting time timer value, which is a stored value of the big hit end presentation wait time timer provided in the RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102). As described above, a waiting time at the end of a predetermined jackpot is set.

Subsequent to step S2369, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit end designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S2370). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7” (step S2371), and the big hit release post-processing is terminated. In this way, by setting the effect waiting time at the end of jackpot in the process of step S2369, according to the end of the ending effect executed on the effect control board 12 side (FIG. 94).
Step S2321; YES), the special symbol normal process of step S1110 shown in FIG. 87 can be executed.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S1117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 94, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S2321). In the process of step S2321, for example, whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time timer for which the timer initial value was set in step S2369 of the big hit release post process has timed out (the big hit end presentation waiting time timer value becomes 0). Whether or not) may be determined. Step S2321
In step S2321, the big winning end judging process shown in FIG. 92 is executed (step S220), and the big hit ending process is terminated. In this way, in addition to the big hit opening process in step S1115, in the big hit end process in step S1117, the big winning opening determination process is executed, so that it is possible to suitably detect a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value. Can do.

In step S2321, when the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed (step S2).
321; YES), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” (step S2325),
The execution of the jackpot end process is terminated.

The operation of the gaming machine 1 in the case of performing performance display has been described above with reference to FIGS. 87 to 94. According to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. After the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state.
The round game flag is turned on before the round is released. This will be described in detail below.

(A) End of fanfare production → First opening of special variable winning ball apparatus After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (special symbol confirmation display time), the CPU 103 performs the execution time of the fanfare production in the special symbol stop processing. Is set (step S2299 in FIG. 89), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Further, in the pre-hit release pre-processing, after the waiting time has elapsed (step S2132 in FIG. 90; YES), the CPU 103 opens the big prize opening (step S2139 in FIG. 90). That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a closed state before the end of the fanfare effect, and is in the first open state after the end of the fanfare effect.

(B) Set round game flag to ON state → end of fanfare effect When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting time (see FIG. 88). Step S2004) After the elapse of the state change switching waiting time (step S2006 in FIG. 88; YES), the round gaming flag is set to the on state (step S2008 in FIG. 88). Then, as described above, the state change switching waiting time is a time shorter than the big hit start production waiting time (fanfare production execution time). That is, the round game flag is turned on before the end of the fanfare effect.

From (A) and (B) above, the round game flag is set to ON, the end of the fanfare effect, and the first opening of the special variable winning ball device 7. That is, the round game flag is turned on before the first round is released.

In addition, as described above, a gaming state in which the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be thrown for performance display is referred to as a normal state. Specifically, the normal state includes a probability variation flag, a time-short flag, a round game, and the like. All of the middle flags are in a gaming state in an off state (see FIG. 83). Accordingly, at least when the round game flag is in the on state, the normal state is not met. Therefore, at least when the round game flag is in the on state, the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be thrown are not collected for performance display.
That is, at least when the round game flag is in the ON state, the number of winning balls and the number of shots are not reflected in the performance display.

According to (A) and (B) above, since the round game flag is on at the stage before the opening of the first round, the number of winning balls and the hit balls from the stage before the opening of the first round at the latest. The number is not reflected in the performance display (more accurately, it is not reflected). It should be noted that the expression “at the latest” means that the game state during the execution of the special figure game prior to the special figure game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is a probabilistic state or a short time state (that is, at least the probability variation flag or the short time flag). If one of them is on), a stage prior to the above "a certain stage before the opening of the first round" (for example, a stage during execution of a special figure game before the special figure game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) This is because the number of award balls and the number of shots are not already reflected in the performance display.

FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. In the figure, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5. The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 is, in order from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the firing ball detector 700 (launch detection sensor 700A), the state of the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning mouth door) (open state) , Closed state), and the winning timing (game ball detection timing by the count switch 23) to the big winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 95, a jackpot symbol (illustrated as a confirmed ornament symbol “777” in the image display device 5 in the figure) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game (more specifically, as shown in FIG. 89). When the special figure confirmation display time elapses) and when the big hit start waiting time (shown as fanfare effect in the figure) is finished, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened for the first time (the 1R opening in the figure). As shown in FIG. Note that the jackpot effect in the image display device 5 is an effect performed during execution of the big hit opening process (FIG. 91). In addition to the effect performed during the execution of the big hit release process (FIG. 91), the effect performed during the execution of the big hit release post-process (FIG. 93) may also be referred to as a big hit effect.

The timing t1 shown in the lower part of FIG. 95 is a timing when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The timing t3 is a timing at which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened for the first time after the big hit start production waiting time ends. A time T1 between the timing t1 and the timing t3 is a big hit start production waiting time set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 89). Note that the timing t
2 etc. will be described later.

FIG. 95 shows three game balls (game ball a, game ball b,
A state in which the game ball c) is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A is schematically shown. The game ball a is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t1 (for example, during reach production), and is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, a closed prize winning door of the closed winning entrance door). A game ball that has flowed down the front side). The game ball b is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at timing t2, and the timing t3 (
It is a game ball picked up by the grand prize winning door at the moment of opening) and detected by the count switch 23. The game ball c is detected at a timing slightly later than the timing t2.
The game ball is detected by 00A, picked up by the winning opening door at a timing slightly later than timing t3, and detected by the count switch 23.

A time T2 between the timing t1 and the timing t2 is a state change switching waiting time set in step S2004 of the state control process (FIG. 88). The game ball b detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at the timing t2 flows down the game area 10 at the slowest possible flow speed after being detected by the launch detection sensor 700A, and the winning prize door immediately after opening. It is assumed that the game ball is picked up by the player and detected by the count switch 23.
In other words, the game ball detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at a timing earlier than the timing t2 is not detected by the count switch 23. That is, at the timing t2, the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening is detected by the firing detection sensor 700.
The earliest timing that can be detected by A.

That is, the game ball detected by the count switch 23 is present in the game balls detected by the firing detection sensor 700A before the grand prize opening door is opened (for example, during the execution time of the fanfare effect) (for example, game) A game ball detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at any timing of the time T3, such as a ball c), or a game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 700A before the grand prize opening door is opened by the count switch 23. In order to prevent the game balls that can be detected from being reflected in the performance display, the round game flag is set to ON at timing t2 (at the time T2 has elapsed) (step S2008 in FIG. 88).

However, if the round game flag is set to ON at timing t3 (when it is not reflected in the performance display from the opening timing of the grand prize opening door)
For example, the firing detection sensor 700A at any timing of the time T3 such as the game ball c.
The game balls detected by the game will be reflected in the performance display as the number of balls to be thrown in, but there will be inconsistencies such that the number of winning balls won in the big prize opening will not be reflected in the performance display. Can not be. On the other hand, if the round gaming flag is set to the ON state at the timing t2 (at the time T2 has elapsed), the above-described problem is solved.

Although the timing t2 has been described as the earliest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening can be detected by the firing detection sensor 700A, the timing t2 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t2 may be an average timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A, or a timing later than the average timing. May be. In other words, the state change switching waiting time (time T2) set in step S2004 of the state control process (FIG. 88) takes into account the flow time of the game ball (launching ball detector 700 → special variable winning ball device 7). If it is. However, in order to perform performance display more accurately, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned earliest timing as the timing t2. The same applies to FIG.

[Modified example of the launch ball detector]
FIG. 96 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. For example, the gaming machine 1 for displaying performance may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 96 and 97.

In FIG. 96, reference numeral 701 above the first passage gate 41A indicates the first launch detection sensor 7.
It is a 1st shot ball detector provided with 01A (refer FIG. 97). All the game balls passing through the left game area 10A pass through the first firing ball detector 701. That is, the first firing ball detector 701 (
The first launch detection sensor 701A) detects all game balls that pass through the left game area 10A. Reference numeral 702 above the second passage gate 41B is a second firing ball detector provided with a second firing detection sensor 702A (see FIG. 97). All the game balls passing through the right game area 10B pass through the second shot ball detector 702. That is, the second launch ball detector 702 (second launch detection sensor 702A) detects all game balls that pass through the right game area 10B.

FIG. 96 shows an example in which the shot ball detectors 701 and 702 are arranged above the pass gates 41A and 41B. However, if all the game balls can be detected, other positions (for example, the pass gate 41) are shown.
The shot ball detectors 701 and 702 may be arranged below A and 41B). 96, the same components as those in FIG. 85 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 85, and description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 85) is omitted.

In FIG. 97, reference numeral 701A denotes a first launch detection sensor. Reference numeral 702A represents the second
It is a launch detection sensor. In FIG. 97, the same components as those in FIG. 86 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 86, and the description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 86) is omitted.

The operations shown in FIGS. 87 to 94 are also applied to the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. In other words, special chart processing for performance display in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, and special processing for performance display in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. This is the same as diagram processing.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. In FIG. 98, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5. The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 is the launch ball detectors 701 and 7 in order from the top.
02 (launch detection sensors 701A, 702A), the detection timing of the game ball, the state of the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening door) (open state, closed state), the winning timing to the big winning opening (by the count switch 23) Game ball detection timing).

FIG. 98 shows three game balls (game ball a, game ball b,
A state in which the game ball c) is detected by the first launch detection sensor 701A (or the second launch detection sensor 702A) is schematically shown. The game ball a is detected by the first launch detection sensor 701A (or the second launch detection sensor 702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t1, and is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, in a closed state). A game ball that has flowed down the front door of the grand prize opening door). The game ball b is detected by the first launch detection sensor 701A (or the second launch detection sensor 702A) at the timing t2, picked up by the big prize opening door at the timing t3 (the moment when it is opened), and detected by the count switch 23. Game balls to be played. The game ball c is first at a timing slightly later than the timing t3.
A game ball detected by the firing detection sensor 701A (or the second firing detection sensor 702A), picked up by the winning opening door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and detected by the count switch 23.

The first launch ball detector 701 (first launch detection sensor 701A) and the second launch ball detector 7
02 (second firing detection sensor 702A) can detect the game ball at the same time, but even when the game ball is detected at the same time, each of the detected game balls is captured (counted) It is possible. For example, each game ball detected at the same time may be captured as the number of shot balls, for example, by shifting the execution timing of the process executed after detection (the process of counting).

The arrangement position of the launch ball detector 700 shown in FIG. 85 and the first launch ball detector 7 shown in FIG.
Since the positions of the 01 and the second shot ball detector 702 are different from each other, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, the game balls launched by the hitting ball launcher in the configuration of FIGS. 96 and 97 are detected as the first shot balls. The time until it is detected by the detector 701 (or the second firing ball detector 702) is shown in FIG.
In the configuration shown in FIG. 86, the time required for the game ball fired by the ball striking device to be detected by the shot ball detector 700 is longer. 96 and 97, the time until the game ball detected by the first launch ball detector 701 (or the second launch ball detector 702) reaches the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 7 is as follows. 85 and 86, the time required for the game ball detected by the shot ball detector 700 to reach the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 7 is short.

Therefore, the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 98) set in the case of the configuration of FIGS. 96 and 97 is the state change switching waiting time (in FIG. 9) set in the case of the configurations of FIGS.
5 is longer than time T2).

The first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 (or the parts including the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 (referred to as part A)) are connected to the game board 2. On the other hand, it may be detachable. Further, the game board 2 is configured by a part A and one or more parts other than the part A, and the part A may be detachable from one or more parts other than the part A. For example, in FIG. 96, a portion including the first firing ball detector 701 and the second launching ball detector 702 (a portion above the broken line P in FIG. 96) may be removable.

[Modification using out-sphere detector]
FIG. 99 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 100 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. Game machine 1 for performance display
For example, the configuration shown in FIGS. 99 and 100 may be used.

In FIG. 99, a reference numeral 710 in a broken line is an out sphere detector provided with an out sphere detection sensor 710A. The out-sphere detector 710 is arranged at a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the front side, but for convenience of explanation, in FIG. 99, it is illustrated using a broken line. Reference numeral 52 denotes an out port. Winning mouth (first general winning opening 50A, second general winning opening 50B, third general winning opening 50C,
The game balls that have not entered the fourth general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening are taken into the out opening 52.

The out ball detector 710 detects all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 10 by the hitting ball launching device. In other words, the game ball launched into the game area 10 is a prize opening (first general prize opening 50).
A, 2nd general winning opening 50B, 3rd general winning opening 50C, 4th general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening) or not entering the winning opening It is either taken into the out port 52. The game balls that have entered the winning opening and the game balls that have been taken into the out slot 52 are finally collected in one path on the back surface (or inside) of the game board 2. Since the out-ball detector 710 is arranged on the above-described path, the game area 10 is obtained by the hitting ball launching device.
Detect all game balls launched in

FIG. 99 shows an example in which the out ball detector 710 is arranged at the center in the left and right direction (below the out port). However, if all the game balls can be detected, other positions (for example, the right side in the left and right direction). The out-sphere detector 710 may be disposed on the left side or the left side in the left-right direction. 99, the same components as those in FIG. 85 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 85, and description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 85) is omitted.

In FIG. 100, reference numeral 710A denotes an out sphere detection sensor. In FIG. 100, the same components as those in FIG. 86 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 86, and the description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 86) is omitted.

In the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, the state control process (FIG. 10) of step S1101B is substituted for the state control process (FIGS. 87 and 88) of step S1101A.
1) is executed. The other special drawing processes (the processes shown in FIGS. 89 to 94) are also applied to the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of a state control process executed in the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS. In the state control process shown in FIG.
103 determines first whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S20).
21). When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S2021 (step S2021; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S2022). If the round game flag is off in step S2022 (step S2022; NO), the state control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the in-round game flag is on in step S2022 (step S20).
22; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting flag is ON (step S2023).

If the state change switching wait flag is off in step S2023 (step S2023).
NO), the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting time (step S2024).
Specifically, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined state change switching waiting time as a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value that is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer. The state change switching waiting time set in the processing of step S2024 is the post-hit opening post-processing (
This is a time shorter than the big hit end production waiting time set in step S2369 of FIG. Although details will be described later, time T4 in FIG.
Time T5 in FIG. 102 is a state change switching waiting time.

Subsequent to step S2024, the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting flag to an on state (step S2025). Then, the state control process ends.

If the state change switching wait flag is on in step S2023 (step S2023).
YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S2026). In the process of step S2026, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S2024 has timed out (whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). That's fine. Step S2026
If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed (step S2026; NO), the state control process is terminated.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S2026 (step S2026).
; YES), the CPU 103 clears the state change switching waiting flag to turn it off (step S2027), and clears the round game flag to turn it off (step S20).
28).

Subsequent to step S2028, the CPU 103 performs setting for starting the time reduction state or the probability variation state (step S2029). Note that the process of step S2029 is the same as the process of step S2014 of the state control process (step S1101A) shown in FIG.

Subsequent to step S2029, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S2035). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. Then, the state control process ends.

When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S2021 (step S20)
21; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (
Step S2030). When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S2030 (step S2030; NO), the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S2030 (step S203)
0; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is ON (
Step S2031). If the round game flag is on in step S2031, (
Step S2032; YES), the state control process ends.

If the round game flag is OFF in step S2031, step S2031;
NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit start presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S2032). In the processing of step S2032, the big hit release pre-processing (
Similar to the processing of step S2132 in step S1114), it may be determined whether or not the jackpot start stage presentation waiting time timer in which the timer initial value is set has timed out in step S2299 of the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. . If the big hit start production waiting time has not elapsed in step S2032 (step S2032; NO), the state control process is terminated.

If the big hit start production waiting time has elapsed in step S2032 (step S20).
(32; YES), the CPU 103 sets the round gaming flag to the ON state (step S2033).

Subsequent to step S2033, the CPU 103 performs setting for ending the time-shortening state or the probability variation state (step S2034). Note that the process of step S2034 is the same as the process of step S2009 of the state control process (step S1101A) shown in FIG.

Following the process of step S2034, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S2035 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIG. 99 and FIG. In FIG. 102, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5. The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 is, in order from the top, the state of the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening door) (open state, closed state), the winning timing to the large winning opening (game by the count switch 23) Sphere detection timing), and the game ball detection timing by the out sphere detector 710 (out sphere detection sensor 710A).

As shown in FIG. 102, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the final opening (illustrated as the final R opening in the figure) is finished, and the big hit end effect (illustrated as the ending effect in the figure) is performed.

The timing t4 shown in the lower part of FIG. 102 is the timing at which the final opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 ends (timing at which the big prize opening door is closed). Timing t4 is also the start timing of the ending effect. Timing t6 is the end timing of the ending effect. Time T4 between timing t4 and timing t6 is
This is the jackpot end time effect waiting time set in step S2369 of the jackpot release post-processing (FIG. 93). The timing t5 and the like will be described later.

FIG. 102 shows three game balls (game ball d, game ball e) fired by the hit ball launching device.
, The game ball f) is schematically shown as being detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710A. The game ball d is picked up by the grand prize opening door at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t4, detected by the count switch 23 at a timing slightly later than the timing t4, and an out-ball detection sensor at a timing earlier than the timing t5. It is a game ball detected by 710A. The game ball e is picked up by the grand prize opening door at timing t4 (moment of closing)
The game ball is detected by the count switch 23 at a timing later than the timing t4 and detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710A at the timing t5. Game ball f
Is a game ball that is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, a game ball that has flowed down the front side of the closed prize-winning door), which is later than timing t5 (further than timing t6). Game balls detected by the out-ball detecting sensor 710A.

A time T5 between the timing t4 and the timing t5 is a state change switching waiting time set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101). Timing t4
The game ball e picked up by the grand prize door is moved to the position detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at the slowest possible speed after being picked up by the big prize door (the count switch 23 in the middle of movement). ) And a game ball detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710A. In other words, a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at a timing later than the timing t5 is not detected by the count switch 23. That is, the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of closing can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A.

In other words, the game balls detected by the count switch 23 exist among the game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A after the grand prize opening door is closed (for example, during the ending effect execution period) (for example, A game ball detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710A at any timing of the time T5, such as a game ball d), even if it is a game ball detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710A after the grand prize opening door is closed. In order to prevent the game balls that can be detected by 23 from being reflected in the performance display, the round gaming flag is cleared to OFF at timing t5 (when time T5 has elapsed) (step S2028 in FIG. 101). That is, until timing t5 (time T5)
Keeps the round game flag in the ON state so that it is not reflected in the performance display.

If the round game flag is cleared to the OFF state at timing t4 (when the performance display is reflected from the closing timing of the grand prize opening door),
The winning prize opening is won before the timing t4, and the out ball detection sensor 71 after the timing t4.
The number of award balls when a game ball detected by 0A (a game ball launched at a slightly earlier timing than the game ball d) wins a big prize opening is not reflected in the performance display, Will be reflected in the performance display, and an accurate performance display will not be possible. on the other hand,
If the round game flag is cleared to the OFF state at the timing t5 (at the time T5 has elapsed), the above-described problem is solved.

In addition, although timing t5 demonstrated that the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of closing was the latest timing which can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A, timing t5 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t5 may be an average timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of closing is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A, or at an earlier timing than the average timing. There may be. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101) is the game ball moving time (special variable winning ball device 7 → out ball detector 71).
0) may be considered. However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable that the latest timing is the timing t5.

FIG. 103 shows a configuration example of the out sphere detector. The out-sphere detector 710 described above may be, for example, as shown in FIG. An out-sphere detector 710 illustrated in FIG. 103A includes a main body 720 and a harness 730. The main body 720 detects an opening ball (passing portion) 721 through which a game ball that has entered one of the winning holes or a game ball taken into the out port 52 passes, and an out ball detection that detects a game ball that passes through the opening 721 Sensor 710A;
A connecting portion 722. The harness 730 includes a signal line 734 having connection portions (connection portions 732 and 733) connected to both ends and a connection portion for connecting to the connection portion 722 on the main body 720 side (
Connector) 732 and a connection portion (connector) 733 for connecting to a predetermined connection portion (not shown) provided on the main substrate 11 side. Note that FIG. 103A (also in FIG. 103B) shows a state where the main body 720 and the harness 730 are connected. In addition, in a connection part (connection part 733, the connection part of the main board | substrate side 11), the out ball | bowl detector 710 (harness 730).
) And the main board 11 are detachable. Moreover, in the connection part (connection part 722,732),
The main body 720 and the harness 730 may be detachable.

The game balls that have entered one of the winning holes or the game balls that have been taken into the out-port 52 are finally collected in one path and all pass through the opening 721. When the game ball that has passed through the opening 721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710 </ b> A, a detection signal indicating that the game ball has been detected is output to the main board 11 side via the harness 730. The out sphere detector 71
Since the game balls detected by 0 are counted (counted) as the number of shot balls, the out ball detection sensor 710A may be referred to as a count switch.

In addition, the out-ball detector 710 has the harness 730 when the harness 730 is disconnected from the main body 720 (when the connection portion 722 on the main body 720 side and the connection portion 732 on the harness 730 side are not properly connected). Etc. are disconnected (such as a break in the middle of the signal line 734, a break between the signal line 734 and the connection portion 732, a break between the signal line 734 and the connection portion 734). It is configured to output to the substrate 11 side. Therefore, CPU1
03 can detect a missing harness or the like by monitoring a signal input from the out-sphere detector 710 in the error detection process described above. For example, the CPU 103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when an ON signal is input for a predetermined time or longer.

Further, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-ball detector 710 when the game ball passes through the opening 721 may be configured by a predetermined on / off pattern. When at least a part of the detection signal is composed of a predetermined on / off pattern, the CPU
103 can detect signal corruption due to noise or the like by monitoring a signal input from the out-sphere detector 710.

Further, the out-sphere detector 710 may be provided with a clasp 740 having a screw hole 741 as shown in FIG. 103 (B). Alternatively, the out sphere detector 710 (the main body 72
0) may be attachable with a clasp 740. The clasp 740 has a main body 72.
Any member may be used as long as it is an example of a fixing member for fixing 0 to the gaming machine 1 or the like and can fix the main body 720 to the gaming machine 1 or the like.

Further, the harness 730 (at least a part of the connection portions 732, 734, and the signal line 734) may be protected by a cover or the like. Moreover, the main body 720 and the harness 730 may be separate. That is, the main body 720 of the out-ball detector 710 is a separate harness 73.
0 may be connectable.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error notification process for errors related to performance display. FIG. 105 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to the performance display. FIG.
In the error notification process shown in 04, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal output from the out-sphere detector 710 has been detected (step S1200).
.

If there is an abnormality in the out ball detector 710 (for example, missing harness, disconnection, garbled signal, etc.), the CPU 103 detects out ball detection in a process (error detection process described above) different from the error notification process. A reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal output from the device 710 is detected. For example, the CPU 103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when the ON signal continues for a predetermined time. Further, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-sphere detector 710 is configured by a predetermined on / off pattern, and the CPU 103
May be determined to be garbled when a received signal that is different from a predetermined on / off pattern is input.

If no reception abnormality is detected in step S1200 (step S1200; NO)
The CPU 103 determines whether or not a reception error flag provided in the RAM 102 (for example, a game control flag setting unit) is on (step S1201). Step S1201
If the reception error flag is on (step S1201; YES), the CPU 103 clears the reception error flag to turn it off (step S1202), and step S12.
Proceed to 05. If the reception error flag is off in step S1201 (step S12)
01; NO), the process of step S1202 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1205.

If a reception abnormality is detected in step S1200 (step S1200; YES),
The CPU 103 determines whether or not the reception error flag is on (step S1203).
). If the reception error flag is OFF in step S1203 (step S1203; N
O) The CPU 103 sets the reception error flag to the on state (step S1204).
The process proceeds to step S1205. If the reception error flag is on in step S1203 (step S1203; YES), the process of step S1204 is skipped and step S12 is performed.
Proceed to 05.

Step S1201 (NO), Step S1202, Step S1203 (YES),
Following any processing in step S1204, it is determined whether the reception error flag is on (step S1205).

If the reception error flag is off in step S1205 (step S1205; NO)
), The CPU 103 controls to display the performance in the normal mode (normal mode) (step S1206). In the process of step S1206, the CPU 103 causes the process shown in FIG.
Control is performed so that the performance display is performed according to the display mode shown in FIG. Then, the error notification process ends.

If the reception error flag is on in step S1205 (step S1205; YE
S), the CPU 103 performs control so that the error notification mode is displayed (step S1).
207). In the process of step S1207, for example, the CPU 103 performs control so that display according to the display mode of FIG. In the display mode of FIG. 105 (A), the upper two digits are “-(flashing)” and the lower two digits are “-(lit)”. Then, the error notification process ends.

In the case of a reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal by the out ball detector 710, the number of balls to be hit (FIG. 83 (B)) is not naturally updated, but the number of winning balls ( FIG. 83 (B
)) Is not updated. That is, the CPU 103 performs the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B as in the case of the combination (relation ratio) / ratio related processing (FIG. 61, etc.).
Each winning information is acquired by detecting the game ball by any one of the count switch 23 and the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D (
However, in a situation where the number of hit balls is not updated, the number-of-balls adding process based on the winning information is not performed.

According to the error notification process shown in FIG. 104, the upper two digits are normally displayed as “bL. (Blinking, lighting)” or “b6. (Blinking, lighting)” (FIG. 84B). ~ Fig. 84 (F
)), "-(Lights up)" is displayed when reception is abnormal (FIG. 105 (A)). That is, when reception is abnormal, the upper two digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in normal times. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal by looking at the display of the upper two digits.

Note that the display mode illustrated in FIG. 105A is an example. For example, in the process of step S1207, control may be performed so that the display in FIG. 105B is performed instead of the display in FIG. Similar to FIG. 105 (A), the upper two digits of FIG.
This is a display mode that is not normally displayed. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal by looking at the display of the upper two digits.

Further, for example, in the process of step S1207, control may be performed so that the display according to the display mode of FIG. 105 (C) or FIG. 105 (D) is performed. In the upper second digit of FIG.
(Blinking) "and the upper two digits" Er. (Blinking) "in FIG. 105 (D) are reminiscent of" Err ". Therefore, it can be easily recognized that there is an abnormality by looking at the display of the upper two digits (or the upper second digit).

Further, in FIGS. 105A to 105D, the lower two digits are “-(lit)”, but the lower two digits may be “-(flashing)” or other display. An aspect may be sufficient.

When the display is normal, that is, in the display by the process of step S1206, FIG.
The display content changes as shown in FIGS. 84 (B) to 84 (F) according to the section shown in A) and every 5 seconds, but when it is abnormal, that is, in the display by the processing of step S1207, The display content does not change at all times (that is, even if a reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. 84A or 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of display). That is, the display when it is abnormal is simpler than the display when it is normal. Accordingly, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is not normal (or abnormal) without causing confusion or extra burden.

FIG. 106 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to the performance display. 105 (A) to 105 (D) are displayed regardless of whether reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. 84 (A) or 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of display. Even when the content does not change but is abnormal, for example, as shown in FIG.
As shown in (A) to FIG. 106 (E), the display content may be changed. 106 (A)-
In the display mode of FIG. 106 (E), the lower two digits are blinking, as shown in FIGS. 84 (B) to 84 (F).
) Is different from the display mode. According to the error notification mode of FIG. 106, since the display content changes according to the section, in addition to being not normal, the section at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) (the section shown in FIG. 84A), The real-time base value at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) and the previous cumulative base value can also be recognized.

In order to prevent the player from showing the real-time base value or the previous cumulative base value when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lower two digits indicating the real-time base value in FIGS. 106 (B) to 106 (E) 106 (D) and 106 (E), the lower two digits indicating the previous cumulative base value may be, for example, “Er. (Blinking)”. That is, in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (E), the lower two digits may be “-(flashing)” or “Er. (Flashing)”.
According to the display mode, in addition to being not normal, the section at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) (FIG. 84).
(Section shown in (A)) can be recognized.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 104, when the error (abnormality) is resolved, the display returns to the normal mode display (step S1206), but when the error is resolved, the error notification is performed without returning to the normal mode display. The mode display (step S1207) may be continued. In addition, when the error is resolved, the display is returned to the normal mode, but the notification that the error has occurred may be continued.

As a first example, after the error is resolved, the normal mode display (FIG. 84 (A) to FIG. 84 (F)).
), The lowest-order (fourth digit) dot may blink (or light up). Also 2
As a first example, a display monitor different from the display monitor 1130 (for example, one digit) is arranged on the main board 11, and after the error is resolved, the display monitor 1130 returns to the normal display. A display monitor different from the display monitor 1130 may continue to notify that there is an error (for example, “E. (blink)”).

The first example is exactly the same as the normal mode display when the error has been resolved (except for the blinking (lighting) of the lowest dot informing that an error has occurred). In the display mode of the first example, in order to provide the information provided (displayed) in the display of the normal mode (except for the lowest dot, the display of the normal mode) Because it is the same), it is expressed that the display is restored to the normal mode. Further, the display monitor (display monitor different from the display monitor 1130) for notifying that there has been an error in the second example, as with the display monitor 1130, does not clear the display when the power is cut off. To do. In other words, information indicating that an error has occurred is prevented from being cleared due to a power failure such as a power failure.

It should be noted that, in the aspect of displaying the performance information as well as the above-described aspect of displaying the combination (ream ratio) and the combination of ratios, the RAM is connected to the main board 11 by operating the clear switch.
Data used for performance display stored in 102 may be cleared. The clear switch in the mode for displaying the performance information is operated when the performance display calculation has to be performed again, such as when a failure occurs in the performance information calculation. When the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data, as in the mode of displaying the ratio) and the role ratio.

When the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying performance information,
As in the case where the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying the role ratio (FIGS. 61 and 62), the warning table is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the error display (display mode shown in FIGS. 105 and 106). Can be done. When the clear switch is operated when there is a reception abnormality, both error display and warning display may be performed. For example, an error display and a warning display may be displayed in order. In the case of performing performance display according to the display mode shown in FIG. 106, for example, error display (real-time base value), error display (
The previous cumulative base value) and the warning display may be displayed in order.

Further, in the aspect of displaying the performance information as in the above-described aspect of displaying the combination (ream ratio) and the combination ratio, an error indicator may be provided on the main board 11 separately from the display monitor 130. Good. When an error indicator is provided on the main board 11 in addition to the display monitor 130, the error indicator is preferably arranged at a position away from the display monitor 29. In the configuration in which the main board 11 is provided with the display monitor 130 and the error indicator, when a reception abnormality occurs, information indicating the reception abnormality is displayed on the error indicator and the display monitor 130 is displayed.
May be displayed by the display mode shown in FIG. 105 or 106.

In addition, when a reception abnormality occurs, for example, a predetermined error display may be performed on the first special symbol display device 4A on the second special symbol display device 4B or the like so that the reception abnormality can be recognized. It may be. In addition, a predetermined error display may be performed on the image display device 5 by transmitting an abnormality detection designation command for designating that a reception abnormality has occurred, or the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinks in a predetermined pattern. Alternatively, predetermined sounds (including voices) may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R.
Further, by transmitting information indicating that a reception abnormality has occurred, an information display device (for example,
In a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a calling lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 1) and an information management device (such as a hall computer),
You may enable it to recognize that it is reception abnormality.

Other devices, etc. (error display, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L and 8R, information display device, information management device Etc.) regardless of whether or not the reception abnormality can be recognized.
At 30, the display may be erased. In other words, when reception abnormality occurs, for example, all four digits of the display monitor 130 are all turned off (the “off” means not always displayed but not displayed in “flashing”). Alternatively, any one digit (or two digits or three digits) of all four digits of the display monitor 130 may be turned off. That is, the display at the time of reception abnormality (display by the process of step S1207) at least restricts the display at the time of normal (display by the process of step S1206) (display to recognize that the reception is abnormal). As long as the performance display is limited, or the display is limited by deleting part or all of the performance display).

FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing (game control timer interrupt processing) performed by the CPU 103. In the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 107, the CPU 103 first executes an error detection process (step S10) and an error (abnormal).
Is detected, an error is notified (step S11). In the processing of steps S10 and S11, the CPU 103 monitors a signal output from the out sphere detector 710, for example,
A reception abnormality of the signal output from the out-sphere detector 710 is detected (step S10), and when a reception abnormality is detected, the display monitor 1130 and the like are notified (step S11).

Subsequent to step S11, the CPU 103 executes a random number update process (step S12).
). In the random number update process in step S12, the CPU 103 updates, for example, a game random number (for example, a big hit determination random number, a big hit type determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number, etc.) used on the main board 11 side. Subsequent to step S12, the CPU 103 executes special symbol processing (special symbol process) (step S13). In the special drawing process of step S13, C
For example, the PU 103 executes various processes illustrated in FIGS. 87 to 94, FIG. 101, and the like.

Subsequent to step S13, the CPU 103 executes a performance information update process (step S13).
14A, S14B). Details of the performance information update processing will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes performance information display processing (step S15). In the performance information display process of step S15, for example, the CPU 103 displays the performance information updated in the performance information update process (steps S14A and S14B) on the display monitor 1130 as shown in FIG.

Subsequent to step S15, the CPU 103 executes prize ball processing (step S16).
In the prize ball processing in step S16, for example, the CPU 103 calculates the number of prize balls based on detection signals from various switches, and controls the payout mechanism so that the calculated number of game balls are paid out. Subsequent to step S16, the CPU 103 performs general symbol processing (normal symbol process processing).
Is executed (step S17). In the normal symbol process at step S17, the CPU 103 controls, for example, the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 and the operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Subsequent to step S17, the CPU 103 executes information output processing (step S18). In the information output process of step S18, the CPU 103
For example, the information display device (for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a calling lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 1) or an information management device (such as a hall computer) Various information such as information, start-up information, probability variation information, and abnormality information is output. Then, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Note that the processing in steps S10 to S18 shown in FIG. 107 has explained a part of the processing executed in the game control timer interrupt processing, and the CPU 103 performs steps S10 to S18 in the game control timer interrupt processing. (For example, a switch process for inputting (determining) the state of a detection signal input from various switches, a process for transmitting an effect control command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side, etc.) can be executed. is there.

In the case of the configuration of FIG. 86, in the above switch processing, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning port switches 24A to 24A.
Detection signals from the fourth general prize port switch 24D, the firing detection sensor 700A, and the like are detected by the CPU 103.
Is output. In the case of the configuration in FIG. 97, instead of the firing detection sensor 700A, detection signals from the first launch detection sensor 701A and the second launch detection sensor 702A are output to the CPU 103. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 100, the out-sphere detection sensor 710 is replaced with the firing detection sensor 700A.
A detection signal A is output to the CPU 103.

Moreover, the execution order of each process of step S10-S18 of the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 107 is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 103 may execute the information output process prior to the random number update process, or may execute the normal process immediately after the special figure process.

The grouping (units of each process) of each process such as the error detection process (step S10) and the error notification process (step S11) is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 103 performs the processing shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 5, error notification processing (step S11) and performance information display processing (step 15).
May be executed as one process. In the error notification process of FIG. 104, the process of step S1206 (a process for controlling performance display according to the normal mode) is performed.
This corresponds to the performance information display process (step S15) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG.

The relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 107 and the error notification process of FIG. 104 will be supplemented. As described above, the error notification process of FIG. 104 may be regarded as a combination of the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) of FIG. , For reasons of convenience of explanation (for the purpose of explaining that the display mode (normal mode, error notification mode) of the display monitor 1130 differs depending on whether there is an abnormality) .

FIG. 107 shows the game control timer interrupt process when performance information is displayed, but the game control timer interrupt process when displaying a combination (continuity ratio) and role ratio is the same.
That is, the performance information update process (step 14A) in FIG. 107 is a process for updating the role (relation ratio) and the role ratio, and the performance information display process (step 15) is for the role (relation ratio) and the role ratio. What is necessary is just processing. The relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 107 and the processes shown in FIGS. 61 to 64 is similar to the game of FIG. The relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) in the control timer interrupt process and the error notification process of FIG. 104 is the same.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S14A) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 109 is similar to FIG.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance information update process (step S14B) performed in the timer interruption process for game control shown to 07.

The CPU 103 executes the performance information update process (S14A) in FIG. 108 in a mode in which the state control process (step S1101A) in FIG. 88 is executed. That is, the performance information update process (S14A) in FIG. 108 is performed by the firing ball detector 700 (launch detection sensor 700A), or the first launch ball detector 701 (first launch detection sensor 701A) and the second launch ball detector. Executed in a configuration comprising 702 (second firing detection sensor 702A). On the other hand, the CPU 103
In the mode of executing the state control process (step S1101B) of FIG. 101, the performance information update process (S14B) of FIG. 109 is executed. That is, the performance information update process (S1 in FIG. 109).
4B) is executed in a configuration including an out-sphere detector 710 (out-sphere detection sensor 710A).

In the performance information update process (S14A) of FIG. 108, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S20). If the probability variation flag is not on in step S20 (step S20; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is on (step S21).

If the time flag is not on in step S21 (step S21; NO), the CPU 1
03 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is ON (step S22). In the case of the start of the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 95 and FIG. 98, the round gaming flag is
State change switching waiting time set in step S2004 of the state control process (FIG. 88) (
95 and 98, since the state is changed from the off state to the on state in step S2008 after the elapse of time T2), the process of step S22 is performed when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses at the start of the big hit gaming state. It can also be said that it is determined whether it is later.

If the round game flag is not on in step S22 (step S22; NO)
That is, if the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has not elapsed, the CPU 103 adds the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit and calculates a base value that is performance information (step S23). In the process of step S23, for example, the CPU 103 adds the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 83 (B)), and the firing detection sensor. Based on the detection result (detection signal) such as 700A, the number of shot balls is added (FIG. 83B), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 83A). Then, the performance information update process (step S14A) is terminated.

On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is turned on in step S20 (step S20; YES), the time reduction flag is turned on in step S21 (step S21; YES), or if the round game flag is turned on in step S22 ( Step S22; YES), the performance information update process (Step S14A) is terminated without performing the process of Step S23.

In the performance information update process (S14B) of FIG. 109, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S30). If the probability variation flag is not on in step S30 (step S30; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is on (step S31).

If the time flag is not on in step S31 (step S31; NO), the CPU 1
03 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is ON (step S32). In the case of the end of the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 102, the round gaming flag is the state change switching waiting time (FIG. 10) set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101).
In step S2028 after the elapse of time T5) of 2, the on state is changed to the off state.
It can be said that the process of step S32 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed at the end of the big hit gaming state.

If the round game flag is not ON in step S32 (step S32; NO)
That is, if the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed, the CPU 103 adds the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit, and calculates a base value that is performance information (step S33). In the process of step S33, for example, the CPU 103 adds the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of various winning openings (FIG. 83 (B)), and detects the out ball. Based on the detection result (detection signal) of the sensor 710A, the number of shot balls is added (FIG. 83 (B)),
Thereafter, the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 83 (A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S14B) ends.

On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is turned on in step S30 (step S30; YES), the time-short flag is turned on in step S31 (step S31; YES), or the round game flag is turned on in step S32 ( Step S32; YES), the performance information update process (step S14B) is terminated without performing the process of step S33.

The performance information update process (step S14A) in FIG. 108 and the performance information update process in FIG. 109 (
According to step S14B), when the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are all in the OFF state, the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be used as the basis for the performance display are added. In addition, FIG.
As shown in 08 and FIG. 109, the performance information update process (step S14A) in FIG.
The performance information update process (step S14B) in FIG. 109 refers to the state of the probability variation flag, the time-short flag, and the round game flag, adds the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit, and the base value that is performance information However, the relationship between the state of the round game flag and the state change switching waiting time is different (specifically, the performance information update process (
In step S14A), before the elapse of time T2, the round game flag is in an off state, FIG.
In the performance information update process (step S14B), the round game flag is off after the elapse of time T5), which has been described with reference to separate drawings.

The processing shown in FIGS. 107 to 109 is based on the detection results (output results of various switches of various winning awards, firing detection sensors) when the probability variation flag, the short time flag, and the round game flag are all off. (Output result of 700A etc.) is reflected (added) as performance information,
This is a process of not reflecting the detection result by the switch process as performance information when at least one of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, or the round game flag is in an ON state. In other words, the game ball is detected in the switch process regardless of the state of the flag, but it is determined whether to reflect the detection result as performance information according to the state of the flag. However, if both the probability variation flag, the hourly flag, and the round game flag are in the off state, the number of winning balls and the number of shots are reflected as performance information, and the probability variation flag, the time flag, and the round game flag are reflected. If at least one is in the ON state, other processes may be used as long as the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit are not reflected as performance information. For example, when all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are in the off state, the switch processing related to the number of shots (the firing detection sensor 700A, the first firing detection sensor 701A, the second firing detection sensor 702A, the out ball detection) (Detection by the sensor 710A) is executed, and when at least one of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, or the round game flag is in an on state, the switch processing relating to the number of shots may not be executed. That is, it may be a process of determining whether or not to execute a switch process related to the number of shot balls according to the state of the flag. Note that the switch processing related to the number of winning balls (detection by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D, etc.) is actually Therefore, the switch processing relating to the number of winning balls is executed regardless of the flag state, and whether the detection result is reflected in the performance information as in the processing shown in FIGS. You may determine according to a state.

FIG. 110 is an example of an arrangement position of the out-sphere detector. FIG. 110A is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2 is released from the outer frame 3A. A main board 11 and the like are mounted on the back side of the game board 2. A base member 1129 is provided on the main board 11, and a display monitor 1130 is provided on the base member 1129. Display monitor 1
130 is accommodated in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 1129 and the main substrate 11.

Note that the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110A (the display monitor 11 shown in FIG. 110B).
30 is the same, as shown in the figure, the rear surface of the main board 11 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction and the upper side in the up-down direction, but the display monitor 1130 may be arranged at other positions on the back surface. For example, the rear surface of the main substrate 11 may be arranged in the center in the left-right direction and in the lower side in the up-down direction. In addition, when it arrange | positions on the upper side of the back surface of the main board | substrate 11, when a display clerk etc. stand and confirms the display content, it is convenient to see the display content. Moreover, when it arrange | positions under the back surface of the main board | substrate 11, when a store clerk etc. sits down or bends and confirms display content, it is easy to see display content conveniently. In addition, various wirings (signal lines) may exist above the main board 11 of the game board 2. Then, it is assumed that such wiring is bent or a bundle is removed and covers the main substrate 11. When the display monitor 1130 is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 11, it is more convenient that a bent wiring is not covered with the display monitor 1130 as compared with the case where the display monitor 1130 is arranged on the upper side. Further, although related to the above, the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110A (same as the display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110B) is similar to the display monitor 130A shown in FIG. The mode of arrangement is the same. However, the appearance of the display monitor 1130 and the manner of arrangement on the main board 11 are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, the display monitor 1130 is shown in FIG.
0 to display monitors 130B, 130C, 130D, 130E, 130F, 1 shown in FIG.
An appearance such as 30G, 130H, and 130I may be used.

In FIG. 110 (A), the game board 2 (for example, the bottom, lower part, etc. of the game board)
Game balls that have entered the first general winning port 50A, the second general winning port 50B, the third general winning port 50C, the fourth general winning port 50D, the first starting winning port, the second starting winning port, the big winning port) Out mouth 52
An opening (a hole at the exit of the game ball) 2A for discharging the game ball taken in to the outside is provided. In addition, passages a, b, and c indicated by broken lines are passages (ball collection passages) through which game balls that have entered the winning opening and game balls that have been taken into the out opening 52 pass. Whether it is a game ball that has entered the winning port or a game ball that has been taken into the out port 52, it passes through one of the passages a, b, and c, and is finally discharged from the opening 2A to the outside. Is done.

The out ball detector 710 is provided on the game board 2 side as shown in FIG. 110 (A). Specifically, the out ball detector 710 is provided at a position where the game ball discharged from the opening 2A can be detected. That is, as with the opening 2A, the out ball detector 710 is provided in a flow path for discharging game balls that have entered the winning opening and game balls that have been taken into the out port 52.

The game balls detected by the out ball detector 710 are collected by a ball receiving member 1700 provided on the outer frame 3A side (game island side). Further, the signal line 7 of the out-sphere detector 710
34 is connected to the main board 11. That is, the game ball discharged from the opening 2 </ b> A of the game board 2 passes through the opening 721 of the out-ball detector 710 and is collected on the game island by the ball receiving member 1700. Further, the game ball passing through the opening 721 is detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710 </ b> A, and a detection signal is output to the main board 11.

An opening (game ball outlet hole) 1701 is provided at the bottom of the ball receiving member 1700 (portion where the game ball rides). Although not shown, the bottom is inclined toward the opening 1701. doing. That is, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving member 1700 from the gaming machine 1 (opening 721) passes through the opening 1701 and is discharged to the outside (lower side) of the ball receiving member 1700.

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), the out-ball detector 710 is placed on the outer frame 3A side (the game island side).
You may make it provide in. 110B, the out-ball detector 710 is provided at a position where a game ball discharged from the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 can be detected.
That is, like the opening 1701, the out-ball detector 710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball taken into the out-port 52, and the opening of the ball receiving member 1700 is provided. A game ball discharged from 1701 is detected. In FIG. 110B, the clasp 7
Illustration of 40 is omitted.

110A is an example in which the out ball detector 710 is installed using the clasp 740, but the out ball detector 710 may be installed using a fixing member other than the clasp 740.
The same applies to the example of FIG. 110 (B).

110A and 110B, the out ball detector 710 is an external component, but the game board 2 or the like may include the out ball detector 710 from the beginning. For example, FIG.
Then, an out ball detector 710 may be provided below the opening 2A of the game board 2 (the same position as in FIG. 110A). Further, an out-ball detection sensor 710A may be provided in the opening 2A of the game board 2 (the opening 2A of the game board 2 is the opening 721 of the main body 720).
Equivalent). The same applies to the example of FIG. 110 (B).

110A shows three passages (passages a, b, and c), but the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 52 eventually reach the opening 2A. If it is a thing, the number and shape of a channel | path are not limited to the example shown to FIG. 110 (A). The same applies to the example of FIG. 110 (B).

Note that the state change switching waiting time (set in the process of step S2024 in FIG. 101)
Time T5) in FIG. 102 is the time required until the game ball picked up by the big prize opening door is detected by the count switch 23, and the game ball detected by the count switch 23 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A. It is influenced by the time required until Specifically, as the required time is shorter, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) can be shortened (not necessarily shortened).

Therefore, for example, in order to shorten the state change switching waiting time (time T5), FIG.
In this configuration, the time until the game ball detected by the count switch 23 is discharged from the opening 2A may be shortened. Specifically, the length of the passage (for example, the passage a) through which the game ball detected by the count switch 23 passes is shortened or the game ball that has passed through the passage is immediately inclined to enter the opening 2A. And guidance may be provided. 110B, instead of or in addition to the above, the time until the game ball discharged from the gaming machine 1 (opening 721) reaches the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 is short. What should I do. As an example, the inclination of the bottom of the ball receiving member 1700 may be increased.

It should be noted that the opening 2A of the game board 2 and the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 may be widened so that the game ball does not get clogged and so that the game ball flows quickly. A plurality of openings may be provided, or the ball receiving member 1700 may be provided with a plurality of openings.

When the opening 2A of the game board 2 is widened, a plurality of out-ball detectors 710 (out-ball detection sensors 710) are provided so that the game balls discharged from the widened opening 2A can be detected without omission.
A) may be provided. The same applies to the case where the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 is widened. Further, when a plurality of openings are provided in the game board 2, a plurality of out-ball detectors 710 (corresponding to the respective openings) so that the game balls discharged from the respective openings can be detected without omission. An out-sphere detection sensor 710A) may be provided. Ball receiving member 1
The same applies to the case where a plurality of openings are provided in 700.

When a plurality of out-ball detectors 710 (out-ball detection sensors 710A) are provided, a game ball can be detected at the same time. For example, by shifting the execution timing of processing executed after detection for one of the simultaneously detected balls. Each of the game balls detected at the same time may be captured as the number of shot balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 performing the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device or the like) for launching a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) to a game area (for example, the game region 10 or the like) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, first or second) The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are used for deriving and displaying a definite special symbol that will be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol that will be a big hit combination in the image display device 5, and passing a game ball in a specific area). A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.) advantageous to the player based on
Detecting means capable of detecting the game medium launched into the game area (for example, a fire ball detector (FIG. 85) provided on the guide rail, and fire ball detectors 701 and 702 provided in the game area (
FIG. 96))
Variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 or the like) that can be changed to an open state in which the game medium launched into the gaming area can win a prize;
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 50A to 50D serving as general winning regions, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7)
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the player is in the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 that determines whether or not the gaming state is based on a probability change flag, a time-shortage flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) 83. For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible).
The variable winning means is
Change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 95 and FIG. 98, based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at timing t1, The door changes from closed to open)
The determination means includes
A predetermined period before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, FIG. 95, FIG. 98).
As shown in FIG. 88, for example, in the state control process of FIG. 88, the state is determined to be the advantageous state from the timing t3 before the timing t3 when the grand prize opening door changes from the closed state to the opened state. As shown, timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses.
Set the round game flag in the ON state, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, a game ball (for example, a game ball in FIG. 95) detected by the launch detection sensor 700A or the first launch ball detector 701 (second launch ball detector 702) at any timing of the time T3. c)) is not included in the performance display calculation, an accurate base value can be calculated.

Also, the above gaming machine 1 is
Variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the image display device 5, etc.) for performing variable display and deriving and displaying the display results;
The state (for example, the state at the timing t2) before the predetermined period from the change to the open state is
A special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, a state where a fanfare effect is executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, etc.) It is.

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. That is, the predetermined information is not included without including a game ball (such as the game ball c shown in FIGS. 95 and 98) that is fired after the change stop (after the stop display) and may win the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. (Performance information) can be calculated.

In the above embodiment (FIGS. 88, 95, 95, etc.), the round game flag is turned on from the off state during execution of the fanfare effect after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The round game flag may be changed from the off state to the on state before the execution of (such as during the execution of the reach effect). For example, if the execution time of the fanfare effect is short (for example, 2, 3 seconds, etc.), a game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected before the start of the fanfare effect. 700A and the first launch ball detector 701 (
The special variable winning ball device 7 because it may be detected by the second firing ball detector 702).
The round gaming flag may be changed from the off state to the on state before the fanfare effect is performed so that the game balls that may win the game are not included in the performance display. Specifically, for example, the special game variation time may be referred to and the round game flag may be set to the on state at a timing before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The round game flag may be changed from the off state to the on state at the start of execution of the fanfare effect.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means is detachable (for example, as shown in FIG. 96, the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 include the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702, respectively. The portion above the broken line P is detachable.

Thereby, even if it does not have a detection means, it can respond. In addition, maintenance becomes easy.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means includes
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2 or the like) that forms a game area (for example, the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 are shown in FIG. 96). The portion above the broken line P is configured as a unit).

This facilitates maintenance. In addition, different models can be used in common.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The game area includes
There are a left game area (for example, the left game area 10A, etc.) and a right game area (for example, the right game area 10A, etc.) as areas through which the game medium launched by the launching device can pass,
The unit (for example, a part above the broken line P in FIG. 96)
Left side detection means (for example, the first launch ball detector 701 etc.) for detecting game media passing through the left game area and right side detection means (for example, for detecting game media passing through the right game area)
Second firing ball detector 702).

  As a result, it can be detected regardless of where the game area is fired.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means includes
It is provided upstream of any winning area provided in the gaming area in the flow path of the game medium (for example, as shown in FIG. 85, the launch ball detector 700 includes the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the general winning ports 50A to 50D, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 are provided above the first launch ball detector 701 and the second as shown in FIG.
The firing ball detector 702 includes a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning port 50.
A to 50D, provided above the special variable winning ball apparatus 7).

  Thereby, it can detect reliably.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device or the like) for launching a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) to a game area (for example, the game region 10 or the like) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, first or second) The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are used for deriving and displaying a definite special symbol that will be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol that will be a big hit combination in the image display device 5, and passing a game ball in a specific area). A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.) advantageous to the player based on
Variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 or the like) that can be changed to an open state in which the game medium launched into the gaming area can win a prize;
Variable winning control means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the special figure processing shown in FIG. 87) capable of performing a round game for changing the variable winning means to the open state a predetermined number of times;
A game medium that has passed through any of the winning areas provided in the gaming area (first general winning opening 5
0A, 2nd general winning port 50B, 3rd general winning port 50C, 4th general winning port 50D, game balls won in any of the first starting winning port, second starting winning port, or large winning port) A flow path (for example, an opening 2A of the game board 2A as shown in FIG. 110 (A)) for discharging game media (such as a game ball taken into the out port 52) that has not passed through the winning area. The position at which the game ball discharged from the ball can be detected and the opening 170 of the ball receiving member 1700 as shown in FIG.
A detection means (for example, an out-ball detector 710) provided at a position where a game ball discharged from 1 can be detected) and capable of detecting a game medium passing through the flow path;
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 50A to 50D serving as general winning regions, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7)
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the player is in the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 that determines whether or not the gaming state is based on a probability change flag, a time-shortage flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) 83. For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible).
The variable winning control means is
The round game is started based on the fact that the advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, the big winning opening door is controlled from the closed state to the open state based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped),
The determination means includes
Until a predetermined period elapses after the predetermined number of round games are finished and the variable winning means is changed to the closed state (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, the big prize opening door is changed from the open state to the closed state). When the time T5 elapses until the time t5 when the time T5 elapses), it is determined that the state is advantageous (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 101, the time when the state change switching waiting time (time T5) elapses). For example, the round game flag is cleared to the off state at t5).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball detected by the out-ball detector 710 at any timing in the time T5 (for example, the game ball d in FIG. 102) is not included in the calculation of the performance display, so that A simple base value can be calculated.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The state when the predetermined period elapses (for example, the state at the timing t5) is
A special state after the predetermined number of round games have been completed (for example, a state where an ending effect is being executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 102).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. In other words, even for a game ball detected by the out ball detector 710 during the ending effect, a game ball (such as the game ball d shown in FIG. 102) that may win the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Since it is not included in the calculation of the predetermined information (performance information), accurate predetermined information can be calculated.

In the above embodiment (FIGS. 101, 102, etc.), the round gaming flag is changed from the on state to the off state during execution of the ending effect after the final round. The round game flag may be changed from the on state to the off state during the first variable display in the big hit. For example, when the execution time of the ending effect is short (for example, 2, 3 seconds, etc.), a game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected as an out ball detector 710 after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, after executing the ending effect, the round gaming flag is changed from the on state to the off state so that the game balls that may win the special variable winning ball device 7 are not included in the performance display. May be. Specifically, for example, the state change switching waiting time set in step S2024 in FIG. Note that the round game flag may be changed from the on state to the off state at the end of execution of the ending effect.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means is detachable (for example, the out-sphere detector 710 is detachable by a clasp 740 as shown in FIG. 103B).

Thereby, even if it does not have a detection means, it can respond. In addition, maintenance becomes easy.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means includes
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2 or the like) that forms a game area (for example, game board 2 for out ball detector 710 as shown in FIG. 110 (B)). It is configured as a unit that can be placed in).

This facilitates maintenance. In addition, different models can be used in common.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A gaming machine that can execute a game and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.)
Detection means (for example, the out ball detector 710 shown in FIG. 103, FIG. 110, etc.) capable of detecting game media (for example, the game area 10) used in the game;
A signal line (for example, the signal line 7 shown in FIG. 103) through which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted.
34)
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, main board 11, a predetermined connection provided on the main board 11 side, etc.);
An abnormality detection means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the error notification process in FIG. 104) capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal;
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 50A to 50D serving as general winning regions, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7)
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) 83. For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible).
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection unit, the display by the information display unit is restricted (for example, an error is notified as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, and the performance display is restricted).

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing inaccurate display.
For example, in order to show the performance display value well, the harness 730 (connection portion 732,
733), the performance display by the display monitor 1130 is limited at least, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the number due to the fraud is displayed as valid. be able to.

In the above gaming machine 1,
When a reception state abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit, the display state by the information display unit is changed to indicate that the reception state abnormality is detected (for example, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106) For example).

  Thereby, it can confirm, without providing a new display means.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The abnormality detection means can detect disconnection of the signal line (for example, can be detected by monitoring a signal input from the out-sphere detector 710),
The fact that the disconnection of the signal line has been detected is detected externally (for example, the game effect lamp 9, the speaker 8L).
8R, card unit display device, call lamp device, hall computer, etc.).

  Thereby, it can recognize, without performing door opening operation | work.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, an out-sphere detector 71).
0 is configured as a unit that can be placed on the game board 2 as shown in FIG. 110 (B)).

This facilitates maintenance. In addition, different models can be used in common.

Also, in FIG. 83 to FIG. 110, pachinko gaming machines are shown as gaming machines that display performance,
A medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets are set, multiple types of symbols are rotated (reel is rotated) according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped according to the stop button operation by the player When the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ ( Hereinafter, the present invention can also be applied to slot machines equipped with one or more of bonuses etc.).

For example, a slot machine that displays performance is a slot machine that can execute a game and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and a game medium (for example, a medal) used in the game And a detection line (for example, a inserted medal sensor that detects a inserted medal) and a signal line (for example, a detection signal from the inserted medal sensor) that transmits a detection signal from the detection unit. A signal line to be output to the main board side of the machine), receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board of the slot machine, a predetermined connecting portion provided on the main board side), and the detection signal An abnormality detection means (for example, a CPU on the main board of the slot machine) and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, a combination of specific symbols on each reel (a role) In a predetermined state different from the advantageous state, and a payout means (for example, a hopper motor for paying out a medal stored in a hopper tank from a medal payout outlet) Predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, information indicating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts, etc.) ) Can be displayed (for example, a display unit provided on the main board of the slot machine), and when the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality in the reception state, the information display unit displays the information. It may be a slot machine that restricts (for example, notifies an error and restricts display of information indicating the ratio).

1 ... Pachinko machine
2… Game board
3 ... Frame for gaming machines
3a ... Glass door frame
3A ... Outer frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device
5 ... Image display device
6A ... Ordinary winning ball device
6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device
7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker
9 ... Game effect lamp
11 ... Main board
12 ... Production control board
13 ... Voice control board
14 ... Lamp control board
15… Relay board
20 ... Normal symbol display
21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch
23 ... Count switch
29 ... Display monitor
30 ... Operation buttons 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 1000 ... Movable accessory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a launching device for launching a game medium to a game area, which can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of an advantageous condition,
Variable winning means capable of changing into an open state in which the game medium launched into the gaming area can be won;
Variable winning control means capable of performing a round game for changing the variable winning means to the open state a predetermined number of times;
A game medium that is provided in a flow path for discharging game media that has passed through any of the winning areas provided in the gaming area and game media that has not passed through any of the winning areas, and that passes through the flow path. Detectable detection means;
A payout means for paying out game media based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state;
Information capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state Display means,
The variable winning control means is
Starting the round game based on the establishment of the advantageous condition;
The determination means includes
A gaming machine, characterized in that it is determined to be in the advantageous state until a predetermined period elapses after the predetermined number of round games are completed and the variable winning means is changed to a closed state.

Images